Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual PDF

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge
Enterprise Customer Training Manual
Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department
2015
2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual
CONTENTS
1 Huawei Training & Certification Service Overview ............................................................. 18
1.1 Introduce Huawei Training & Certification Service ............................................................. 18
1.1.1 ICT Convergence Training & Certification Solution .................................................... 18
1.1.2 Huawei Training Service ............................................................................................. 18
1.1.3 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products and
solutions ................................................................................................................................... 19
1.1.4 Learning Path .............................................................................................................. 20
1.1.5 Huawei's Career Certification ...................................................................................... 21
1.1.6 Training Instructors ...................................................................................................... 22
1.1.7 Training Methods ......................................................................................................... 22
1.2 Huawei World Wide Learning Center ................................................................................. 23
1.2.1 China Global Training Center (CGTC) ........................................................................ 23
1.2.2 Malaysia Global Training Center (MGTC) ................................................................... 24
1.3 General Terms and Conditions ........................................................................................... 25
1.3.1 Validity ......................................................................................................................... 25
1.3.2 Training Application ..................................................................................................... 25
1.3.3 Training Cancellation Terms ........................................................................................ 25
1.3.4 Training location .......................................................................................................... 25
1.3.5 Training Service Language ......................................................................................... 26
1.3.6 Training Quality Assurance ......................................................................................... 26
1.3.7 Other Services for Trainee .......................................................................................... 26
1.3.8 Intellectual Property Right ........................................................................................... 27
1.4 Huawei online learning center (Learning Website) ............................................................ 28
1.4.1 How to register for a website account? ....................................................................... 28
1.4.2 How to get online learning resource? ......................................................................... 28
1.4.3 Frequently-Used Functions on Learning Website....................................................... 29
2 Enterprise Network Training Solution ................................................................................. 30
2.1 Training Path ...................................................................................................................... 30
2.1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ...................................................... 30
2.1.2 WLAN Certification Training Path ............................................................................... 31
2.1.3 Security Certification Training Path ............................................................................. 32
2.1.4 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path .................................... 33
2.1.5 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path .................................................. 34
2.1.6 NE Routers Training Path ........................................................................................... 35
2.1.7 AR G3 Routers Training Path ..................................................................................... 36
2.1.8 AR Industrial Router Training Path ............................................................................. 37
2.1.9 Campus Network Switch (S series) Training Path ...................................................... 38
2.1.10 S12700 Agile Switch Training Path ...................................................................... 39
2.1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Training Path ....................... 40
2.1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path ..................................................................... 41
2.1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path ................................................................................ 42
-1-
2.1.14 PTN Product Training Path .................................................................................. 43

2.1.15 Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Path ............................................................. 44
2.1.16 Agile Controller Training Path .............................................................................. 45
2.1.17 AnyOffice Training Path ....................................................................................... 46
2.1.18 Enterprise Network Design Training Path............................................................ 47
2.1.19 Firewall Training Path .......................................................................................... 48
2.1.20 Security Management Software Training Path .................................................... 49
2.1.21 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path ............................................... 50
2.1.22 Anti-DDoS Defense System Training Path .......................................................... 51
2.1.23 UMA System Training Path .................................................................................. 52
2.2 Required Training Programs .............................................................................................. 53
2.3 Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 59
2.4 Routing and Switching Career Certification Training Programs ........................................ 59
2.4.1 HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training ............................... 59
2.4.2 HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training (Fast-track) ........... 60
2.4.3 HCNP-R&S Training .................................................................................................... 61
2.4.4 HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track) ............................................................................... 62
2.4.5 HCIE-R&S training ...................................................................................................... 63
2.5 WLAN Career Certification Training Programs .................................................................. 64
2.5.1 HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing Enterprise Basic WLAN Training ........................ 64
2.6 Security Career Certification Training Programs................................................................ 66
2.6.1 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ....................... 66
2.6.2 HCNP-Security Training .............................................................................................. 67
2.7 Routing and Switching Specialist Certification Training Programs .................................... 69
2.7.1 HCS-Field-R&S Training ............................................................................................. 69
2.8 WLAN Specialist Certification Training Programs .............................................................. 71
2.8.1 HCS-Field-WLAN Training .......................................................................................... 71
2.9 IP Technology Fundamental Training Programs ................................................................ 74
2.9.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ........................................................... 74
2.9.2 Huawei VRP System Training ..................................................................................... 75
2.9.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training ........................................................................... 76
2.9.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training ......................................................................... 78
2.9.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ................................................................. 79
2.10 IP Network Advanced Technology Training................................................................. 81
2.10.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technology Training ........................................................ 81
2.10.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training .............................................................. 82
2.10.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technology Training ........................................................ 84
2.10.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technology Training ........................................................... 86
2.10.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training ................................................................... 87
2.10.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training...................................................................... 89
2.10.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training ................................................................... 90
2.11 NE40E-X Router Training Programs ........................................................................... 91
-2-
2.11.1 NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 91

2.11.2 NE40E-X Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 92
2.11.3 NE40E-X Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training ................. 94
2.12 NE20E-S Router Training Programs ........................................................................... 96
2.12.1 NE20E-S Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 96
2.12.2 NE20E-S Router Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 97
2.13 NE05E&08E Router Training Programs ..................................................................... 99
2.13.1 NE05E&08E Router Installation and Commissioning Training............................ 99
2.13.2 NE05E&08E Router Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 100
2.14 AR G3 Router Training Programs ............................................................................. 102
2.14.1 AR G3 Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................... 102
2.14.2 AR G3 Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 103
2.14.3 AR G3 Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training ................... 105
2.15 AR SOHO Router Training Programs ....................................................................... 107
2.15.1 AR SOHO Router Installation and Commissioning Training ............................. 107
2.15.2 AR SOHO Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 108
2.16 AR Industrial Router Training Programs ....................................................................110
2.16.1 AR Series Industrial Router Installation and Commissioning Training ...............110
2.16.2 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training .................. 111
2.16.3 AMI Solution Training ..........................................................................................113
2.17 Campus Network Switch (S series) Training .............................................................114
2.17.1 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ......114
2.17.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training ......115
2.17.3 Campus Network Switch (S series) Essential Operation and Maintenance
Training ............................................................................................................................116
2.17.4 Campus Network Switches(S series) Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training ............................................................................................................................118
2.18 S12700 Agile Switch Training ................................................................................... 120
2.18.1 S12700 Agile Switch Installation and Commissioning Training ......................... 120
2.18.2 S12700 Agile Switch Essential Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 121
2.18.3 S12700 Agile Switch Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............. 123
2.19 Data Center Switch(CE Series)Training Programs ................................................... 125
2.19.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning
Training ........................................................................................................................... 125
2.19.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Essential Operation and
Maintenance Training ............................................................................................................. 126
2.19.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Advanced Operation and
2.20 WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs ................................................................... 130
2.20.1 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................... 130
2.20.2 WLAN Essential Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................... 131
2.20.3 WLAN Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 132
-3-
2.20.4 WLAN Planning & Optimization Training ........................................................... 133

2.21 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs ............................................................................. 136
2.21.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 136
2.21.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 137
2.21.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training ............................................... 139
2.21.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training.......................................................... 140
2.21.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training ......................................... 141
2.22 PTN Products Training Programs ............................................................................. 142
2.22.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training ................................... 142
2.22.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................... 143
2.22.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................................. 144
2.22.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................... 146
2.22.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training ..................................................... 147
2.23 Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Programs .......................................................... 148
2.23.1 eSight-IP Enterprise NMS Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 148
2.23.2 eSight-IP WLAN Management Training ............................................................. 149
2.23.3 eSight-IP MPLS VPN Management Training ..................................................... 150
2.23.4 eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel Management Training ................................................. 151
2.23.5 eSight-IP SLA Management Training ................................................................ 152
2.23.6 eSight-IP IPSec VPN Management Training ..................................................... 153
2.23.7 eSight-IP Smart Reporter Management Training .............................................. 154
2.23.8 eSight-IP NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training....................... 155
2.23.9 eSight-IP Terminal Resources Management Training ....................................... 156
2.23.10 eSight-IP SecureCenter Management Training ................................................. 157
2.23.11 eSight-IP LogCenter Management Training ...................................................... 158
2.23.12 eSight Agile Features TrainingSVF&iPCA.................................................. 159
2.24 Agile Controller Training Programs ........................................................................... 160
2.24.1 Agile Controller Operation & Maintenance Training .......................................... 160
2.25 AnyOffice Training Programs .................................................................................... 161
2.25.1 Anyoffice Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 161
2.26 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs......................................................... 162
2.26.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training .................................................... 162
2.26.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training ................................................... 163
2.26.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training ............................................................. 164
2.26.4 Data Center Network Design Training ............................................................... 165
2.27 Security Technology Fundamental Training .............................................................. 166
2.27.1 Firewall Technology Fundamental Training ....................................................... 166
2.28 Security Advance Technology Training ..................................................................... 167
2.28.1 Firewall VPN Technology Training ..................................................................... 167
2.28.2 Firewall UTM(Unified Threat Management) Technology Training ..................... 168
2.28.3 Firewall Reliability &Attack Defense Technology Training ................................. 169
2.29 USG2000/5000 Firewall Training .............................................................................. 170
-4-
2.29.1 USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 170

2.29.2 USG2000/5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 171
2.30 USG6000 Next Generation Firewall Training ............................................................ 173
2.30.1 USG6000 Installation and Commissioning Training .......................................... 173
2.30.2 USG6000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training................................ 174
2.30.3 USG6000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 176
2.31 USG9000 High-end Firewall Training ....................................................................... 177
2.31.1 USG9000 Installation and Commissioning Training .......................................... 177
2.31.2 USG9000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training................................ 178
2.31.3 USG9000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 180
2.32 SVN(Security Virtual Network) Training .................................................................... 181
2.32.1 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................. 181
2.32.2 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 182
2.33 ASG( Application Security Gateway) Training .......................................................... 183
2.33.1 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................. 183
2.33.2 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 184
2.34 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training ............................................................. 185
2.34.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................... 185
2.34.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 186
2.35 Security Management Software Training .................................................................. 187
2.35.1 Policy Center Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 187
2.36 Anti-DDoS Defense System Training ........................................................................ 188
2.36.1 Anti-DDoS Defense System Operation and Maintenance Training .................. 188
2.37 UMA System Training ................................................................................................ 189
2.37.1 UMA System Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 189
2.38 Security Planning and Design Training ..................................................................... 190
2.38.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training .............................................................. 190
3 Enterprise UC&C Training Solution .................................................................................. 191
3.1 Training Path .................................................................................................................... 191
3.1.1 UC Career Certification Training Path....................................................................... 191
3.1.2 CC Career Certification Training Path....................................................................... 192
3.1.3 VC Career Certification Training Path ....................................................................... 193
3.1.4 Huawei eSpace IPT System Training Path ............................................................... 194
3.1.5 Huawei eSpace UC System Training Path ............................................................... 195
3.1.6 CC Operation and Maintenance Training Path ......................................................... 196
3.1.7 Video Conference Product Training Path.................................................................. 197
3.2 Required Training Programs ............................................................................................ 198
3.3 Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 200
3.4 UC Career Certification Training Programs ..................................................................... 200
3.4.1 HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration ....... 200
3.4.2 HCNP-UC (Fast-Track) Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions .. 202
3.5 CC Career Certification Training Programs ..................................................................... 205
-5-
3.5.1 HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration Training ...... 205
3.6 VC Career Certification Training Programs ...................................................................... 207
3.6.1 HCNA-VC Training .................................................................................................... 207
3.6.2 HCNP-VC Training .................................................................................................... 208
3.7 IVS Specialist Certification Training ................................................................................. 210
3.7.1 HCS-Field-IVS Training ............................................................................................. 210
3.8 Huawei eSpace IPT System Training ................................................................................211
3.8.1 Huawei eSpace IPT System Configuration and Operation Training..........................211
3.8.2 Huawei eSpace IPT System Troubleshooting Training ............................................ 213
3.9 Huawei eSpace UC System Training ............................................................................... 214
3.9.1 Huawei eSpace UC System Configuration and Operation Training ......................... 214
3.10 CC General Training Programs ................................................................................. 217
3.10.1 Contact Center Management and Monitoring Training ..................................... 217
3.11 CC Contact Center Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 218
3.11.1 Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation Training
........................................................................................................................... 218
3.11.2 Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training ........................................................................................................................... 220
3.12 eSpace VTM System Training .................................................................................. 222
3.12.1 eSpace VTM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 222
3.13 VC Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................. 224
3.13.1 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC/RSE) Operation and
3.13.2 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation
and Maintenance Training...................................................................................................... 226
3.13.3 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training ............................ 227
3.14 Huawei eSpace IVS System Training ....................................................................... 228
3.14.1 Huawei IVS System Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 228
3.14.2 VCM Intelligent Analysis System Deployment and Management Training ....... 230
3.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight-UCC Training .............................. 231
3.15.1 eSight-UCC Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 231
3.15.2 eSight-UCC UC Business Management Training.............................................. 233
3.15.3 eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management Training ....................................... 234
3.15.4 eSight-UCC IVS Business Management Training ............................................. 235
4 Enterprise IT Training Courses ......................................................................................... 237
4.1 Training Path .................................................................................................................... 237
4.1.1 Storage Career Certification Training Path ............................................................... 237
4.1.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Path ............................................................ 238
4.1.3 Server Specialist Certification Training Path ............................................................. 239
4.1.4 Data Center Specialist Certification Training Path .................................................... 240
4.1.5 Unified Storage Training Path ................................................................................... 241
-6-
4.1.6 Massive Storage Training Path ................................................................................. 243

4.1.7 Server Products Training Path .................................................................................. 244
4.1.8 Cloud Computing Training Path ................................................................................ 245
4.1.9 IT Network Management Training ............................................................................. 246
4.1.10 Disaster Recovery and Backup Training Path ................................................... 247
Training Programs .............................................................................................................................. 248
4.4 Storage Career Certification Training Programs .............................................................. 252
4.4.1 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training ............. 252
4.4.2 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training(Fast-Track ,
For channel ) .......................................................................................................................... 253
4.4.3 HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training ................... 254
4.4.4 HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training .............................. 255
4.4.5 HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training .................... 256
4.5 Cloud Computing Career Certification Training Programs............................................... 257
4.5.1 HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training ........................... 257
4.5.2 HCNP-Cloud-FCDC FusionCloud DataCenter Solution Training ............................. 259
4.5.3 HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Building Big Data Analysis Platform Training ........................... 260
4.5.4 HCNP-Cloud-FCDS FusionCloud Desktop Solution Training................................... 261
4.6 Server Specialist Certification Training Programs............................................................ 262
4.6.1 HCS-Field-Server Training ........................................................................................ 262
4.7 Data Center Specialist Certification Training Programs ................................................... 264
4.7.1 HCS-Field-MicroDC Training..................................................................................... 264
4.8 IT Fundamental Training Programs .................................................................................. 265
4.8.1 Storage Fundamental Technology Training .............................................................. 265
4.9 IT Advanced Training Programs ....................................................................................... 266
4.9.1 OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced Feature Training ............................. 266
4.9.2 OceanStor Unified Storage System Design Training ................................................ 267
4.9.3 Big Data Storage Advanced Technology Training..................................................... 268
4.9.4 Big Data Storage Design Training ............................................................................. 269
4.9.5 Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology Training .............................. 270
4.9.6 Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training ...................................................... 271
4.10 Unified Storage Training Programs ........................................................................... 272
4.10.1 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training ............................................................................................................ 272
4.10.2 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track , For channel ) ................................................................ 274
4.10.3 T seriesV2 (S26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and
4.10.4 OceanStor V3 Storage System Deployment and Management Training .......... 277
4.10.5 OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment and
-7-

4.10.6 SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product Deployment and
4.10.7 Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management
Training ........................................................................................................................... 282
4.10.8 VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and
4.10.9 Huawei Storage System Troubleshooting Training ........................................... 285
4.11 Massive Storage Training Programs ......................................................................... 286
4.11.1 OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training ...... 286
4.11.2 N8500 V2 Cluster NAS System Deployment and Management Training ......... 288
4.12 Data Protection Training Programs ........................................................................... 289
4.12.1 VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training 289
4.13 Server Training Programs ......................................................................................... 290
4.13.1 RH V2 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ................ 290
4.13.2 RH V3 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ................ 291
4.13.3 X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training .......................... 292
4.13.4 E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ................ 293
4.13.5 E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server Deployment and Management
Training ........................................................................................................................... 294
4.13.6 Huawei Server Troubleshooting Training........................................................... 295
4.14 Cloud Computing Training Programs ........................................................................ 296
4.14.1 Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training ................ 296
4.14.2 FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training .......................... 297
4.14.3 FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and Management Training ................. 298
4.14.4 FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training ................. 299
4.14.5 FusionInsight Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................ 300
4.14.6 Huawei Cloud Computing System Troubleshooting Training ............................ 301
4.15 IT Network Management Training Programs ............................................................ 302
4.15.1 Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT Operation and Maintenance Training
........................................................................................................................... 302
4.16 Disaster Recovery and Backup Solution Training Programs .................................... 303
4.16.1 OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and Management Training ............... 303
4.16.2 Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution Deployment and
5 Enterprise Wireless Training Solution .............................................................................. 305
5.1 Training Path .................................................................................................................... 305
5.1.1 GSM-R BSS Training Path ........................................................................................ 305
5.1.2 GSM-R CS Training Path .......................................................................................... 306
5.1.3 GSM-R PS Training Path .......................................................................................... 307
5.1.4 GSM-R OSS Training Path ....................................................................................... 308
5.1.5 eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training Path .................................................... 309
-8-
5.1.6 eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training Path ...................................................... 310

5.2 Required Training Programs .............................................................................................311
5.4 GSM-R BSS Training........................................................................................................ 315
5.4.1 GSM-R System Overview Training ........................................................................... 315
5.4.2 GSM-R Principle Training .......................................................................................... 316
5.4.3 GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R013) .............. 317
5.4.4 GSM-R BTS Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................. 318
5.4.5 GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and Commissioning Training .................................... 319
5.4.6 GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 320
5.4.7 GSM-R BSS Data Configuration Training ................................................................. 321
5.4.8 GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 322
5.5 GSM-R CS Training .......................................................................................................... 323
5.5.1 eCNS300 System Overview Training........................................................................ 323
5.5.2 GTSOFTX3000 Hardware Training ........................................................................... 324
5.5.3 GTSOFTX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................. 325
5.5.4 GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration Training ............................................................ 326
5.5.5 UMG8900 Hardware Training ................................................................................... 327
5.5.6 UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 328
5.5.7 UMG8900 Data Configuration Training ..................................................................... 329
5.5.8 HSS9860 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 330
5.5.9 GSM-R Feature Training ........................................................................................... 331
5.6 GSM-R PS Training .......................................................................................................... 332
5.6.1 UGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 332
5.6.2 UGW9811 Data Configuration Training..................................................................... 333
5.6.3 USN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA) ........................................... 334
5.6.4 USN9810 Data Configuration Training...................................................................... 335
5.6.5 PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training ...................................................... 336
5.7 GSM-R OSS Training ....................................................................................................... 337
5.7.1 iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance Training(BSS) ...... 337
5.7.2 iManager M2000V200R013 PS Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 339
5.7.3 iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (SUN) .......................... 340
5.7.4 iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster) ............ 342
5.8 GSM-R RNP&RNO........................................................................................................... 343
5.8.1 GSM-R Radio Network Design and Planning Training ............................................. 343
5.8.2 GSM-R Radio Network Optimization Training .......................................................... 344
5.8.3 GSM-R Radio Network Analysis Training ................................................................. 345
5.9 eLTE Principle Training..................................................................................................... 346
5.9.1 eLTE Basic Principle Training ................................................................................... 346
5.9.2 eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Training ............................................................ 347
5.10 eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training ............................................................ 348
5.10.1 eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview Training ...................................... 348
-9-
5.10.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Trunking) .................................. 349

5.10.3 eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Trunking) ................................................ 350
5.10.4 eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Trunking) ..................................................... 351
5.10.5 eCNS210 System Overview Training ................................................................ 352
5.10.6 eCNS210 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 353
5.10.7 eCNS210 Data Configuration Training .............................................................. 354
5.10.8 eOMC910 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 355
5.10.9 Dispatching System Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 356
5.10.10 Terminal Operation Training(Trunking) .............................................................. 357
5.10.11 eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 358
5.10.12 eSCN230 Data Configuration Training .............................................................. 359
5.10.13 eLTE Rapid Solution Training ............................................................................ 360
5.11 eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training ............................................................... 361
5.11.1 eLTE Broadband Access System Overview Training ........................................ 361
5.11.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Access) .................................... 362
5.11.3 eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Access) ................................................... 363
5.11.4 eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Access) ....................................................... 364
5.11.5 eCNS600 System Overview Training ................................................................ 365
5.11.8 U2000 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 368
5.11.9 Terminal Operation Training(Access) ................................................................ 369
5.12 eLTE RNP&RNO Training ......................................................................................... 372
5.12.1 eLTE Trunking Radio Network Planning and Optimizing Overview Training .... 372
5.12.2 eLTE Trunking Radio Network Design and Dimensioning Training................... 373
5.12.3 eLTE Trunking Radio RF Network Optimizing Training ..................................... 374
6 Network Energy Training Solution .................................................................................... 375
6.1 Training Path .................................................................................................................... 375
6.1.1 Telecom Energy Training Path .................................................................................. 375
6.1.2 Data Center Energy Training Path ............................................................................ 376
6.4 UPS Specialist Certification Training Programs ............................................................... 378
6.4.1 HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Specialist Certification Training ................................. 378
6.5 Telecom Energy Training Programs ................................................................................. 379
6.5.1 Minishelter(ITS1000M) System Operation and Maintenance Training ..................... 379
6.5.2 Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 380
6.5.3 Power3000(DC Power) System Design Training ...................................................... 381
6.5.4 PowerCube1000 System Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 382
6.6 Data Center Facility Training Programs ........................................................................... 383
- 10 -
6.6.1 IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ................... 383
6.6.2 IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 384
6.6.3 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 385
7 Transmission Network Training Solution .......................................................................... 386
7.1 Training Path .................................................................................................................... 386
7.1.1 WDM Training Path ................................................................................................... 386
7.1.2 RTN Training Path ..................................................................................................... 389
7.1.3 MSTP Training Path .................................................................................................. 391
7.1.4 Transmission OSS Training Path .............................................................................. 393
7.4 Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Programs .................................... 401
7.4.1 IP-oriented Transport Solution Training .................................................................... 401
7.4.2 40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology ...................................................................... 402
7.4.3 Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction .................................................................. 403
7.4.4 Introduction to 400G Technology .............................................................................. 404
7.4.5 OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network Solution Training ....................................... 405
7.5 Mobile Backhaul Evolution and Trends Training Programs ............................................. 406
7.5.1 Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution ................................................................... 406
7.5.2 Huawei Microwave Solution Overview ...................................................................... 407
7.5.3 Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution .................................................................. 408
7.6 Transmission Network Planning and Design Training Programs..................................... 409
7.6.1 OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training .............................................................. 409
7.6.2 OptiX MSTP Network Design Training ...................................................................... 410
7.6.3 OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training ...........................................................411
7.6.4 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training ................... 412
7.6.5 OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training ............................................ 413
7.6.6 OptiX WDM Network Design Training ....................................................................... 414
7.6.7 OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training ................................................................ 415
7.6.8 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training ................. 416
7.6.9 OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training ............................................................ 417
7.6.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training ....................................................... 418
7.6.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training ...................................... 420
7.6.12 OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Training ....................................................... 421
7.6.13 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training .................... 422
7.6.14 OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training ...................... 423
7.6.16 OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design Training........................................................ 424
7.6.17 iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer) Operation Training ............................... 425
7.7 Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training Programs ...................... 426
7.7.1 OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training ................................................................ 426
7.7.2 OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training ............................................................... 427
7.7.3 OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training .................................. 428
- 11 -
7.7.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training .............................................................. 429

7.7.5 OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training .............................................................. 430
7.7.6 OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training ................................................................. 431
7.7.7 OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training .......................................................... 432
7.8 Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training Programs ...................... 433
7.8.1 OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training ................................................................ 433
7.8.2 OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training................................................................ 434
7.9 Transmission Network Principle Training Programs ........................................................ 435
7.9.1 SDH Fundamental Training ....................................................................................... 435
7.9.2 WDM Fundamental Training ..................................................................................... 436
7.9.3 Ethernet Fundamental Training ................................................................................. 437
7.9.4 ASON Fundamental Training .................................................................................... 438
7.9.5 Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training ......................................................................... 439
7.10 WDM Products Training Programs ........................................................................... 440
7.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................... 440
7.10.2 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................... 441
7.10.3 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training .................................... 443
7.10.4 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................... 445
7.10.5 OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 446
7.10.6 OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Training ............................................................... 448
7.10.7 OptiX NG WDM Equipment Installation Training ............................................... 449
7.10.8 OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training ..................................................... 450
7.10.9 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training .............................. 451
7.10.10 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 452
7.10.12 OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 455
7.10.13 OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................ 457
7.10.14 OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................... 458
7.10.15 OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line Maintenance Training............................................... 459
7.10.16 OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training............................................... 460
7.10.17 OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training ............................................................... 462
7.10.18 OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance
Training ........................................................................................................................... 463
7.10.19 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
7.10.20 OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training ................................ 467
7.10.22 OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 469
7.10.23 OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (EoO/EoW) Special Topic Training .......... 470
7.10.24 OptiX NG WDM Synchronization Special Topic Training .................................. 471
7.10.25 OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (Packet) Special Topic Training ............... 472
7.10.26 OptiX NG WDM DCN Special Topic Training .................................................... 473
- 12 -
7.10.27 OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System Special Topic ...................................... 474
7.10.28 OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack Management Special Topic ................ 475
7.11 RTN 900 Products Training Programs ...................................................................... 476
7.11.1 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 476
7.11.2 OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 478
7.11.3 OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 479
7.11.4 OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 481
7.11.5 OptiX RTN 900V1R8 2nd Line Maintenance Training ....................................... 482
7.11.6 OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features Training ........................................................ 484
7.11.7 OptiX RTN 980L IP Long Haul Microwave Features Training ........................... 485
7.11.8 OptiX RTN 980L Installation and Commissioning Training ............................... 486
7.12 RTN 900 Products Advanced Training ...................................................................... 488
7.12.1 OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training ................................................... 488
7.12.2 OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic Training ............................................ 489
7.12.3 OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic Training ............................................... 490
7.12.4 OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic Training .......................................... 491
7.12.5 OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic Training ...................................................... 492
7.12.6 OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic Training ........................................................ 493
7.12.7 OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and Operation Training ......................... 494
7.12.8 OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic Training ................................................. 495
7.12.9 iManager U2000 RTN Network Monitoring Training.......................................... 496
7.12.10 KPI Analysis of Ethernet Service Training ......................................................... 497
7.13 RTN 300 Products Training Programs ...................................................................... 498
7.13.1 OptiX RTN 310360380 Installation and Commissioning Training ..................... 498
7.13.2 OptiX RTN 310360380 1st Line Maintenance Training ..................................... 499
7.13.3 OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................... 500
7.13.4 OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool Operation............................................... 501
7.13.5 OptiX RTN 320 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................... 502
7.14 MSTP Products Training Programs .......................................................................... 506
7.14.1 OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training .................................. 506
7.14.2 OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training ............................................. 507
7.14.3 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training ................. 508
7.14.4 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training ....... 509
7.14.5 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training ................. 510
7.14.6 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ...... 512
7.14.7 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance Training ....... 514
7.14.8 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training .......................... 516
7.14.9 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training ................ 517
7.14.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training .......................... 518
- 13 -
7.14.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............... 520
7.14.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training ................ 522
7.14.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training ...... 524
7.14.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training ................ 525
7.14.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ..... 527
7.14.16 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ............. 529
7.14.17 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ......... 530
7.14.18 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training 531
7.14.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 532
7.14.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 533
7.14.21 TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid MSTP) ....................... 534
7.15 Transmission Network OSS Training Programs ....................................................... 535
7.15.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only) ................. 535
7.15.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training .......................................................... 536
7.15.3 iManager N2510 OLS Operation and Maintenance Training (Transmission) ... 537
7.15.4 iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC FO
(Transmission) ....................................................................................................................... 538
7.15.5 iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC BO
(Transmission) ....................................................................................................................... 539
7.15.6 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 540
7.15.7 iManager uTraffic Network Performance Monitoring Training (Transmission
Network Only) ........................................................................................................................ 541
7.16 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs........................................... 542
7.16.1 Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device
Training ........................................................................................................................... 542
7.16.2 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network Training .................................................................................................................... 543
7.16.3 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network Training .................................................................................................................... 544
8 Access Network Training Solution .................................................................................... 545
8.1 Training Path .................................................................................................................... 545
8.1.1 Principle ..................................................................................................................... 545
8.1.2 Evolution and Trends ................................................................................................ 545
8.1.3 Planning..................................................................................................................... 546
8.1.4 MA5600T Products.................................................................................................... 546
8.1.5 FTTx PON Products .................................................................................................. 547
8.1.6 DSLAM Products ....................................................................................................... 549
8.1.7 MSAN Products ......................................................................................................... 550
8.1.8 BITS ........................................................................................................................... 551
8.1.9 OSS ........................................................................................................................... 551
- 14 -
8.4 Principle Training Programs ............................................................................................. 556

8.4.1 IP Basis Training ....................................................................................................... 556
8.4.2 Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training ................................................... 557
8.4.3 IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training ............................................................ 558
8.4.4 VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training ................................................................................ 559
8.4.5 PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training .................................. 560
8.4.6 VDSL2 Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 561
8.4.7 GPON Fundamental Training .................................................................................... 562
8.5 Evolution and Trends Training Programs ......................................................................... 563
8.5.1 FTTx Network Overview Training .............................................................................. 563
8.5.2 FTTO Solution Overview Training ............................................................................. 564
8.5.3 FTTM Solution Overview Training ............................................................................. 565
8.5.4 xDSL Access Network Overview Training ................................................................. 566
8.5.5 ODN Overview Training ............................................................................................ 567
8.5.6 10G/40G PON Network Overview Training .............................................................. 568
8.5.7 Vectoring Overview Training ..................................................................................... 569
8.5.8 G.fast Overview Training ........................................................................................... 570
8.5.9 iODN Solution Overview Training ............................................................................. 571
8.5.10 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training..................................................................... 572
8.5.11 MSO CMTS Solution Training............................................................................ 573
8.6 Planning Training Programs ............................................................................................. 574
8.6.1 FTTx Planning Training ............................................................................................. 574
8.6.2 ODN Planning Training ............................................................................................. 575
8.6.3 iODN Planning Training ............................................................................................. 576
8.6.4 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training ............................................. 577
8.6.5 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training ..................................... 578
8.6.6 MSAN UA5000 Planning Training ............................................................................. 579
8.7 MA5600T Products Training Programs ............................................................................ 580
8.7.1 MA5600T Hardware Installation Training .................................................................. 580
8.7.2 MA5600T Commissioning Training ........................................................................... 581
8.8 FTTx PON Products Training Programs .......................................................................... 582
8.8.1 MA5800 System Overview ........................................................................................ 582
8.8.2 GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................. 583
8.8.3 GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training......................................... 585
8.8.4 GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ..................................... 587
8.8.5 GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................ 589
8.8.6 GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................ 590
8.8.7 FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training................................................................ 591
8.8.8 FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 592
8.8.9 GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training ............................ 594
8.8.10 GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting) Training ................ 595
8.8.11 MA5600T Uplink Protection Solution and Configuration Training ..................... 596
- 15 -
8.8.12 Broadband Access Network Security Solution and Configuration Training ...... 597
8.8.13 U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training ............................................................ 598
8.8.14 U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training ....................................................................... 599
8.8.15 U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training ................................. 600
8.8.16 ODN Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................. 601
8.8.17 ODN Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 602
8.8.18 iODN Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 603
8.8.19 iODN NMS Administrator Training ..................................................................... 604
8.8.20 MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 605
8.8.21 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................... 606
8.9 DSLAM Products Training Programs ............................................................................... 608
8.9.1 DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T Vectoring Maintenance Training ............................... 608
8.9.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training........................ 609
8.9.3 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training ........................ 610
8.9.4 DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and Maintenance
Training ...................................................................................................................................611
8.9.5 DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 612
8.9.6 iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training .. 613
8.9.7 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training ..................................... 614
8.9.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 617
8.10 MSAN Products Training Programs .......................................................................... 621
8.10.1 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........ 621
8.10.2 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training ................... 622
8.10.3 iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training ....
........................................................................................................................... 623
8.10.4 MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training ................................................. 624
8.10.5 MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training ........................................................... 625
8.10.6 MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 626
8.10.7 MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 627
8.10.8 MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 629
8.10.9 HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 630
8.10.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........... 631
8.11 BITS Training Programs ............................................................................................ 632
8.11.1 SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................................. 632
8.11.2 SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................................. 633
8.11.3 SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................ 634
8.12 OSS Training Programs ............................................................................................ 635
- 16 -
8.12.1 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training .................................................. 635

8.12.2 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .......... 636
8.12.3 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) .......................................... 637
8.12.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)......................................... 638
8.12.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)........................................... 639
8.12.6 iManager N2510 Copper Software Test Operation Training ............................. 640
8.12.7 iManager N2510 Copper Hardware Test Operation Training ............................ 641
8.12.8 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training ......................................................... 642
8.12.9 iManager N2510 Administration Training........................................................... 643
- 17 -
1 Huawei Training & Certification Service Overview
1.1 Introduce Huawei Training & Certification Service
1.1.1 ICT Convergence Training & Certification Solution
With the constant development of the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, IP, IT, and
CT applications gradually converge. New technologies such as Internet of Things (IoT) and mobile broadband
will bring an infinite number of opportunities to the ICT industry. The growing convergence of ICT
technologies will trigger tremendous industry transformations, challenging the knowledge system and skills
of those working in the industry, "Knowledge convergence, cross-field skills, and standards evolution" have
become new criteria for assessing qualified ICT talents.
Huawei launches its certification solution covering all ICT technical fields. Huawei developed this
certification solution by leveraging its years of experience in developing ICT talent and its deep insight into
industry trends. This solution fully encompasses Huawei's Cloud-Pipe-Device convergence technology and
covers IP, IT, CT, and ICT convergence technologies. It is the only training and certification program of its kind
in the industry that covers all ICT technical fields. Additionally, this certification solution is a sophisticated
certification program that covers new technologies, new ideas, and new industry trends, leading the way in
ICT technical certification to help enterprises and channel partners enhance the all-round development.
1.1.2 Huawei Training Service
Product technical training (Capability development based on customer positions and learning levels)
The product technical training targets product users and enables them to understand product positioning,
functions, features, and use methods (installation, deployment, configuration, and maintenance) and perform
maintenance when the equipment breaks down.
Career certification (Building Huawei's talent ecological chain)
The career certification targets a wide range of users, teaches common theories and skills, and equips trainees
with the theoretical foundations and skills required to enter specific career fields. It is the foundation of
product technical training and specialist certification.
Specialist certification (Improving the capabilities of partners)
18
The specialist certification targets channel partners, provides professional skills for specific positions, and
provides channel partners with the support and resources required. It verifies the capabilities of partners
required in specific fields through certification exams to help partners sharpen their competitive edge.
1.1.3 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products
and solutions
Training services as an important part of Huawei solutions, relying on the platform of Huawei overall, focus on
human capacity development needs, to help customer improve their employees' professional skills, team
capacity and organizational performance, to be the most reliable partner for customer.
Huawei relying on a deep understanding of the ICT industry, based on the service lifecycle PDIOI (Plan, Design,
Implement, Operate and Improve) model, through a series of modular product training, technical topics,
solution training to meet government, power, financial, energy, transportation, health care, education and
enterprise ICT employee cultivation requirement, and help customers successfully deploy, operation and
optimization of Huawei's products and solutions.
Huawei training services provide customers with professional, practical, effectiveness learning and
development solutions; learning brings capacity development, the capacity development bring enterprise
growth
Through a full range of product training to help customer quickly understand the product characteristics, become
competent in using;
Through the matching technical topic and product character, grasp the products and solutions deployment, and operation
and maintenance capability;
Through simulating real solutions scenarios training, fast, accurate, practical way to enhance customer.
The figure below shows that based on the service lifecycle PDIOI model, Huawei provide matching product
and knowledge training solution, including installation and commissioning, operation and maintenance,
advanced technical topic and planning and design training. Each stage in the full life cycle of PDIOI,Huawei has
different kinds of innovative patented tools and standard processes during each stage of full lifecycle, which
can ensure we deliver the service to you with high quality and efficiency and save your cost.
19
1.1.4 Learning Path
For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;

After you master general technology, you can select the corresponding product operation and maintenance
training base on specific product;
After you master the basic technical and familiar with the product characteristics, you can choose the
advanced technical training and planning & design training for further enhance.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Advanced Technology
Training Training
XXX Design Training XXX Product Installation and XXX Advanced
Commissioning Training Technology Training
Xd Xd Xd
XXX Product Essential Operation

and Maintenance Training
XXX Product Features Training
Xd
Xd
XXX Product Advanced Operation

Xd
eSight Enterprise NM
Operation and Maintenance
Training Xd
eSight- XXX Management

Training
Xd
Technology Technical Fundamental

Fundamentals Training Training
Xd
20
1.1.5 Huawei's Career Certification
Huawei Certified Network Associate (HCNA)

The HCNA certification validates knowledge and skills
required for the basic configuration and maintenance of Archi-tect
small and midsize networks. After passing the HCNA
certification, you demonstrate (1) a preliminary
understanding of small and midsize networks, including
common technologies for small and midsize networks, and Expert
(2) the abilities to assist in designing small and midsize
networks and implementing design using Huawei's
equipment.
Huawei Certified Network Professional (HCNP)
The HCNP certification validates knowledge and skills Professional
required for the building and management of small and
midsize networks. After passing the HCNP certification,
you demonstrate (1) an all-round and in-depth
understanding of small and midsize networks, (2) mastery
of general technologies for small and midsize networks, Associate
and (3) the abilities to independently design small and
midsize networks and implement this design using
Huawei's equipment.
Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert (HCIE)
The HCIE certification validates knowledge and skills required for the building, optimization, and management
of midsize and large complex networks. After passing the HCIE certification, you demonstrate (1) an all-round
and in-depth understanding of midsize and large complex networks, (2) mastery of technologies for midsize
and large complex networks, and (3) the abilities to independently design various complex networks and
implement this design using Huawei's equipment.
After passing Huawei's career certification, trainees will possess technical theories and related skills, and
master the following:
How technologies and protocols are incorporated into Huawei's products and solutions
The knowledge and skills required for deploying, operating, and maintaining networks using Huawei's
products and solutions
21
1.1.6 Training Instructors
Huawei instructor: More than 300 full time instructors, 70% of them are 10 years working experience on
developing, project management and excellent teaching skills.
Huawei Authorized Learning Partner (HALP) instructor: HALP refers to a professional training organization that
is authorized by Huawei to implement Huawei's product Training Courses under Huawei's supervision and
management after passing its assessment. The HCSI refers to an instructor who is certificated by Huawei and
employed by an HALP, Authorized Learning Partner information Query click
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi%5Bid%5D=_trainingsearch&navi%5
Bt%5D=1349689093661&params%5Btab%5D=tab_org
1.1.7 Training Methods
For the convenience of customer, Huawei and HALP may offer on-site training, localize training, centralize
training and E-Learning;
Centralized training: Face-to-face training in authorized training partner or in Huawei training center can be more
22
comprehensive, in-depth grasp of Huawei's products and technical knowledge and skills.
Localize training: Localized face-to-face training in the partner lab, training courses should be partner demand design, has
a strong relevance and timeliness.
On-site training: on-site face-to-face training focused on hardware installation, routine maintenance, practical and
targeted content.
E-Learning Training: can get a quick, convenient learning service by the electronic platform
1.2 Huawei World Wide Learning Center
Huawei training service began in 1989, had training experience more than twenty years. Huawei training
service is all over the world, has 46 training centers on the global. Huawei Learning Service now has over
1500 instructors, and over 2,000,000 trainees form 160 countries have received our training.
1.2.1 China Global Training Center (CGTC)
Huawei China Training Center is one of the Global Training Center, setup in Southeast China, located at
Hangzhou, capital of Zhejiang province. China GTC now has 300+ professional instructors to support global
training demand. There are 122 classrooms and a centralized lab with 7,000+ sqM are available. Training
products supported as below:
Data Communication (Router, Switch, WLAN, Firewall, etc.)
Information Technology (Storage, Server, Cloud, Data Center, etc.)
UC&C (UC, CC, VC, IVS, etc.)
Wireless (GSM-R, eLTE, etc.)
Network Energy (Power, Data Center Facility, UPS, etc.)
Optical (MSTP, OTN, Microwave, etc)
Access (GPON, BITS, etc)
23
1.2.2 Malaysia Global Training Center (MGTC)
Huawei Malaysia Training Center is one of the Global Training Center setup in South Pacific region with 2508
sqM, located at Cyber Jaya, Malaysia with excellent environment. 50 professional instructors to support
global training demand. There are 14 classrooms and a centralized lab are available. Training products
supported as below:
Data Communication (Router, Switch, WLAN, Firewall, etc.)
Information Technology (Storage, Server, Cloud, Data Center, etc.)
Optical (SDH,WDM, Microwave, etc.)
24
1.3 General Terms and Conditions
1.3.1 Validity
Validity of Proposal and Pricing

The training programs and training price offered in this proposal will remain valid within 90 days from the
submission date. There might be changes to the course contents and training duration over this period
due to our continuous course development and optimization.
Validity of Training Delivery
The validity period of training is three (3) years from the effective date of the Contract signed. In case that
the Purchaser has not put forward the delivery request to Huawei and resulted in the invalidation on the
training program, the training contract will be deemed executed by Huawei.
1.3.2 Training Application
Training application and delivery are based on the contract between Purchaser and Huawei. Purchaser
need to issue training purchase order (PO) for the confirmation on the training program and training
delivery schedule proposed.
In order to ensure training resources availability, training application shall be received at least 45 working days
before commencement of the training.
For booking and more information, please contact your local Account Service Manager.
1.3.3 Training Cancellation Terms
Purchaser can cancel the training or alter the training date at least 1 week (7 Calendar days) before the start date.
Within this 7 Calendar days period, any cancellation or schedule changes will lead to penalties as follows:.
Cancellation Penalties Policy, the following cancellation charges will apply:
Working Days Percentage of fees to be
invoiced
> 7 days 0%
0 7 days 100%
Once the course has commenced, if a trainee fails to attend or withdraw from the course, the full amount
of the course will be payable.
Huawei reserves the right to cancel the booking if we do not receive confirmation i.e. Training Purchase
Order (PO) at least 7 Calendar days before the scheduled training start date.
1.3.4 Training location
For the convenience of Purchaser, Huawei may offer different training locations for purchaser. The training
locations are selected, Huawei shall provide corresponding training supporting services.
25
Foreign Training: Huawei HQ centralized training. The training will delivery in Huawei Global Training
Center, Huawei shall responsible to provide a fully equipped training environment and all the necessary
training facilities and arrangement such as classroom and training lab, individual PC, meals and
refreshments during break time, training materials / manuals, stationery as well as souvenir for the
customer.
Local Training: Huawei region centralized training. The training will delivery in purchaser country, Huawei
shall provide instructor, classroom, training lab / e-lab, training materials / manuals and stationery.
On-site Training: Training will delivery in purchaser on-site, Huawei shall send instructor to purchaser
on-site, purchaser need prepare classroom and training lab and stationery by themselves.
1.3.5 Training Service Language
All training will be conducted in English. If there is local language required, it needs further negotiation
between Purchaser and Huawei Training Center and there might be extra charges applied on the request.
1.3.6 Training Quality Assurance
Course pre-requisite and Target Audience

To ensure training effectiveness and satisfaction, Purchaser shall send suitable trainees to attend the
training based on the course pre-requisite and target audience stated in the Section 3 Training Program
Descriptions in this proposal.
Class Size
The standard class size is 6 - 12 trainees. To ensure each trainee to have the chance to participate in the
equipment practice, recommended having maximum 12 trainees per class. The size of class shall be finally
agreed between Huawei and customer before start of the course.
On-site equipment availability and training environment
Purchaser has to provide the suitable classroom for on-site training and test bed/ equipment for hands-on
practice. However, if the purchaser is not able to provide the equipment for hands-on practice, Huawei
will provide the remote lab service and this service is chargeable. Purchaser should be responsible to
provide the internet connection to remote lab.
1.3.7 Other Services for Trainee
In order that trainee can enjoy a comfortable learning time in Huawei, Huawei shall provide following
services for trainee who participating in centralized training based on terms of the contract.
Laundry: Laundry fee is paid by Huawei , but it is limited.
Transportation: Provide transportation between hotel and airport, hotel and training center, and
transportation in spare time activity.
Post materials: After training, the materials will be dispatched to customers for free.
Insurance: Purchase the accidental injury insurance for customer.
SIM card: A SIM card which has 50 RMB in it will be provided for each customer.
Coffee break: Provide coffee and fruits for customer.
26
Allowance: Meal allowance will be provided from 1st day to the last day of training. (Except welcome
dinner, class end dinner as well as tour days lunch)
Stationery: Notebook, water glass & ball pen will be given as a training kit.
Souvenir: Class photo for each customer & a special gift from Huawei.
1.3.8 Intellectual Property Right
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to copyrights, of soft copy or hard copy of
teaching materials, courseware, presentations, customized training proposals, plans, and other materials
for training (hereinafter the training materials) produced before or during training, belong to Huawei.
Without prior explicit written approval of Huawei, the training material shall not be reproduced,
transmitted, communicated or otherwise divulged by the customer or trainees to any third party and
persons who are not authorized and/or supposed to have access to or knowledge of such files and
information. Without prior explicit written approval of Huawei, training process shall not be recorded,
video taped or photographed by customer or customers. Customers should ensure that students fulfill
their obligations under these Terms.
27
1.4 Huawei online learning center (Learning Website)
Huawei online learning center (Learning Website), provides rich teaching resources, where enterprise
customers, partners and ICT practitioners can enjoy interactive and customized learning services anytime and
anywhere.
1.4.1 How to register for a website account?
First, visit to http://learning.huawei.com/en.

Second, click "log in", then click "Register Now" and fill in information: Account, which is recommended to
be the same with the registered e-mail; E-mail, which must be your own e-mail you use in your work.
Third, login your email and activate the account. Then a Huawei official website account is registered
successfully.
1.4.2 How to get online learning resource?
On learning website, users can download Huawei official training materials, learn e-learning courses, join in
Live Virtual Class, and download eNSP (Enterprise Network Simulation Platform) which can not only simulate
single router or switch device but also large network to do some.
On support website, users can get product support and cases, download software and tools, and interact and
communicate with experts.
1) Download Training Materials
Download E-course list which is updated monthly, and you can get the download address of training materials.
http://support.huawei.com/ecommunity/bbs/10150675.html
2Learn E-Learning course online
Log in website and find out the E-learning course needed, then click "play video" to start learning.
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi[id]=_16
3Join in Live Virtual Class
Join in LVC on class time:
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi[id]=_16
4Download eNSP
Download address
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/softdownload.action?lang=en&pid=9017384&idAbsPath=fixnode01|
7919710|9856717|21096933|9858914|9017384
5Download product documentation
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=productsupport
6Browse Cases and Technical Notes
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=servicescenter
7Download software
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=softwaredownload
8Download Tools
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/toolsinfo
9Get help on Support Community
http://support.huawei.com/ecommunity/
28
1.4.3 Frequently-Used Functions on Learning Website
Frequently-
Website
Used Function
http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-01
How to find
Find Huawei training courses, know more about the course content,
training
training duration
How to find the http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-02

training plan Find the Training Plan provide by Huawei and Huawei Learning Partners
How to find
Find Huawei Authorized Learning Partners, know more about the contact
HALPs
methods.
How to
participate in http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-03-02
certification Know more about Huawei Certification Training, such as how to participate.
training
How to http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-02-01
participate in Know more about the process of certification such as how to schedule
certification exam
Description of
the access to
Learning
website
For more functions, please visit Website Help:

29
2 Enterprise Network Training Solution
2.1 Training Path
2.1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path
HCIE-R&S
Expert 15d
HCNP-R&S-IERN HCNP-R&S-IESN HCNP-R&S-IENP

Implementing Enterprise Implementing Enterprise Improving Enterprise
Professional Routing Network Switching Network Network Performance
6d 4d 5d
HCNA-HNTD
Associate Huawei Networking
Technology and Device
10d
Elective Guide
Follow the parts to learn.
30
2.1.2 WLAN Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNA-WLAN-IEBW
Implementing Enterprise Basic
Associate WLAN Training
5d
Elective Guide
HCNA or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.
31
2.1.3 Security Certification Training Path
HCIE-Security(to be)
Expert
15d
HCNP-Security-CISN HCNP-Security-CTSS HCNP-Security-CSSN

Constructing Infrastructure Constructing Terminal Constructing Service
1d
Professiona of Security Network Security System Security Network
5d 5d 5d
l
HCNA-Security-CBSN
Associate Constructing Basic
Security Network
5d
Elective Guide:
Follow the paths to learn
32
2.1.4 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path
HCNA
Huawei Certified Network Associate
10d
HCNP-R&S
Huawei Certified Network Professional
- Routing and Switching
15d
HCS-Field-R&S
Huawei Certified Routing and
Switching Field Engineer
5d
Advanced Technology
Training Routing and Switching Expert
25d
Elective Guide
HCNA is required and HCNP-R&S is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
33
2.1.5 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training
IP Network Technology
Fundamental Training
1d
Huawei VRP System

Training
1d
Enterprise LAN Enterprise WAN

Technology Training Technology Training
5d 2d
Enterprise Network Engineer
Enterprise IP Routing
Technology Training Training Path
5d Target Audience
Advanced Technology Training
Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN Enterprise MPLS VPN

Technologies Training Technologies Training Technologies Training
5d 5d 5d
Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN

Technical Expert Enterprise MPLS TE
Technical Expert
Technologies Training
Enterprise QoS Enterprise HA
3d
Technologies Training Technologies Training
1d 1d
Enterprise MPLS
Technical Expert
Enterprise QoS Enterprise HA
Technical Expert Technical Expert
Enterprise IPv6
Technology Training
5d
Enterprise IPv6
Technical Expert
Elective Guide
HCNP-R&S or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training programs.
34
2.1.6 NE Routers Training Path
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
Enterprise Network Design NE40E-X Router Installation Advanced Technology

Outlines Training and Commissioning Training Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network NE40E-X Router Essential

Design Training Operation and Maintenance
1d Training 5d
Data Center Network Design NE40E-X Router Advanced

Training Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d 5d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design NE20E-S Router Installation and

Training Commissioning Training
1d 1d
NE20E-S Router Operation and

Maintenance Training
5d
NE05E&08E Router Installation

and Commissioning Training
1d
NE05E&08E Router Operation

5d
Technology
Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
Training
14d
Elective Guide
The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
35
2.1.7 AR G3 Routers Training Path
Enterprise Network Design AR G3 Router Installation and Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Commissioning Training Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network AR G3 Router Essential

1d Training 5d
Data Center Network Design AR G3 Router Advanced

Training Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d 5d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training AR SOHO Router Installation
and Commissioning Training
1d
1d
AR SOHO Router Operation

5d
Technology IP Technology Fundamentals

Fundamentals
Training 14d
Elective Guide
36
2.1.8 AR Industrial Router Training Path
Enterprise Network Design 5d

AR Industrial Router Installation Advanced Technology
Outlines Training and Commissioning Training5d Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network 5d

AR Industrial Routers Operation
Design Training and Maintenance Training5d
1d 5d
Data Center Network Design 5d

Training AMI Solution Training
5d
2d 5d

Training
1d

Fundamentals
Training 14d
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
37
2.1.9 Campus Network Switch (S series) Training Path
Enterprise Network Design Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77)

Design Training Installation and Commissioning
Training
1d 1d
Data Center Network Design Campus network switch (S

series) Essential Operation and
Training Maintenance Training
2d 5d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Campus network switches (S

series) Advanced Operation and
1d 5d

Fundamentals
Training 14d
Elective Guide
38
2.1.10 S12700 Agile Switch Training Path
Enterprise Network Design S12700 Agile Switch Installation Advanced Technology

Outlines Training and Commissioning Training
Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network S12700 Agile Switch Essential

Training
1d 5d
Data Center Network Design S12700 Agile Switch Advanced

Training Training
2d 5d

Training
1d

Fundamentals
Training
14d
Elective Guide
39
2.1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Training Path
Data Center Switches

Enterprise Network Design Advanced Technology
(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)
Outlines Training Installation and Commissioning Training
1d Training 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network Data Center

Design Training Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE
58)Essential Operation and
1d Maintenance Training 5d
Data Center Network Design Data Center

Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)
Training Advanced Operation and
2d Maintenance 5d

Training
1d

Fundamentals
Training 14d
Elective Guide
40
2.1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path
WLAN Planning and Design WLAN Installation and

Training Commissioning Training
5d 1d
WLAN Essential Operation and

3d
WLAN Advanced Operation and

3d
Elective Guide
41
2.1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path
Enterprise Network Design ME60 Products 1st Line Advanced Technology

Outlines Training Maintenance Training
Training
1d 1d 25d
Enterprise Campus Network ME60 Products 2nd Line

ME60 Products
Design Training Maintenance Training
Troubleshooting Training
1d 10d 5d
Data Center Network Design ME60 Products IPTV Service

Features Training
Training
2d 4d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design iManager U2000 ME60 Product

Operation Training
Training
1d 2d

Fundamentals
Training
14d
Elective Guide
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
42
2.1.14 PTN Product Training Path

PTN Network Planning and PTN Products Installation and PTN Products 3rd Line
Design Training Commissioning Training Maintenance Training
3d 2d 5d
PTN Products 1st Line

2d
PTN Products 2nd Line

10d
IP Technology Fundamentals
Technology
Fundamentals
Training 14d
43
2.1.15 Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Path
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training
eSight-IP Enterprise NM
Training Path Operation and Maintenance eSight Operation and
Target Audience Training Maintenance Engineer
2d
eSight Advanced Feature Training
eSight-IP WLAN eSight-IP MPLS VPN eSight-IP SLA

Management Training Management Training Management Training
0.5d 0.5d 0.5d
WLAN Administrator MPLS VPN Administrator SLA Administrator
eSight-IP IPsec VPN eSight-IP Smart Reporter

eSight-IP NTA Management
Management Training Management Training
Training
0.5d 0.5d 0.5d
IPSec VPN Administrator Report Administrator Network Monitor /

Traffic Analyzer
eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel eSight-IP Terminal Resource eSight Agile Features

Management Training Management Training TrainingSVF&iPCA
0.5d 0.5d 0.5d
MPLS Tunnel Administrator Terminal Administrator Agile Administrator
eSight-IP SecureCenter eSight-IP LogCenter

Management Training Management Training
2d 2d
SecureCenter Administrator LogCenter Administrator
eSight Product Expert
Elective Guide
eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.
Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.
44
2.1.16 Agile Controller Training Path
Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve
Planning and Design Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
Training
Agile Controller Operation &
3d
Elective Guide:
45
2.1.17 AnyOffice Training Path
Training
AnyOffice Operation &
3d
Elective Guide:
46
2.1.18 Enterprise Network Design Training Path
Enterprise Network
Enterprise Network
Design Outlines Training
Design Engineer
1d
Enterprise Campus Enterprise MPLS VPN Data Center Network WLAN Planning and
Network Design Training Design Training Design Training Design Training
1d 1d 2d 5d
Enterprise Network Enterprise MPLS Data Center Network Enterprise WLAN

Design Expert VPN Design Expert Design Expert Design Expert
Training Path
Target Audience
Elective Guide
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.
47
2.1.19 Firewall Training Path
Firewall Planning and Design USG2000/5000 Installation and

Commissioning Training
1d 1d
Firewall VPN Technology
USG2000/5000 Operation and Training
Maintenance Training 3d
4d
Firewall UTM(Unified Threat
Management) Technology
USG6000 Installation and Training 3d
1d Firewall Reliability&Attack
Defense Technology Training
3d
USG6000 Essential Operation and
ASG Installation and 4d
1d
USG6000 Advanced Operation and
ASG Operation and Maintenance 2d
Training
2d
USG9000 Installation and
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
Commissioning Training 1d
1d
USG9000 Essential Operation and
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training
2d
USG9000 Advanced Operation

2d
Technology
Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Fundamental Training
Training 1d
Elective Guide:
48
2.1.20 Security Management Software Training Path
Policy Center Operation and

3d
Technology Firewall Technology

Training 1d
Elective Guide:
TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals
49
2.1.21 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path
NIP Installation and

1d
NIP Operation and Maintenance

Training
2d
Elective Guide:
50
2.1.22 Anti-DDoS Defense System Training Path
Training
Anti-DDoS Defense System
Training 3d
Technology Firewall Technology

Training 1d
Elective Guide:
51
2.1.23 UMA System Training Path
Training
UMA System Operation and
1d
Elective Guide:
52
2.2 Required Training Programs
Enterprise IP Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Training Programs Level (working
Location Size
days)
Routing and Switching Career Certification Training Programs
HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device

10 6 ~ 12
Training
HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device

5 6 ~ 12
Training (Fast-track)
HCNP-R&S Training 15 6 ~ 12
HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track) 5 6 ~ 12
HCIE-R&S training 15 6 ~ 12
WLAN Career Certification Training Programs
HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing Enterprise Basic

5 6 ~ 12
WLAN Training
Security Career Certification Training Programs
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security

5 6 ~ 12
Network Training
HCNP-Security Training 15 6 ~ 12
Routing and Switching Specialist Certification Training
HCS-Field-R&S Training 5 6 ~ 12
WLAN Specialist Certification Training Programs
HCS-Field-WLAN Training 5 6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamental Training Programs
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training 1 6 ~ 12
Huawei VRP System Training 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise LAN Technology Training 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise WAN Technology Training 2 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training 5 6 ~ 12
IP Network Advanced Technology Training Programs
53
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training 3 6 ~ 12
Enterprise QoS Technology Training 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise HA Technology Training 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training 5 6 ~ 12
NE40E-X Router Training Programs
NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
NE40E-X Router Essential Operation and Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training
NE40E-X Router Advanced Operation and Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training
NE20E-S Router Training Programs
NE20E-S Router Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
NE20E-S Router Operation and Maintenance Training 5 6 ~ 12
NE05E&08E Router Training Programs
NE05E&08E Router Installation and Commissioning

1 6 ~ 12
Training
NE05E&08E Router Operation and Maintenance Training 5 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Router Training Programs
AR G3 Router Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Router Essential Operation and Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training
AR G3 Router Advanced Operation and Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training
AR SOHO Router Training Programs
AR SOHO Router Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
AR SOHO Router Operation and Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
AR Industrial Router Training Programs
54
AR Industrial Router Installation and Commissioning
1 6 ~ 12
Training
AR Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training
AMI Solution Training 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Network Switch (S series) Training Programs
Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and

1 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Installation and

1 6 ~ 12
Campus network switch (S series) Essential Operation

5 6 ~ 12
Campus network switches (S series) Advanced Operation

5 6 ~ 12
S12700 Agile Switch Training Programs
S12700 Agile Switch Installation and Commissioning

1 6 ~ 12
Training
S12700 Agile Switch Essential Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
S12700 Agile Switch Advanced Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
Data Center SwitchCE SeriesTraining Programs
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)

1 6 ~ 12
Installation and Commissioning Training
Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)Essential

5 6 ~ 12
Operation and Maintenance Training
Data Center
Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)Advanced Operation 5 6 ~ 12
and Maintenance
WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
WLAN Essential Operation and Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
WLAN Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
55
WLAN Planning&Optimization Training 5 6 ~ 12
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training 10 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training 4 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training 5 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products Training Programs
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training 10 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training 5 6 ~ 12
PTN Network Planning and Design Training 3 6 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs
eSight-IP Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance

2 6 ~ 12
Training
eSight-IP WLAN Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP MPLS VPN Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP SLA Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP IPsec VPN Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP Smart Reporter Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP NTA Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP Terminal Resource Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP SecureCenter Management Training 1 6 ~ 12
eSight-IP LogCenter Management Training 1 6 ~ 12
eSight Agile Features TrainingSVF&iPCA 0.5 6 ~ 12
Agile Controller Training Programs
Agile Controller Operation & Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
56
AnyOffice Training
AnyOffice Operation & Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training 1 6 ~ 12
Data Center Network Design Training 2 6 ~ 12
Security Technology Fundamental Training Programs
Firewall Technology Fundamental Training 1 6 ~ 12
Security Advance Technology Training Programs
Firewall VPN Technology Training 3 6 ~ 12
Firewall UTM(Unified Threat Management) Technology

3 6 ~ 12
Training
Firewall Reliability&Attack Defense Technology Training 3 6 ~ 12
USG2000/5000 Firewall Training Programs
USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
USG2000/5000 Operation and Maintenance Training 4 6 ~ 12
USG6000 Next Generation Firewall Training Programs
USG6000 Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
USG6000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training 4 6 ~ 12
USG6000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
USG9000 High-end Firewall Training Programs
USG9000 Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
USG9000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training 4 6 ~ 12
USG9000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
SVN(Security Virtual Network) Training Programs
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
ASG( Application Security Gateway) Training Programs
57
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
ASG Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training 1 6 ~ 12
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
Security Management Software Training Programs
Policy Center Operation and Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
Anti-DDoS Defense System Training Programs
Anti-DDoS Defense System Operation and Maintenance

3 6 ~ 12
Training
UMA System Training Programs
UMA System Operation and Maintenance Training 1 6 ~ 12
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
Firewall Planning and Design Training 1 6 ~ 12

Level Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert Course
58
2.3 Training Programs
2.4 Routing and Switching Career Certification Training Programs
2.4.1 HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training
Training Path (RIP/OSPF) routing protocols for implementation

and support of effective enterprise network
HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and
routing solutions.
Device Training
Establish solutions for enterprise network
ORSA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d
administration and management through
Target Audience application layer services including DHCP, FTP
Those who wish to become a Huawei and Telnet.
Certified Network Associate Establish a fundamental network capable of
For those who possess a working knowledge supporting basic communications.
of routing and switching technologies. Enhance link layer performance the through
Project Description implementation of features and services
including link aggregation, VLAN technologies
With HCNA certification, you demonstrate a
and GVRP.
basic understanding of small and medium-
Manage and support Wide Area Network
sized networks, including general network
communications over serial links for a range of
technologies, and the ability to assist the
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and
design of small and medium-sized networks,
Frame Relay.
and implement the designs using Huawei
routing and switching devices. Apply Network Address Translation (NAT)
Prerequisites solutions for private networks.
Provide Wireless WAN network backup solutions
A working knowledge of IT technologies.
over 3G cellular networks.
Objectives
Provide effective IP security solutions using
On completion of this program, the various security architectures including Access
participants will be able to: Control Lists (ACL), AAA, and IPSec with GRE
Explain the intricacies of data transmission over support solutions.
IP networks, for competency in supporting, Describe and implement solutions for unified
maintaining and troubleshooting IP networks. enterprise network management, including
Perform IP address planning for establishing well SNMP and Huawei eSight NMS technology
designed networks. solutions.
Navigate and manage Huawei products through Establish truly business capable enterprise
the virtual routing platform (VRP). networks for real-world industries.
Build efficient data switching environments Duration
through the management of switching products
10 working days
and manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link Class Size
layer protocols.
Min 6, Max 12
Explain the principles of routing and configure
59
2.4.2 HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training (Fast-track)
Training Path Enhance link layer performance the through

implementation of features and services
HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and
including link aggregation, VLAN technologies
Device Training (Fast-track)
and GVRP.
ORSAA Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
Build efficient data switching environments
Target Audience through the management of switching products
Those who wish to become a network and manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link
associate layer protocols.
Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification Explain the principles of routing and configure
Project Description (OSPF) routing protocols for implementation and
support of effective enterprise network routing
With HCNA certification, you demonstrate a
solutions.
basic understanding of small and medium-
Manage and support Wide Area Network
sized networks, including general network
communications over serial links for a range of
technologies, and the ability to assist the
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and
design of small and medium-sized networks,
Frame Relay. Provide Wireless WAN network
backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.
routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites Describe and implement solutions for unified
enterprise network management, including
Those who have obtained the same level SNMP and Huawei eSight NMS technology
technical certificate in the industry, and hope to solutions.
obtain Huawei certificate
Supporting IPv6 Networks.
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the 5 working days
participants will be able to: Class Size
Navigate and manage Huawei products through
Min 6, Max 12
the virtual routing platform (VRP).
60
2.4.3 HCNP-R&S Training
Training Path and medium-sized networks independently

HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites
ORSP1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 6d
HCNA certification or the similar knowledge
Objectives
HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
ORSP2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d
Configure OSPF
Configure BGP
HCNP-R&S-IENP Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
Improving Enterprise Network Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,
Performance
ORSP3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d RSTP and MSTP
Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and
Target Audience QinQ
Those who hope to become a network Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
professional Describe the basic principle of network security
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S List the features of USG
certificate Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
Project Description List High Availability technology
Duration
With HCNP-R&S certification, you
demonstrate a comprehensive and thorough 15 working days
understanding of small and medium-sized Class Size
networks, including general network
Min 6, Max 12
technologies, and the ability to design small
61
2.4.4 HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track) the industry
Objectives
Training Path
On completion of this program, the
HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track)
Configure OSPF
ORSPA Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d Configure BGP
Target Audience Configure Route Selection Tools
Those who hope to become a network Configure IGMP, PIM-SM/DM
professional Describe the principle of VLAN
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN and GVRP
certificate Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
Those who have obtained the same level Describe the basic principle of network security
technical certificate in the industry, and hope Configure the functions and features of USG
to obtain Huawei certificate series firewall
Project Description Describe Huawei IP QoS end-to-end process
With HCNP-R&S certification, you Configure end-to-end IP QoS
demonstrate a comprehensive and thorough Build and configure simulation of enterprise

understanding of small and medium-sized network
networks, including general network Duration
technologies, and the ability to design small 5 working days
and medium-sized networks independently Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites
Obtained the same level technical certificate in
62
2.4.5 HCIE-R&S training maintaining the large scope enterprise network
Objectives
Training Path
HCIE-R&S training
Understand the large and medium-sized
ORSE1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 15d complex networks
Target Audience Design a variety of complex network

independently
Those who hope to become an internetwork
Implement networks with Huawei routing and
expert
switching devices
Those who hope to obtain HCIE-RS
Maintain different networks with a variety of
certificate
routers and switches
Project Description
Solve complex connectivity problems
With HCIE-R&S certification, you Use technical solutions to increase bandwidth,
demonstrate a comprehensive and thorough shorten the corresponding time, maximize
understanding of large networks, including performance, strengthen security and support
technologies used in complex large and global applications
medium-sized networks, and the ability to Troubleshoot complex networks
design various enterprise networks
Analyze complex requirements of applications
independently and implement those designs
on the network
using Huawei routing and switching devices. Duration
Prerequisites
15 working days
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar Class Size
knowledge
Five years experiences on building and
Min 6, Max 12
63
2.5 WLAN Career Certification Training Programs
2.5.1 HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing Enterprise Basic WLAN Training
Training Path Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN

List Huawei WDS network mode
HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing
Enterprise Basic WLAN Training Describe mesh network mode
OWLA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11

Target Audience List the advantages of 802.11n
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical
Those who hope to become a network
layer
associate of WLAN
Describe spread spectrum technology of 802.11
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN
Describe DSSS technology
certificate
Prerequisites Describe OFDM technology
Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology
A general familiarity with PC operation system
Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol
A basic understanding of computer technology
Outline the general network mode of WLAN
HCNA certification or similar knowledge
Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN
Objectives
Differentiate different applications of VLAN in
On completion of this program, the WLAN service
participants will be able to: Describe WLAN business configuration
Describe what WLAN is processes of Huawei AC6605
Describe the development process of WLAN Configure the basic attributes of AC
technology Describe the basic features of Huawei product
List typical application scenarios of WLAN List the key features of Huawei product
technology Describe the basic concepts of roaming
Describe the functions and roles of WLAN Outline the basic principles of roaming
standards organizations
List the application scenarios of roaming
Describe the related basic knowledge of RF
Describe security threat of WLAN
List working principle and specific property of RF
Describe the related concepts of WIDS and
Describe the working frequency band of WLAN WIPS
and the basic concepts of channel
Describe the related concepts of AAA
Describe the rules of the working frequency
Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption
band and channel in each country
techniques
List other technologies related to WLAN
Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
Describe the latest Huawei product information
Describe the frame format of 802.11
List the application scenarios of Huawei product
Differentiate three frame types and functions of
Describe the power supply mode of Huawei 802.11
product
Describe 802.11 media access control
Configure Huawei VRP basic command mechanism
Configure AC basic attributes Analyze media access process of WLAN
Upgrade the software of AC and AP Describe the concepts of QoS
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 Configure WMM-profile
64
Configure Traffic-profile Configure the basic information of AC
Describe the definition and functions of antenna Configure AP online
Describe the main performance indicates of Configure AP-profile
antenna Configure radio-profile
List some common passive device Configure service-set
List the basic process of the WLAN network Configure AP region
planning Configure AP binding profile
List basic interference factors of WLAN Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of
Describe the basic load-balancing ways of WLAN service
WLAN Describe WLAN commonly used fault
List the typical application scenarios of WLAN troubleshooting
Describe the network planning processes of Describe WLAN common diagnostic commands
WLAN and tools
Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN Describe the cause of some common failures of
network planning ways WLAN
Describe the functional features of Huawei Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot
WLAN planning tool some common failures
Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN Duration
network
5 working days
List some functions of eSight Class Size
Configure WLAN service
Min 6, Max 12
65
2.6 Security Career Certification Training Programs
2.6.1 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training
Training Path Understand key VPN technologies.

Understand the classification and application of
HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic
Security Network Training VPN.
OSCA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
Target Audience Understand the principles of L2TP.

Understand the application scenarios of client-
Operators and Maintainers
initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.
Administrators
Understand the configuration of L2TP.
Prerequisites
Understand the principles and implementation of
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary GRE VPN.
knowledge Understand the security mechanism of GRE
Be familiar with Router&Switch VPN.
elementary knowledge Understand the typical application and
Objectives configuration of GRE VPN.
On completion of this program, the Understand the principles of the IPSec
participants will be able to: technology.
Understand OSI model Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
Understand TCP/IP principles Understand the service process of IKE.
Understand TCP/IP security issues Understand the application scenarios and
Understand Common attack means configuration of IPSec VPN.
Understand the definition and classification of Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
firewalls. technology.
Understand firewall Main features and Understand the Basic functions and features of
technologies. the SVN product.
Understand the Data forwarding process and Understand the configuration of SSL VPN.
basic configuration of firewalls. Understand firewall UTM basic technology
Understand the functions and classification of Understand what terminal security is.
ACLs. Understand the components and deployment of
Understand firewall Security Policy and the Policy Center system.
configuration Understand the organizational management and
Understand the principles of the NAT technology. access control functions of the Policy Center
Understand the application of NAT. system.
Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls. Understand the security policy

Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup configuration of the Policy Center system.
Duration
basic technology
Understand firewall User Management 5 working days
Understand firewall Class Size
VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G technology
Min 6, Max 12
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
66
2.6.2 HCNP-Security Training
Training Path configuration of SLB
HCNP-Security CISN Constructing Understand Dual-system hot backup principle

Infrastructure of Security Network and configuration.
OSCP1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d Understand the principle and configuration of

BFD
Understand the implementation and
HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing Terminal configuration of Link-group
Security System
Understand IP-link principle and configuration
OSCP2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
Understand Bypass principle and configuration
Understand Eth-Trunk principle and
HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing configuration

Service Security Network Learn about the technology principles of virtual
OSCP3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d firewall.

Master virtual firewall configuration methods.
Target Audience Know virtual firewall technology applications.

Understand advanced features and configuration
of IPSec VPN.
Prerequisites
Understand advanced features and configuration
Be familiar with data communications of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
network elementary knowledge Understand Scenarios of comprehensive SSL
Be familiar with network security VPN applications in HA.
elementary knowledge Understand Basic network attack.
Be familiar with VPN elementary Understand Basic attack defense technologies
knowledge on firewalls.
Be familiar with Firewall elementary Understand Application and configuration of
knowledge basic attack defense technologies.
Be familiar with OS. Understand the damages and mechanisms of
Be familiar with 802.1X access control major DDoS attacks.
technology. Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS
Has network security equipment operation solution.
and maintenance experience Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS
solution.
Objectives Learn about the installation and configuration of
On completion of this program, the the anti-DDoS solution.
participants will be able to: Master troubleshooting method.
Understand firewall device management Master the troubleshooting of security policy.
Master firewall management by AAA Master the troubleshooting of NAT technology.
Master password recovery Master the troubleshooting of attack defence.
Understand the implementation and Master the troubleshooting of traffic limiting
configuration of traffic limiting policies policies.
Understand the implementation and Master the troubleshooting of HA technology.
67
Master the troubleshooting of L2TP VPN. products
Master the troubleshooting of IPsec VPN. Understand the main technologies used for
Master the troubleshooting of SSL VPN. content security
Understand the current situation of terminal Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion
security. prevention technology
Understand the background of terminal security. Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion
Understand the multidimensional defense prevention application scenario
system as a terminal security solution. Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.
Understand the relationship among the five Learn about virus signatures and the common
elements. tools for detecting viruses
Understand the concepts and components of Understand major antivirus technologies for
identity authentication. gateways
Understand the implementation mechanism of Understand the application of antivirus
security policies during authentication technologies for gateways
Understand the implementation principles of Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering
multiple access control devices. technology
Know the terminal security solution design Describe common WEB risk
roadmap. Understand the key technology of Web filtering
Know how to complete the availability design of Understand the Web filtering application
a solution. scenario
Know the current situation of document security. Understand the basic concept of spam
Understand the functions of DSM Understand the generation and harm of spam
Master how to implement Policy Center system. Understand the mechanism of spam filter
Master how to configurue Policy Center system. Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei
Master the operation and maintenance of Policy Describe background of deep packet inspect.
Center system. Understand the main DPI technology.
Master the operation and maintenance of DSM. Understand the DPI application scenario.
Describe the common fault in Policy Center Master the troubleshooting of IPS
system. Master the troubleshooting of AV
Master the troubleshooting method of Policy Master the troubleshooting of URL filtering
Center system Master the troubleshooting of RBL filtering
Master the troubleshooting method of DSM Master the troubleshooting of deep packet
system inspect
Master how to utilize diagnoses tools for Master the troubleshooting of Database
troubleshooting security implementations. updated.
Master the troubleshooting method of Duration
Hardware SACG implementations.
15 working days
Understand the basic knowledge of information Class Size
security
Understand the background of content security
Min 6, Max 12
68
2.7 Routing and Switching Specialist Certification Training Programs
2.7.1 HCS-Field-R&S Training
Training Path Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware

architecture
HCS-Field-R&S Training
Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and
modules
ORSS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
Target Audience Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding
List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics
List S12700 Agile Switches software features
Prerequisites
Describe S12700 Agile Switches application
A general familiarity with PC operation system scenarios
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge Routers
Objectives
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei
On completion of this program, the AR G3 Routers
participants will be able to: Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR G3
Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box Routers
Switches Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Box Switches Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box Routers
Switches Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Box Switches Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei
Switches NE Routers
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE
Box Switches Routers
Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei
Switches NE Routers
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE
Chassis Switches Routers
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei
Chassis Switches NE Routers
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Describe the concepts of routine maintenance
Chassis Switches List items of routine maintenance
Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis Use the commands in routine maintenance
Switches Distinguish routine maintenance and
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei troubleshooting
Chassis Switches List the steps of troubleshooting
Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning Mater the methods of information collection
69
Describe the technical support system of Huawei Describe the iStack features on Huawei box
List the Mostly Used Methods of Software switches
Upgrade Configure the iStack features on Huawei box
Assess the Feasibility of Software Upgrade switches
Work Out a Practical Scheme of Software Describe the CSS principles
Upgrade Describe the CSS features on Huawei chassis
Describe the General Steps of Device Software switches
Upgrade Configure the CSS features on Huawei chassis
Describe the General Steps of Installing Patch switches
Describe the General Steps of Software Describe the NTP principles
Upgrade Using the BootRom Describe the NTP features on Huawei chassis
Describe the principles of ISSU switches
Describe the application scenarios of ISSU Configure the NTP features on Huawei chassis
Configure ISSU on Huawei S Switches switches
List the security features of Huawei Datacom Describe the advantages and functions of NQA
Products Describe basic principles and implementation
List the different security features between methods of NQA
Huawei Datacom Products Describe NQA features
Describe the application scenarios of the Describe typical applications of NQA
security features of Huawei devices Describe the principles of LLDP
Understand firewall security features on the AR Configure LLDP on Huawei Products
G3 router Describe the application of LLDP in enterprise
Configure firewall features on the AR G3 router network
Describe the implementation of RADIUS and Describe the SNMP principles
HWTACACS Configure SNMP features on Huawei Products
Describe domain-based user management Duration
modes
5 working days
Configure AAA on Huawei Datacom Product Class Size
Understand AAA application scenarios on the
Min 6, Max 12
enterprise network
Describe the iStack principles
70
2.8 WLAN Specialist Certification Training Programs
2.8.1 HCS-Field-WLAN Training
Training Path Clarify customer's basic requirements in network

planning.
HCS-Field-WLAN Training
Learn about customer's high-level requirements.
OWLS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d Describe main organizations and standards in
Target Audience the wireless field in industry and power

requirements of main countries.
Those who hope to become a network Describe spectrum division of 2.4 GHz and 5
associate of WLAN GHz, channel requirements of main countries,
Those who hope to become to a WLAN and HT40.
Planning & Optimization expert Calculate the EIRP.
Those who hope to obtain WLAN Planning & Know typical WLAN planning scenarios.
Optimization certificate
Have a good grasp of the WLAN planning
Prerequisites
procedure and focuses.
A general familiarity with PC operation system Use tools to carry out simple WLAN planning.
A basic understanding of computer technology Perform brief WLAN planning to meet customer
HCNA certification or similar knowledge requirements.
HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge Describe the process of the site survey for
Objectives planning the WLAN.
On completion of this program, the Use WLAN planning tools for the site survey.
participants will be able to: Describe precautions for the site survey in
different scenarios.
List the differences between wired and wireless
networks. Know how to design a hierarchical network.
Know commonly used Huawei WLAN devices. Plan VLANs on a medium- to large-sized WLAN.
List usage scenarios and characteristics of Plan IP addresses on the WLAN.
WLAN on industry networks. Plan routes on the WLAN.
List usage scenarios of WLAN on carrier Describe basic WLAN architectures and
networks. components.
Describe the lifecycle and processes of the Differentiate application scenarios of different AC
WLAN project. forwarding and deployment modes.
Describe necessities of WLAN planning and Differentiate application scenarios of different AC

optimization. networking modes and layers.
Describe methods of WLAN planning and Design WLAN architectures for different
optimization. scenarios.
Describe the necessity of pre-sales network Describe other WLAN architectures.

planning in the WLAN project. Learn about PoE components.
Describe usage of pre-sales network planning in Understand PoE power budget.
the WLAN project. Configure PoE.
List the procedure of pre-sales network planning Describe how the high availability (HA) of WLAN
in the WLAN project. is implemented.
71
Distinguish different hot-standby (HSB) methods Summarize basic principles of roaming.
and understand their components and Plan roaming.
implementations. Know how to clarify requirements.
Plan and configure an HSB WLAN network. List site survey contents.
Design an indoor settled WLAN. Know how to select APs and antennas.
Use the AP calculator. Plan network bandwidth.
Select suitable devices for indoor network Describe basic principles for deploying APs.
planning. List typical WDS and Mesh network planning
Use product specification quick search and scenarios.
comparison functions. Learn about WLAN solution characteristics in
Operate the WLAN Planner. typical scenarios.
Learn about common components of indoor Perform WLAN network planning in typical
distributed WLAN. scenarios.
Learn about the bandwidth, frequency band, and Describe different stages of Huawei enterprise
signal calculation method of indoor distributed service lifecycle model.
WLAN network planning. Describe basic principles for WLAN network
Learn about three common WLAN scenarios. planning.
Describe outdoor coverage requirements and Describe advantages and disadvantages of each
site survey contents. WLAN networking mode.
Know how to select APs and antennas. Describe features of small- and medium-scale
Plan the bandwidth and capacity of outdoor enterprise WLANs.
WLANs. Describe common networking modes of small-
Describe the basic AP deployment principles. and medium-scale enterprise WLANs.
List typical scenarios of outdoor coverage. Describe planning methods of small- and
Select suitable devices for outdoor network medium-scale enterprise WLANs.
planning. Describe design methods of small- and medium-
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network scale enterprise WLANs.
planning. Understand basic BYOD concepts.
Master the basic outdoor network planning Describe key WLAN technologies applicable in
process. large-scale enterprises.
Select suitable devices for outdoor network Describe WLAN optimization concept
planning. Describe WLAN optimization process
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network List WLAN data optimization methods
planning. Describe basic WLAN parameter calibration
Master the basic outdoor network planning methods
process. List WLAN optimization benefits
Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design. Understand basic interference sources
Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor Understand WLAN interference types
network planning.
Know basic WLAN interference optimization
Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design. methods
Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor Know how to improve WLAN coverage
network planning.
Understand WLAN coverage methods in high
Describe basic concepts of roaming. density scenarios
72
Describe functions of WLAN Tester Optimize WLAN networks
Describe the usage procedure of WLAN Tester Duration
Describe basic WLAN application scenarios 5 working days
List WLAN optimization methods in different Class Size
scenarios
Min 6, Max 12
73
2.9 IP Technology Fundamental Training Programs
2.9.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path Objectives

IP Network Technology Fundamental
ORS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe basic structure of IP network
Describe TCP/IP basis
Describe IP addressing and routing
Target Audience
Describe network layer protocols
Operators and Maintainers Describe transit layer protocols
Administrators Describe application layer protocols
Prerequisites Duration
A general familiarity with PC operation 1 working day

system Class Size
A basic understanding of computer
technology Min 6, Max 12
74
2.9.2 Huawei VRP System Training

Huawei VRP5 QuickStart
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Huawei VRP8 QuickStart Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software
ORS22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Describe history of Huawei VRP platform
Target Audience Describe the features of VRP8
Know the basic operation of VRP8
Perform VRP operate files
Prerequisites
Duration
A general familiarity with PC operation
1 working day
system
A basic understanding of computer Class Size
75
2.9.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training
Training Path
RRPP Feature and Configuration
Ethernet Basic Principle ORS39 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
ORS31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Target Audience

Prerequisites
VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
VCMP LNP Principle and Configuration
ORS33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d participants will be able to:
Describe the development of Ethernet
technology
VLAN Advanced Features and Configuration List the standards of Ethernet

Describe the working principle of HUB
Describe the working principle of L2 switch
List the Ethernet port features
GVRP Principle and Configuration Configure the Ethernet interface
ORS35 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle Describe the inter-VLAN communication
and Configuration
principle
ORS36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Understand the basic principle of VCNP
List all the VCMP roles support by switch
STP Principle and Configuration Configure VCMP on switch
Understand the basic principle of LNP
ORS37 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Configure LNP on switch
Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
SEP Features and Configuration
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
ORS38 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Configure the Super-VLAN
Describe the GARP principle
Describe the GVRP principle
Configure GVRP
76
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle Describe the MSTP advanced configuration
Describe the LACP basic principle Configure the MSTP function
List the methods of link aggregation Describe SEP Principle.
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation Learn SEP features supported by the Huawei
Describe calculation process of spanning tree switch
Describe the function of configuration BPDU Master SEP configuration
Describe the flood process of topology change Understand the SEP used in the enterprise
information network scenarios
Configure the STP function Describe the working principle of RRPP
Describe RSTP basic calculation process Know about the RRPP feature
Describe RSTP port status transition Configure the RRPP feature
Describe the function of RST BPDU Understand the RRPP application scenarios for
Describe the flooding process of topology enterprise networks
change notification Duration
Configure the RSTP function
5 working days
Describe the basic concept of MSTP
Class Size
Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of
MST Min 6, Max 12
77
2.9.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training
Training Path List common WAN interfaces

Describe PPP principles
WAN Interfaces Introduction and Describe LCP principles
PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
Describe NCP principles
Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP
FR/POS/HDLC Principles and Configure PPP authentication

Configuration Describe FR principles
ORS42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Configure FR
Target Audience Describe POS principles

Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing
Operators and Maintainers methods
Prerequisites Identify common optical interfaces
Configure POS interface
Describe HDLC principles
Configure HDLC
Objectives Duration

List common WAN protocols
Min 6, Max 12
2.9.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
Training Path Describe the concepts of load balance and

route backup
IP Routing Basis Configure static route
Configure static default route
Describe the principles of distance-vector
routing protocols
Describe the routing loop issues and apply
RIP Protocol Feature and loop avoidance solutions
Configuration
Describe the principles of RIP protocols
Identify the similarities and differences
between RIPv1 and RIPv2
Configure RIP in the network
OSPF Feature and Configuration
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
ORS53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe the route calculation process of link
state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
IS-IS Feature and Configuration Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
relationship
Describe the route calculation process of
OSPF
BGP Feature and Configuration
Configure OSPF routing protocol
ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol
Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol
Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols
Route Selection and Control Configure IS-IS protocol
Feature
Describe BGP basic concepts
Describe BGP working principles
Target Audience Describe the route selection process of BGP
Operators and Maintainers Configure BGP protocol

Describe route selection tools
Prerequisites
Describe routing policy
A general familiarity with PC operation system Describe policy-based route selection
A basic understanding of computer technology Compare routing policy and policy-based route
A basic understanding of IP network Configure routing policy
Objectives Duration

Class Size
Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table Min 6, Max 12
2.10 IP Network Advanced Technology Training
2.10.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technology Training
Training Path Describe the join procedure of RPT and

multicast source registration
IP Multicast Technologies Basis Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT
to SPT
Configure PIM-SM
List the key technologies of PIM SSM
Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
Configure PIM SSM
ORSA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
Configure PIM-DM
Describe the basic principles of MSDP.
Inter-domain Multicast Technologies Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.
Describe the application of MSDP
Configure the MSDP
Target Audience
Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.
Operators and Maintainers Describe the extensions of the MBGP.
Administrators Describe the process that the MBGP transmit
Planners and Designers the IPv4 multicast routing table.
Prerequisites Configure the MBGP

Duration
A basic understanding of computer technology 5 working days
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the IP multicast concept
Describe the IP multicast address architecture
Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP
multicast
Describe the SPT and RPT concept
Describe the IGMP protocol principle
Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions
Configure the IGMP protocol
Differentiate the classification of multicast routing
protocol
List the features of common multicast routing
protocols
Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
2.10.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
Training Path Describe IPSec technical architecture

Describe IKE principles
IP VPN Technology Fundamentals Describe IPSec principles
Describe IPSec application scenarios
ORSB1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
Configure IPSec VPN
Describe SSL principles
Describe SSL application scenarios
IP VPN Applications
Configure SSL VPN
ORSB2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN
Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution
Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3
Designing IP VPN routers
List Problems When Deploy VPNs
ORSB3 Lecture 0.5d
Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment
and the solution
Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment
Maintaining IP VPN
and the solution
ORSB4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment
and the solution
Target Audience
Describe GRE over IPSec applications
Operators and Maintainers Describe IPSec over GRE applications
Planners and Designers Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over
Administrators GRE
Prerequisites Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
routers
Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3
routers
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge
Describe security risks of VPDN
Objectives
Describe common VPDN solutions
On completion of this program, the Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over
participants will be able to: IPSec
Describe concepts of IP VPN Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3
List common VPN technologies routers
Describe GRE principles Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
Describe GRE application scenarios routers
Configure GRE VPN Describe requirements when deploy VPN on
Describe concepts of LAC and LNS Hub-Spoke network
Describe L2TP principles Describe Huawei DSVPN solution
Describe L2TP application scenarios Describe DSVPN principles
Configure L2TP VPN Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers

List Huawei IP VPN products Choose appropriate devices and technology
Describe IP VPN features supported by for enterprise VPN
Huawei routers Describe eSight VPN management features
Describe IP VPN features supported by Use eSight basic functions
Huawei switches Use eSight VPN management functions
Describe IP VPN features supported by Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN
Huawei firewalls List common reasons of IP VPN failure
Describe Huawei eSight VPN management List common commands when troubleshooting
features IP VPN
Describe Huawei VPN client features Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases
Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of Duration
different products
Describe applications of different products in IP 5 working days
VPN Class Size
Describe methodology of network designing
Min 6, Max 12
Analyze enterprise VPN requirements
Describe typical VPN application
2.10.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technology Training
Training Path Describe MPLS structure feature that contains

two planes
MPLS Technology and Configuration Describe MPLS label structure
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
Describe the process of LDP session
establishment
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration
Describe LDP label space
ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe LDP label distribution mode
Describe LDP label control mode
Describe LDP label retention mode
MPLS L3VPN Extended Application Describe the PHP
List the methods of MPLS loop detection
Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
count
VPWS Technologies and Configuration
Configure MPLS
ORSD4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Configure LDP
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
VPLS Techniques and Configuration MPLS VPN
Describe the mechanisms of the route and
label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Target Audience
Describe the process of data forwarding of
Operators and Maintainers BGP MPLS VPN
Planners and Designers Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
Administrators configuration
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
Prerequisites
MPLS BGP VPN
A general familiarity with PC operation system Describe the troubleshooting on control plane
A basic understanding of computer technology of MPLS BGP VPN
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
Objectives MPLS BGP VPN
Describe how to access the Internet via the
ISP
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
MPLS VPN backbone
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe how to access the Internet via
Describe the basic principle of MPLS
different interfaces between CE and PE
forwarding
Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF
List the applications of MPLS
VPN
Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF Describe Martini VLL Topology
routing information Describe how public tunnel and VC connection
Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN are established in Martini VLL
Analyze the application and configuration of Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini
Sham-link VLL
Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN Describe the difference between Martini VLL
Inter-AS solutions and SVC VLL
Compare the three solutions processing in Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a
control plane and data plane simple networking topology
Describe VPN Characteristics Describe the features of VPLS
Describe the difference between MPLS L2 Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label
VPN and L3 VPN and VC Label
Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data Describe how does VPLS forward data and
encapsulation avoid loop
Describe VPWS and VPLS Features Configure VPLS in a simple networking
List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific topology
scenario Configure VPLS
Describe CCC VLL Topology Duration
Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
5 working days
Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
mode
Class Size
Configure CCC in a simple network topology Min 6, Max 12

2.10.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technology Training
Training Path Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE

Describe the basic and extension principle of
MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration RSVP protocol
Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE
ORSE1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
Target Audience using static routes
Operators and Maintainers Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE

using automatic route
Planners and Designers
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using
Administrators
policy routing
Prerequisites
Describe the mode of traffic protection
A general familiarity with PC operation system Describe the principle of path protection
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe the principle of fast reroute
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge Describe DS-TE functions
A general familiarity with MPLS technology Describe DS-TE applicable environment
Objectives Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption
Describe the rationale of Tunnel Re-
optimization
Describe the rationale of Load Sharing
Describe detailed TE concepts and models
Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth
Describe MPLS TE background and functional
Adjustment
modules
Describe the combining of MPLS TE with
Describe the content of MPLS TE information
MPLS VPN
distribution
Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
Describe the way of MPLS TE information
List MPLS TE application
flooding
Design MPLS TE according to the requirement
Describe the process of MPLS TE information
distribution Duration
Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm 3 working days

Describe the other constrained conditions
Class Size
which influence the process of path calculation
Min 6, Max 12
2.10.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training
Training Path
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.10.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training
Training Path HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Objectives
VRRP Principles and Configuration
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d participants will be able to:
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
BFD Principles and Configuration Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
ORSG2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Target Audience Duration
Operators and Maintainers 1 working day
Prerequisites Class Size
A general familiarity with PC operation system Min 6, Max 12
2.10.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
Training Path Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of

OSPFv3 with OSPFv2
IPv6 Training Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation
Configure OSPFv3
ORSH1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6
Target Audience
Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology
Operators and Maintainers Configure IS-ISv6
Monitoring Staffs Describe MP-BGP attributes
Administrators Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6

inter-domain routing
Prerequisites
Configure BGP+
A general familiarity with PC operation system Describe the function and basic principle of MLD
A basic understanding of computer technology Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge Describe the function of SSM Mapping
Objectives Configure MLD
Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM
participants will be able to: Describe the address structure and working
principle of Embedded-RP
Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6
Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM
Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6
packet format Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast
Describe the packet types of ICMPv6 Configure PIMv6
Describe the packet types of ICMPv6 List classification of the ACL6
Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process Describe the application scenarios of ACL6
Describe the working principle of IPv6 address Configure ACL6
auto configuration List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6
Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU Describe application situations of the transitional
Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS technologies of IPv6
Configure IPv6 address Describe basic principles of the common

transitional technologies of IPv6
Configure IPv6 NDP
Configure common transitional technologies of
Configure IPv6 PMTU
IPv6
Configure IPv6 application
Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS
Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6
Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS
unicast packets
Configure 6PE over MPLS
Describe the principle of RIPng
Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2 Duration
Describe the format and processing of RIPng 5 working days

packets
Class Size
Configure RIPng
Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2 Min 6, Max 12
2.11 NE40E-X Router Training Programs
2.11.1 NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path structure

Describe NE40E-X series routers board types
NE40E-X Series Routers Introduction and functions
Identify NE40E-X series routers board
ORT21 Lecture 0.5d
Judge NE40E-X series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe NE40E-X series routers positioning
NE40E-X Series Routers Hardware Installation and application scenarios
ORT22 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d Describe NE40E-X series routers features

Overview
Target Audience
Describe NE40E-X series routers installation
Installers and Commissioning Staffs process
Operators and Maintainers List precautions when install NE40E-X series
Prerequisites routers
Install NE40E-X series routers
Duration
Objectives 1 working day
Class Size
participants will be able to: Min 6, Max 12
Describe NE40E-X series routers hardware
2.11.2 NE40E-X Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Prerequisites

NE40E-X Series Routers Introduction
ORT21 Lecture 0.5d Objectives

Huawei VRP5 Quick Start
Describe NE40E-X series routers hardware
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d structure
Describe NE40E-X series routers board types
and functions
IP Routing Basis Identify NE40E-X series routers board

Judge NE40E-X series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe NE40E-X series routers positioning
and application scenarios
OSPF Feature and Configuration Describe NE40E-X series routers features
Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe fields in the routing table
VRRP Feature and Configuration Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup
Configure static route
BFD Technologies and Configuration Describe the route calculation process of link
state algorithm
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
NE40E-X Series Routers Routine Maintenance
relationship
ORT23 Lecture 0.5d Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF routing protocol
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Describe BGP working principles
Operators and Maintainers Describe the route selection process of BGP
Configure BGP protocol routine maintenance
Describe the basic concept of HA Perform NE40E-X series routers routine
List common HA technologies in network maintenance
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles Duration
5 working days
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Class Size
Configure BFD on VRP platform Min 6, Max 12
List precautions for NE40E-X series routers
2.11.3 NE40E-X Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding

Route Selection and Control Feature Describe MPLS structure feature that contains
two planes
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
MPLS Technology and Configuration
ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d establishment
Describe LDP label distribution mode
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration Describe LDP label control mode
Describe LDP label retention mode
Describe the PHP
MPLS L3VPN Extended Application
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d count
Configure MPLS
Configure LDP
IP QoS Technology Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
MPLS VPN
Target Audience
Describe the mechanisms of the route and label
Installers and Commissioning Staffs distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Operators and Maintainers Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP

MPLS VPN
Prerequisites
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
A general familiarity with PC operation system configuration
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
Objectives MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
Describe route selection tools
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
MPLS VPN backbone
Compare routing policy and policy-based route
Describe how to access the Internet via different
Configure routing policy interfaces between CE and PE
Analyze the process of IP forwarding Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding VPN
Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF routing Describe Diff-Serv model
information Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN Describe the classed-based QoS
Analyze the application and configuration of Configure QoS
Sham-link Duration
Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN
Inter-AS solutions 5 working days
Compare the three solutions processing in Class Size
control plane and data plane
Min 6, Max 12
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
2.12 NE20E-S Router Training Programs
2.12.1 NE20E-S Router Installation and Commissioning Training

Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction and functions
Identify NE20E-S series routers board
ORT24 Lecture 0.5d
Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning
NE20E-S Series Routers Hardware Installation and application scenarios
ORT25 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d Describe NE20E-S series routers features

Overview
Target Audience
Describe NE20E-S series routers installation
Operators and Maintainers List precautions when install NE20E-S series
Install NE20E-S series routers
Duration
Class Size
Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware
2.12.2 NE20E-S Router Operation and Maintenance Training

NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction

Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware
Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
and functions
IP Routing Basis Identify NE20E-S series routers board

Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning
OSPF Feature and Configuration Describe NE20E-S series routers features
Overview
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d List the VRP8 platform basic commands
backup
BFD Technologies and Configuration
Describe the route calculation process of link
ORSG2 Lecture 0.5d state algorithm
NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
relationship
ORT26 Lecture 0.5d Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Target Audience Configure OSPF routing protocol
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Describe the route selection process of BGP
Describe the basic concept of HA Perform NE20E-S series routers routine
5 working days
Class Size
List precautions for NE20E-S series routers
2.13 NE05E&08E Router Training Programs
2.13.1 NE05E&08E Router Installation and Commissioning Training

Describe NE05E&08E series routers board types
NE05E&08E Series Routers Introduction and functions
Identify NE05E&08E series routers board
ORT27 Lecture 0.5d
Judge NE05E&08E series routers board
indicators and functions
Describe NE05E&08E series routers positioning
NE05E&08E Series Routers Hardware
Installation
ORT28 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d Describe NE05E&08E series routers features
Overview
Target Audience
Describe NE05E&08E series routers installation
Operators and Maintainers List precautions when install NE05E&08E series
Install NE05E&08E series routers
Duration
Class Size
Describe NE05E&08E series routers hardware
2.13.2 NE05E&08E Router Operation and Maintenance Training

NE05E&08E Series Routers Introduction

Describe NE05E&08E series routers hardware
Describe NE05E&08E series routers board types
and functions
IP Routing Basis Identify NE05E&08E series routers board

Judge NE05E&08E series routers board
indicators and functions
Describe NE05E&08E series routers positioning
OSPF Feature and Configuration Describe NE05E&08E series routers features
Overview
ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Operate VRP upgrade software
backup
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
BFD Technologies and Configuration
ORSG2 Lecture 0.5d state algorithm
NE05E&08E Series Routers Routine Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
Maintenance
relationship
ORT29 Lecture 0.5d
Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Target Audience Configure OSPF routing protocol
Describe the route selection process of BGP
Describe the basic concept of HA Perform NE05E&08E series routers routine
5 working days
Class Size
List precautions for NE05E&08E series routers
2.14 AR G3 Router Training Programs
2.14.1 AR G3 Router Installation and Commissioning Training

AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 Lecture 0.5d Describe AR G3 product positioning
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation List AR G3 cards and modules
List AR G3 software features
ORT12 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d
Describe AR G3 router installation process
List precautions when install AR G3 routers
Target Audience
Install AR G3 routers
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Duration
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.14.2 AR G3 Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites
AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 Lecture 0.5d A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives

ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe AR G3 product positioning
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP List AR G3 cards and modules
Principle and Configuration
List AR G3 software features
IP Routing Basis
ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Operate VRP upgrade software
List common WAN protocols
List common WAN interfaces
OSPF Feature and Configuration Describe PPP principles
Describe LCP principles
Describe NCP principles
Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP
Configure PPP authentication
ORS32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the IP routing process
Describe the concepts of load balance and route
VRRP Feature and Configuration backup
ORSG1 Lecture 0.5d
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance state algorithm
ORT13 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
relationship
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF routing protocol Describe the procedure and method for AR G3
Describe the background of VLAN technology router routine maintenance
Describe the principle of VLAN List precautions for AR G3 router routine
Configure the basic functions of VLAN maintenance
Describe the inter-VLAN communication Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance

principle Duration
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
5 working days
Describe the basic concept of HA
Class Size
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles Min 6, Max 12
2.14.3 AR G3 Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe policy-based route selection

Compare routing policy and policy-based route
BGP Feature and Configuration Configure routing policy
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
ORS55 Lecture 1d
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
Route Selection and Control Feature
Describe MPLS structure feature that contains
ORS56 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d two planes
Describe MPLS label structure
MPLS Technology and Configuration Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
establishment
Describe LDP label distribution mode
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration
Describe LDP label control mode
ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe LDP label retention mode
Describe the PHP
AR G3 Security Features
ORT14 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
count
Target Audience Configure MPLS

Configure LDP
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
Prerequisites MPLS VPN
Describe the mechanisms of the route and label
distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP
Objectives
MPLS VPN
On completion of this program, the Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
participants will be able to: configuration
Describe BGP basic concepts Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
Describe BGP working principles MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the route selection process of BGP Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of
Configure BGP protocol MPLS BGP VPN
Describe route selection tools Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of

Describe routing policy MPLS BGP VPN
Describe NAT principles Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
List NAT features on AR G3 routers Duration
Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
5 working days
Describe NAT applications
Class Size
Describe concepts of firewall
List common firewalls Min 6, Max 12
List firewall features on AR G3 routers
2.15 AR SOHO Router Training Programs
2.15.1 AR SOHO Router Installation and Commissioning Training

Describe AR SOHO series routers board types
AR SOHO Series Routers Introduction and functions
Identify AR SOHO series routers board
ORT15 Lecture 0.5d
Judge AR SOHO series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe AR SOHO series routers positioning
AR SOHO Series Routers Hardware Installation
ORT16 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d Describe AR SOHO series routers features

Overview
Target Audience
Describe AR SOHO series routers installation
Operators and Maintainers List precautions when install AR SOHO series
Install AR SOHO series routers
Duration
Class Size
Describe AR SOHO series routers hardware
2.15.2 AR SOHO Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Describe AR SOHO E series routers board types
AR SOHO Series Routers Introduction and functions
Identify AR SOHO series routers board
ORT15 Lecture 0.5d
Judge AR SOHO series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe AR SOHO series routers positioning
Huawei VRP5 Quick Start and application scenarios
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe AR SOHO series routers features
Overview
VLAN Principle and Configuration
ORS32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Perform VRP operate files
Describe the background of VLAN technology
IP Routing Basis Describe the principle of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication
principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
AR DCC&DSL Features Introduction
ORT19 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup
AR SOHO Series Routers Routine Maintenance Configure static route
ORT18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe DCC principles
Compare C-DCC and RS-DCC
Target Audience Describe DCC features and applications
Configure DCC on AR routers
Describe the scennario of xDSL+3G solution
List the related technologies of xDSL+3G
Prerequisites
solution
A general familiarity with PC operation system Configure xDSL and 3G on AR routers
A basic understanding of computer technology Compare the common management methods
Objectives Perform web-based configurations on AR routers
List functions that can be configured through
web on AR routers
Use the web-based configuration to configure
Describe AR SOHO series routers hardware
AR routers
Maintain the related features on AR routers Duration
List precautions for AR SOHO series routers 3 working days
routine maintenance
Class Size
Perform AR SOHO series routers routine
maintenance Min 6, Max 12
2.16 AR Industrial Router Training Programs
2.16.1 AR Series Industrial Router Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe AR Series Industrial Routers

Positioning
AR Series Industrial Product Introduction Describe AR Series Industrial Routers
Product Models
ORT31 Lecture 0.5d
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Cards and
Modules
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Feature
AR Series Industrial Routers Hardware Description
Installation
Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d Describe AR Series Industrial Routers
ORT32
Application Scenarios
Describe AR Series Industrial router installation
Target Audience
process
Installers and Commissioning Staffs List precautions when install AR Series Industrial
Operators and Maintainers routers
Prerequisites Install AR Series Industrial routers
Duration
A basic understanding of computer technology 1 working day
Objectives Class Size
On completion of this program, the Min 6, Max 12

2.16.2 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
AR Series Industrial Routers Routine
Maintenance
AR Series Industrial Product Introduction ORT33 Lecture 0.5d
ORT31 Lecture 0.5d

Target Audience

Huawei VRP5 Quick Start Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Ethernet Basic Principle Objectives
ORS31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d On completion of this program, the

Describe AR Series Industrial Routers
VLAN Principle and Configuration Positioning

Product Models
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Cards and
Modules
SEP Feature and Configuration Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Feature
Description
Application Scenarios
IP Routing Basis Use basic operation commands
ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the function of VRP information center
technology
ORS53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d List the standards of Ethernet
BFD Technologies and Configuration Describe the working principle of L3 switch
Configure the Ethernet interface
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication Describe basic concepts of OSPF
principle Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Configure the inter-VLAN communication Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
Describe SEP Principle. relationship
Learn SEP features supported by the Huawei Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Routers and Switches Configure OSPF routing protocol
Master SEP configuration of Huawei Routers Describe BFD basic concept and principles
and Switches Describe application scenarios of BFD
Understand the SEP used in the enterprise Configure BFD on VRP platform
network scenarios. Describe the procedure and method for AR
Describe the IP routing process Series Industrial router routine maintenance
Describe fields in the routing table List precautions for AR Series Industrial router
Describe the concepts of load balance and route routine maintenance
backup Perform AR Series Industrial router routine
Configure static route maintenance
Configure static default route Duration
Describe the principles of distance-vector routing
5 working days
protocols
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol Class Size
Describe the route calculation process of link Min 6, Max 12
state algorithm
2.16.3 AMI Solution Training
Training Path Target Audience

AMI Solution Introduction
Prerequisites
ORT34 Lecture 0.5d
Internet Protocol Technology Analysis
Objectives
ORT35 Lecture 0.5d
Describe basic principle of Huawei AMI
AMI Solution project-based exploration
solution implementation
ORT38 Lecture 0.5d Describe basic Internet protocol technology
Describe Huawei AMI solution engineering
survey basic method
Describe AR - UMS&AR - DCP deployment
AR-UMS&AR-DCP Setup and Deployment
with high reliability
Lecture, Hands-on exercise Describe AR - DCP software installation

ORT36 1d
Describe AR - UMS software installation
Describe AR531 position in AMI solution
DCU(AR531) Setup and Deployment Describe AR531 configuration test

Describe VRP architecture
ORT37 Lecture 0.5d
Use of VRP basic operation command
Describe VRP information center functions
Perform VRP file operations
Huawei VRP Quick Start Operating VRP basic software upgrades
ORS22 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the OSPF protocol characteristics
Describe link-state routing calculation process
of the algorithm
Describe OSPF basic concepts
IP Routing Basis
Describe the OSPF protocol message and the
ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d change of state
Configure OSPF protocol
Duration
5 working days
ORS53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.17 Campus Network Switch (S series) Training
2.17.1 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe Huawei box switch product

positioning
S Series Switch Product Introduction Describe Huawei box switch hardware

architecture
OSW11 Lecture 0.5d
Describe Huawei box switch cards and
modules
Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding
Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware
Installation flows
Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d List Huawei box switch characteristic function

OSW13
List Huawei box switch software features
Describe Huawei box switch installation
Target Audience
process
Installers and Commissioning Staffs List precautions when install Huawei box
Operators and Maintainers switch
Prerequisites Install Huawei box switch

Duration

2.17.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path positioning

Describe Huawei chassis switch product
S Series Switch Product Introduction hardware architecture
Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards
OSW11 Lecture 0.5d
and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
forwarding flows
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Hardware
Installation Describe Huawei chassis switch product
Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d characteristic function

OSW12
software features
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs application scenarios
Operators and Maintainers Describe Huawei chassis switch installation
Prerequisites process
List precautions when install chassis switch
Install Huawei chassis switch
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
Describe Huawei chassis switch product Min 6, Max 12
2.17.3 Campus Network Switch (S series) Essential Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
S Series Switch Routine Maintenance
S Series Switch Product Introduction OSW14 Lecture 0.5d
OSW11 Lecture 0.5d Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Huawei VRP5 Quickstart
Administrators
ORS21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
Ethernet Basic Principle A general familiarity with PC operation system

Objectives
IP Routing Basis On completion of this program, the

Describe Huawei S Series Switch product
positioning
hardware architecture
ORS32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe Huawei S Series Switch product
cards and modules
Describe Huawei S Series Switch product data
VCMP LNP Principle and Configuration forwarding flows
characteristic function
software features
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and
Configuration Describe Huawei S Series Switch product
ORS36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d application scenarios
Spanning Tree Protocols Principle and Describe the function of VRP information
Configuration
center
technology
List the standards of Ethernet
Describe the working principle of HUB Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the working principle of L2 switch Describe the flood process of topology change
Describe the working principle of L3 switch information
List the Ethernet port features Configure the STP function
Configure the Ethernet interface Describe the basic concepts of RSTP
Describe the IP routing process Configure the RSTP function
Describe fields in the routing table Describe the basic concepts of MSTP
Describe the concepts of load balance and Configure the MSTP function
route backup Describe the basic concepts of VBST
Configure static route Configure the VBST function
Configure static default route Describe the procedure and method for
Describe the background of VLAN technology Huawei S Series Switch routine maintenance
Describe the principle of VLAN List precautions for Huawei S Series Switch
Configure the basic functions of VLAN routine maintenance
Describe the inter-VLAN communication Perform Huawei S Series Switch routine

principle maintenance
Configure the inter-VLAN communication Describe the procedure and method for
Describe LNP principles Huawei S Series Switch parts replacement
Configure LNP List precautions for Huawei S Series Switch

component replacement
Describe VCMP principles
Perform Huawei S Series Switch component
Configure VCMP
replacement
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation
principle Duration
Describe the LACP basic principle 5 working days
List the methods of link aggregation
Class Size
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Describe calculation process of spanning tree Min 6, Max 12
2.17.4 Campus Network Switches(S series) Advanced Operation and Maintenance
Training
VLAN Advanced Features and Configuration A general familiarity with PC operation system
ORS34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Objectives

VRRP Feature and Configuration Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Configure the MUX-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
OSPF Protocol Feature and Configuration Describe the basic concept of HA
ORS53 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d List common HA technologies in network

BGP Feature and Configuration Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
BFD Technologies Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
ORSG2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP
S Series Switches iStack and CSS Features protocol
0.5d Describe BGP protocol route selection process

OSW1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
S Series Switch Security Feature
OSW16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe the iStack and CSS principles
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU Features Describe the iStack and CSS features on
Huawei S Series Switches
OSW15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Configure the iStack and CSS features on
Target Audience Huawei S Series Switches
List the security risks of network access layer
List ACL types
List the application of ACL Describe the principles of ISSU
Describe the principle of ARP attack and Describe the application scenarios of ISSU
defense Configure ISSU on Huawei S Series Switches
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle Duration
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
switches
5 working days
List the defense of ARP attack Class Size

List the security features of Huawei switches Min 6, Max 12
Configure the prevention of ARP attack
2.18 S12700 Agile Switch Training
2.18.1 S12700 Agile Switch Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

hardware architecture
S12700 Agile Switch Product Introduction Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
cards and modules
OSW18 Lecture 0.5d
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
data forwarding flows
S12700 Agile Switch Hardware Installation
Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

OSW19
software features
Target Audience
application scenarios
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch
Operators and Maintainers installation process
Prerequisites List precautions when install S12700 Agile

Switch
A general familiarity with PC operation system Install Huawei S12700 Agile Switch
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Class Size
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product Min 6, Max 12
positioning
2.18.2 S12700 Agile Switch Essential Operation and Maintenance Training
Monitoring Staffs
S12700 Agile Switch Product Introduction
OSW18 Lecture 0.5d Administrators
Prerequisites
Huawei VRP5 Quickstart
Objectives
Ethernet Basic Principle
0.5d On completion of this program, the

ORS31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
positioning
IP Routing Basis
ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d hardware architecture
cards and modules
VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
data forwarding flows
VCMP LNP Principle and Configuration
software features
ORS33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
application scenarios
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and
Configuration Use basic operation commands
0.5d Describe the function of VRP information

ORS36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise
center
Spanning Tree Protocols Principle and Operate VRP upgrade software
Configuration
ORS37 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d technology
List the standards of Ethernet
S Series Switch Routine Maintenance
OSW14 Lecture 0.5d Describe the working principle of L3 switch
Configure the Ethernet interface Configure the STP function
Describe the IP routing process Describe the basic concepts of RSTP
Describe fields in the routing table Configure the RSTP function
Describe the concepts of load balance and Describe the basic concepts of MSTP
route backup Configure the MSTP function
Configure static route Describe the basic concepts of VBST
Configure static default route Configure the VBST function
Describe the background of VLAN technology Describe the procedure and method for
Describe the principle of VLAN Huawei S12700 Agile Switch routine
Configure the basic functions of VLAN maintenance
Describe the inter-VLAN communication List precautions for Huawei S12700 Agile
principle Switch routine maintenance
Configure the inter-VLAN communication Perform Huawei S12700 Agile Switch routine
Describe LNP principles maintenance
Configure LNP Describe the procedure and method for
Describe VCMP principles Huawei S12700 Agile Switch parts

replacement
Configure VCMP
List precautions for Huawei S12700 Agile
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation
Switch component replacement
principle
Perform Huawei S12700 Agile Switch
Describe the LACP basic principle
component replacement
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Duration
Describe calculation process of spanning tree 5 working days

Describe the function of configuration BPDU Class Size
Describe the flood process of topology change
information Min 6, Max 12
2.18.3 S12700 Agile Switch Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
VLAN Advanced Features and Configuration On completion of this program, the

ORS34 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
VRRP Feature and Configuration
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
OSPF Protocol Feature and Configuration
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
BGP Feature and Configuration Describe OSPF protocol packets
ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
S Series Switch Agile Features
Describe the common attributes of BGP
protocol
OSW1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
IGP protocol
S Series Switches iStack and CSS Features
Configure BGP protocol
OSW1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe Huawei S Series Switches
EasyDeploy principles
Configure EasyDeploy
S Series Switch Security Feature Describe Huawei S Series Switches SVF
principles
OSW16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Configure SVF
Target Audience Describe the iStack and CSS principles
Describe the iStack and CSS features on
Configure the iStack and CSS features on
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system List the security risks of network access layer
A basic understanding of computer technology List ACL types
List the application of ACL
Describe the principle of ARP attack and
defense Configure the prevention of ARP attack
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle Duration
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
5 working days
switches
List the defense of ARP attack
Class Size
List the security features of Huawei switches Min 6, Max 12

2.19 Data Center Switch(CE Series)Training Programs
2.19.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Installation and

Training Path Describe the installation procedure of CE

series switch
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) List the precaution of hardware installation of
Hardware Installation
CE series switch
OSW31 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d
Install CE series switch
VRP8 Platform Introduction
OSW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Target Audience
Configure the remote management function on
Installers and Commissioning Staffs CE switch
Operators and Maintainers Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Prerequisites Use the FTP function on CE switch
Duration
A genera familiarity with PC operation system

2.19.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Essential Operation and
Training Path CE switch

Mange the configuration file on CE switch
CE Series Switches Hardware Use the FTP function on CE switch
Introduction Know what VLAN is.
OSW33 Lecture 0.5d
Know concepts about VLAN.
Know the mechanism and configuration of
communication between VLANs.
VRP8 Platform Introduction
OSW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d VLAN aggregation.
MUX VLAN
CE Series Switches Campus Network
Management VLAN
Features
OSW34 Lecture 4d Describe STP functions.
Target Audience Describe STP implementation.
Describe RSTP improvement compared with
STP.
Describe MSTP calculation.
Prerequisites Configure MSTP on the CE5850.
A genera familiarity with PC operation system Describe the IP routing process.
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe fields in the routing table.
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar Configure a static route on an CE series

knowledge switch.
Objectives Configure OSPF on the network consisting of

CE series switch.
On completion of this program, the Troubleshooting on CE series switches.
participants will be able to: Describe the meanings and functions of the
Know the trend of data center development. parameters relevant to the BGP configuration.
Know the basic concepts of data center. Configure BGP on the CE switches.
Know CE series data center switches Analyze and troubleshoot common faults in the
hardware. BGP configuration on the CE switches
Know CE series data center switches Understand trunk implementation.
advantages.
Understand trunk forwarding.
Know CE series data center switches features.
Learn about LACP.
Configure link aggregation.
Describe the basic VRRP concepts.
Understand common VRRP features.
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation Configure VRRP on CE5850.
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Describe the contents of maintenance of CE
Configure the remote management function on
series switch Duration
Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE 5 working days
series switch
Class Size
Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 Min 6, Max 12
series switch
2.19.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Advanced Operation and
Training Path Describe the principle of stack technology

Describe the stack technology realization on
Huawei Data Center Network Solution CE switch
Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR
OSW35 Lecture 0.5d
and CE12800 switch
List the procedure of configuration of stack on
TOR switch
Data Center Network New Technologies List the procedure of configuration of stack on
OSW36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4.5d CE12800 switch

Describe background of VS technology
Target Audience
Describe the realization of VS technology
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Describe the principle of VS technology
Operators and Maintainers Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE
Prerequisites switch
Know the background of SVF technology.
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
Know the principle and operation of SVF
technology.
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar Know how to configure SVF feature on Huawei
knowledge
CE series switches.
Objectives FCoE background
On completion of this program, the FCoE implementation
participants will be able to: Relevant FCoE technologies
Describe the architecture of data center Technologies used by lossless Ethernet
Describe the data center development Huawei FCoE solution
Describe Huawei data center network solution VXLAN principles
Know the trend of data center development. VXLAN application scenarios
Know the basic concepts of data center. VXLAN configuration methods
Know CE series data center switches EVN technology background
hardware. EVN solution principles and highlights
Know CE series data center switches EVN solution application and deployment
advantages. Describe the background of VM virtual
Know CE series data center switches features migration
Describe the background of TRILL Describe the technologies for VM virtual
Describe the basic concept of TRILL migration
Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL Describe the procedure of realization of VM

virtual migration
Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
Describe the application of TRILL in modern Describe the solution of Huawei nCenter
network network implementation
Configure TRILL protocol

Duration Class Size
5 working days Min 6, Max 12

2.20 WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs
2.20.1 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei WLAN solution
WLAN Product Introduction Describe Huawei AC basic performance
List Huawei wireless AP
OWL01 Lecture 0.5d
Describe Huawei AC hardware features
Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
Install AC6605
WLAN Installation and Basic
Commissioning Training Describe the models and usage scenarios of
OWL02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Huawei APs
Describe the basic installation of different types
Target Audience
APs
Operators and Maintainers List the note during installation
Prerequisites Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component
Duration
HCNA certification or similar knowledge 1 working day
2.20.2 WLAN Essential Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

Outline the typical Application of WLAN
WLAN Product Introduction Describe the theory of operations when AC as
a L2 switch or gateway
OWL01 Lecture 0.5d
Describe the methods of AP management
Describe the AP boot sequence
Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
WLAN Basic Principle and Configuration Use Huawei VRP basic command
OWL03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d Configure Basic Attributes of AC
Upgrade AC and AP
Target Audience
List the PoE components
Operators and Maintainers Describe PoE budget
Prerequisites Configure the equipment interface of POE
Describe the WLAN Features Supported by
the AC
Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Huawei WLAN network
Objectives
Configure the basic attribute of AC
On completion of this program, the List the encryption suites of WLAN
participants will be able to: List the authentication methods of WLAN
Describe Huawei WLAN solution Configure security-profile
Describe Huawei AC basic performance Duration
List Huawei wireless AP
Describe the WLAN basic component
3 working days
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Class Size

Fit AP
Min 6, Max 12
2.20.3 WLAN Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Configure Huawei WLAN load balance

Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN
WLAN Advanced Operation and deployment scenarios
Describe the Fresnel Zone
OWL04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics
Target Audience Describe Huawei outdoor AP
Operators and Maintainers List antennas characteristic

Describe how to select antennas
Prerequisites
Describe WDS basic concept
A general familiarity with PC operation system List WDS application scenarios
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe WDS setup
Configure WDS
Objectives Understand the basic principle of WMN
On completion of this program, the Understanding of WMN application scenario
participants will be able to: Configure WMN
Describe the importance of WLAN reliability List the common fault of WLAN
List the method of WLAN reliability Describe common fault troubleshooting of
Configure WLAN dual-link backup WLAN
Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming Duration

Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
3 working days
Configure WLAN roaming
Class Size
Configure 802.11n basic
Describe the principle of WLAN user load Min 6, Max 12
balance
2.20.4 WLAN Planning & Optimization Training
Training Path Describe spectrum division of 2.4 GHz and 5

GHz, channel requirements of main countries,
WLAN Planning & Optimization and HT40.
Training Calculate the EIRP.
OWL21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
Know typical WLAN planning scenarios.
Target Audience Have a good grasp of the WLAN planning
procedure and focuses.
Use tools to carry out simple WLAN planning.
Prerequisites
Perform brief WLAN planning to meet customer
A general familiarity with PC operation system requirements.
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe the process of the site survey for
HCNA certification or similar knowledge planning the WLAN.
Objectives Use WLAN planning tools for the site survey.
Describe precautions for the site survey in
different scenarios.
Know how to design a hierarchical network.
List the differences between wired and wireless
Plan VLANs on a medium- to large-sized WLAN.
networks.
Plan IP addresses on the WLAN.
Know commonly used Huawei WLAN devices.
Plan routes on the WLAN.
List usage scenarios and characteristics of
Describe basic WLAN architectures and
WLAN on industry networks.
components.
List usage scenarios of WLAN on carrier
Differentiate application scenarios of different AC
networks.
forwarding and deployment modes.
Describe the lifecycle and processes of the
Differentiate application scenarios of different AC
WLAN project.
networking modes and layers.
Describe necessities of WLAN planning and
Design WLAN architectures for different
optimization.
scenarios.
Describe methods of WLAN planning and
Describe other WLAN architectures.
optimization.
Learn about PoE components.
Describe the necessity of pre-sales network
Understand PoE power budget.
planning in the WLAN project.
Configure PoE.
Describe usage of pre-sales network planning in
the WLAN project. Describe how the high availability (HA) of WLAN
is implemented.
List the procedure of pre-sales network planning
in the WLAN project. Distinguish different hot-standby (HSB) methods
and understand their components and
Clarify customer's basic requirements in network
implementations.
planning.
Plan and configure an HSB WLAN network.
Learn about customer's high-level requirements.
Design an indoor settled WLAN.
Describe main organizations and standards in
the wireless field in industry and power Use the AP calculator.
requirements of main countries. Select suitable devices for indoor network

planning.
Use product specification quick search and scenarios.
comparison functions. Learn about WLAN solution characteristics in
Operate the WLAN Planner. typical scenarios.
Learn about common components of indoor Perform WLAN network planning in typical
distributed WLAN. scenarios.
Learn about the bandwidth, frequency band, and Describe different stages of Huawei enterprise
signal calculation method of indoor distributed service lifecycle model.
WLAN network planning. Describe basic principles for WLAN network
Learn about three common WLAN scenarios. planning.
Describe outdoor coverage requirements and Describe advantages and disadvantages of each
site survey contents. WLAN networking mode.
Know how to select APs and antennas. Describe features of small- and medium-scale
Plan the bandwidth and capacity of outdoor enterprise WLANs.
WLANs. Describe common networking modes of small-
Describe the basic AP deployment principles. and medium-scale enterprise WLANs.
List typical scenarios of outdoor coverage. Describe planning methods of small- and
Select suitable devices for outdoor network medium-scale enterprise WLANs.
planning. Describe design methods of small- and medium-
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network scale enterprise WLANs.
planning. Understand basic BYOD concepts.
Master the basic outdoor network planning Describe key WLAN technologies applicable in
process. large-scale enterprises.
Select suitable devices for outdoor network Describe WLAN optimization concept
planning. Describe WLAN optimization process
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network List WLAN data optimization methods
planning. Describe basic WLAN parameter calibration
Master the basic outdoor network planning methods
process. List WLAN optimization benefits
Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design. Understand basic interference sources
Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor Understand WLAN interference types
network planning. Know basic WLAN interference optimization
Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design. methods
Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor Know how to improve WLAN coverage
network planning. Understand WLAN coverage methods in high
Describe basic concepts of roaming. density scenarios
Summarize basic principles of roaming. Describe functions of WLAN Tester
Plan roaming. Describe the usage procedure of WLAN Tester
Know how to clarify requirements. Describe basic WLAN application scenarios
List site survey contents. List WLAN optimization methods in different
Know how to select APs and antennas. scenarios
Plan network bandwidth. Optimize WLAN networks
Describe basic principles for deploying APs.
List typical WDS and Mesh network planning
Duration Class Size

2.21 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
2.21.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

VRP System Operation participants will be able to:
Describe ME60 product hardware structure
ODA02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Describe ME60-X series products hardware
structure
Describe ME60 product feature
ME60 Product Introduction
Describe the VRP system structure
ODB01 Lecture, LVC 0.5d Describe the basic configuration and

commands
Upgrade VRP system
Configure the VRP user logging authentication
ME60 Product Routine Maintenance
Configure FTP service
ODB04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP
system
Target Audience Describe basic BRAS technologies

Describe ME60 product routine maintenance
ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
A basic understanding of data communication Class Size
A general understanding of telecom network
Min 6, Max 12
2.21.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path equipment

A general understanding of TCP/IP
ME60 Product Introduction A general understanding of routing basics
Objectives
ODB01 Lecture, LVC 0.5d
Describe ME60 product hardware structure
ME60 Routing Features Operation and
Troubleshooting Describe ME60-X series products hardware
ODB05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5d structure

Describe ME60 product feature
Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features
Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
ME60 BRAS Features Operation and
Troubleshooting Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol
ODB06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 4d features
Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
Describe RADIUS protocol principle
ME60 L2TP Features Operation and Describe DHCP protocol principle

Troubleshooting Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle
ODB07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Describe ME60 PPP service features and
realization
Describe ME60 IP service features and
ME60 Multicast Features Operation and realization
Troubleshooting
Describe ME60 leased line service feature and
realization
Describe ME60 BRAS service features
troubleshooting
ME60 QoS Features Operation and Configure ME60 PPP service features
Troubleshooting
Configure ME60 IP service features
Configure ME60 leased line service feature
Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization
Configure ME60 L2TP feature
ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features
Operation and Troubleshooting Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization
ODB17 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Configure ME60 QoS feature
Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization
Target Audience
Configure ME60 RUI feature
ME60 product 2nd line maintenance Duration
engineer 10 working days
At least one year of experience in the operation Min 6, Max 12
or maintenance of data communication
2.21.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training

Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and
ME60 IPTV Service Features realization
Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
and realization
Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization
Target Audience Describe ME60 IPTV solution features
Describe IPTV bear network multicast
ME60 product IPTV service maintenance
deployment solutions
engineer
Prerequisites Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature
Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
Attended ME60 Products 2nd Line Duration
A good understanding of datacom network 4 working days
Class Size
protocols
Objectives Min 6, Max 12
2.21.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training

ME60 Products Troubleshooting participants will be able to:
Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting
Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting
Perform ME60 leased line features
Target Audience troubleshooting
ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer Perform ME60 multicast features
or expert from technical supporting team troubleshooting
Prerequisites Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting
Duration
Attended ME60 Products 2nd Line
Maintenance Training 5 working days
A good understanding of datacom network Class Size
protocols Min 6, Max 12
2.21.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training

iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration participants will be able to:
Describe the architecture and main features of
ODM06 Lecture, Demonstration 1d
U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000
List the main functions of U2000
U2000 System Introduction
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and
performance management of U2000
ONU01 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d
Perform the browse and setting operation for
alarm
Perform the basic response operation for
U2000 Alarm and Performance
Management common alarm events
ONU02 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d Perform the browse and setting operation for
performance events
Manage ME60 by using U2000
Target Audience
Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000
U2000 operator and maintainer Duration
IP network routine monitor and maintainer
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Having the basic knowledge of Huawei ME60
Min 6, Max 12
product
2.22 PTN Products Training Programs
2.22.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training
T
raining Path Having an overview of telecommunications
Objectives
PTN Products Hardware Description On completion of this program, the
ODP03 Lecture, Demonstration 1d
Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure
Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the
PTN Products Installation and
Commissioning precautions
ODP05 Lecture, Demonstration 1d Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the
Target Audience precautions

Duration
PTN series installation and commissioning
2 working days
engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Having an overview of PTN products
applications
2.22.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path applications

Having an overview of telecommunications
PTN Products Hardware Description Objectives
Lecture, Demo 1d
ODP03
PTN Products Field Maintenance Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site
maintenance
ODP06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance
Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting
Describe 950&910 troubleshooting
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
NOC
0.5d Describe the tools and method of routine
ODP07Lecture, Hands-on exercise
maintenance in NOC
Duration
Target Audience
2 working days
PTN series 1st line /field maintenance Class Size
engineer
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
Having an overview of PTN products

2.22.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer

PTN Products Hardware Description Prerequisites
ODP03 Lecture, Demo 1d Having an overview of PTN products

applications
Having an overview of telecommunications
Objectives
PTN Products Features Description
ODP04 Lecture 1d participants will be able to:
Describe TCP&IP basic concepts
Describe Ethernet basic principle
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in Describe basic IP routing protocol works

NOC Describe MPLS basic concepts
Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature
PTN Products Public Principle Describe PTN 950&910 software feature
Describe PTN products PWE3 technology
ODP08 Lecture 2d
Describe PTN products control plane
Describe PTN products QoS technology
Describe PTN products protection technology
PTN Products Public Features Describe PTN products packet clock
technology
ODP09 Lecture, Demo 2d
Configure PTN products basic parameters
Configure PTN products interfaces
Configure PTN products control plane
PTN Products Basic Configuration Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel
Configure PTN products CES service
ODP10 Hands-on exercise, Demo 1d
Configure PTN products ATM service
Configure PTN products E-Line service
Configure PTN products E-LAN service
PTN Products Service Configuration Configure PTN products E-AGGR service
Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
Describe the tools and method of routine
maintenance in NOC
Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
process
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.22.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Training

Objectives
PTN Products Advanced Configuration On completion of this program, the
Configure PTN products QoS features
Configure PTN products protection
Deploy PTN products integrated services
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting
process
Describe PTN products alarm and performance
analysis
Describe PTN products common
PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting troubleshooting sase
Locate and eliminate PTN products faults
ODP14 Lecture, Case-study 2.5d
Duration
5 working days
Target Audience Class Size
PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance

2.22.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path Plan the PTN network management and DCN

Plan the equipment types according to the
PTN Network Planning and Design network requirement
Plan the PTN equipment boards
ODP15 Lecture, Case-study 3d
Plan the PTN network protections
Target Audience Plan the PTN network synchronization
Plan the PTN network QoS
PTN series network planning and design
Design the PTN network layers
engineer
Prerequisites Design the PTN network slots allocation
Design the PTN equipment parameters
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance
Design the MPLS tunnel parameters
training
Objectives Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services
parameters
On completion of this program, the Duration
3 working days
Describe the PTN network planning process
Class Size
Collect the network requirements information
Plan the PTN network layers Min 6, Max 12
Plan the PTN network services
2.23 Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Programs
2.23.1 eSight-IP Enterprise NMS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describes the monitoring network alarm steps

Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
eSight Enterprise NMS Operation and
Maintenance Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Describes the remote alarm notification
ONM11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d
procedure
Target Audience
Describes the basic concepts of performance
Operators and Maintainers management
Monitoring Staffs Describes the performance monitoring process
Administrators Describes the ways to browsing performance

monitoring data
Prerequisites
Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration
A general familiarity with PC operation system files
A basic understanding of computer technology Describe common operations for managing NE
A basic understanding of IP network configuration files
Objectives Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
files
Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing
up parameters
Describe the basic concepts of network
Describe an overview of the functions provided
management
by the smart configuration tool
Describe the network management functions
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
Describe the network management component
template
Describe the enterprise network overview
Describe the basic functions of eSight plan sheet
Describe the networking mode of eSight system Describe the functions of Deployment record
Describe eSight related indicators management
Describe the installation profile Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps Describe querying logs
Master eSight license function and application Describe Lower-Layer NMS
Describe the user authority control and managed Describe licenses management
domain management of eSight Describe backing up and restoring the database
Describe topology management Describe NE packages management
Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Duration
Describe about physical resource management
functions 2 working days
Use link resource management functions Class Size
Use electronic label management features
Min 6, Max 12
Use about NE Explorer
2.23.2 eSight-IP WLAN Management Training

eSight WLAN Management
ONM1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN
Target Audience Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN

management
Operators and Maintainers Describe maintenance routine task of eSight
Monitoring Staffs WLAN
Administrators Use eSight WLAN serve management to
Prerequisites manage WLAN equipment
Duration
A basic understanding of computer technology 0.5 working days
A basic understanding of IP network Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.23.3 eSight-IP MPLS VPN Management Training

eSight MPLS VPN Management
ONM1C Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN
Target Audience Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN

Automatic Discovery of eSight
Operators and Maintainers Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring
Monitoring Staffs Services of eSight
Administrators Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN
A general familiarity with PC operation system 0.5 working days

A basic understanding of computer technology Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.23.4 eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel Management Training
Training Path A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management
ONM1I Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d participants will be able to:
Target Audience Describe the basic concepts of MPLS tunnels
Configure automatic discovery of MPLS tunnels
Operators and Maintainers Monitor functions of MPLS tunnels
Monitoring Staffs
Duration
Administrators
Prerequisites 0.5 working days
Class Size
A basic understanding of computer technology Min 6, Max 12
2.23.5 eSight-IP SLA Management Training

eSight SLA Management
ONM1D Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the functions and basic concepts of
SLA of eSight
Target Audience
Use the service management of SLA of eSight
Operators and Maintainers Use the task management of SLA of eSight
Monitoring Staffs Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight
Administrators Use the report of SLA of eSight
A general familiarity with PC operation system 0.5 working days

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.23.6 eSight-IP IPSec VPN Management Training

eSight IPSec VPN Management
ONM1E Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN
Target Audience Describe eSight IPSec VPN management

features
Operators and Maintainers Use eSight IPSec VPN management features
Monitoring Staffs Duration
Administrators
0.5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
2.23.7 eSight-IP Smart Reporter Management Training
Training Path A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives
eSight Smart Report Management
ONM1F Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d participants will be able to:
Target Audience Describe the basic functions of eSight Report
Use eSight Report features
Duration
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators 0.5 working days
A general familiarity with PC operation system Min 6, Max 12

2.23.8 eSight-IP NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) On completion of this program, the

Management
ONM1G Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the basic concepts of NTA
management
Target Audience
Use eSight NTA management features
Operators and Maintainers Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA
Monitoring Staffs management
Administrators Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working days
A general familiarity with PC operation system Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.23.9 eSight-IP Terminal Resources Management Training

eSight Terminal Resources Management
ONM1H Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Describe the basic concepts involved in terminal
resource management
Target Audience
Describe the main functions of terminal resource
Monitoring Staffs Use terminal resource management functions
Administrators Describe the application scenarios of terminal
Prerequisites resource management
Duration
A basic understanding of computer technology 0.5 working days
A basic understanding of IP network Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.23.10 eSight-IP SecureCenter Management Training

Describe Secure Center positioning and
eSight SecureCenter Management values
Describe Secure Center basic
ONM1J Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
management
Describe Secure Center policy analysis
Target Audience
Describe Secure Center ACL
Installers and Commissioning Staff Describe Secure Center firewall policy
Administrators management
Prerequisites Understand Secure Center AR policy

management
Be familiar with data communications network Be familiar with Secure Center switch
elementary knowledge policy management
Be familiar with network security elementary
Duration
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge 1 working days,

2.23.11 eSight-IP LogCenter Management Training
eSight LogCenter Management On completion of this program, the

Training participants will be able to:
ONM1K Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe the background of LogCenter
system
Target Audience Describe LogCenter system function
Describe Typical Scenarios of LogCenter
System Application
Installers and Commissioning Staff
Describe LogCenter System Performance
Administrators
Be familiar with LogCenter system Basic
Prerequisites Operation
Be familiar with data communications network Understand Functional modules of

elementary knowledge LogCenter
Be familiar with network security elementary Duration
knowledge
1 working days
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.23.12 eSight Agile Features TrainingSVF&iPCA
Training Path Describe Basic concepts of iPCA

Describe Basic functions of iPCA
eSight Agile Feature Management Describe eSight iPCA components
Describe Typical application scenarios of
ONM1L Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
iPCA
Describe the basic concepts and
Target Audience
functions of eSight SVF
Operators and Maintainers Describe the unified device management
Installers and Commissioning Staff function of eSight SVF
Administrators Describe the unified user management
function of eSight SVF
Prerequisites
Describe the unified configuration
A general familiarity with PC operation system management function of eSight SVF
A basic understanding of computer technology Duration
0.5 working days, including Hands-on
Objectives
exercise 0.25 working day
On completion of this program, the Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.24 Agile Controller Training Programs
2.24.1 Agile Controller Operation & Maintenance Training
Training Path Understand application scenarios of admission

control
Agile Controller Operation & Understand implementation of admission control
Know how to deploy and configure admission
OACS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
control
Target Audience Know how to troubleshoot faults of admission
control
Application scenarios of guest management
Prerequisites Process of creating, approving, distributing, and
A general familiarity with PC operation system deregistering guest accounts
A basic understanding of computer technology Portal authentication process for guests
HCNA certification or similar knowledge Guest behavior audit operations
Objectives Understand application scenarios of Agile

Controller terminal security features
On completion of this program, the Understand implementation of Agile Controller
participants will be able to: terminal security features
Highlights of the Agile Controller Know how to deploy and configure Agile
Software and hardware components of the Agile Controller terminal security features
Controller Know how to troubleshoot faults of Agile
Application scenarios of the Agile Controller Controller terminal security features
Get an overview of Agile Controller software Duration
Know how to install or uninstall the Agile
Controller 3 working days
Master license functions of the Agile Controller Class Size
and the method to apply for a license Min 6, Max 12
2.25 AnyOffice Training Programs
2.25.1 Anyoffice Operation and Maintenance Training

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
AnyOffice Solution Introduction
technology
Understand the configuration of SSL VPN
OS31 Lecture 0.5 d
Understand the software architecture of
Anyoffice Device
AnyOffice Installation & Deployment Understand the application environment of
Lecture, Operation Anyoffice Device

OS32 demonstration 0.5 d Understand the application scenario of Anyoffice
Device
Describe the basics configuration of Anyoffice
AnyOffice Features & Configurations
Device
OS33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1.5 d Understand the Solution deployment Anyoffice
Device
Describe Client customization method
AnyOffice Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Describe AnyOffice Basic Configuration
Lecture
Describe AnyOffice Functions
OS34 0.5 d
Understand AnyOffice Case Analyze
Target Audience Describe AnyOffice Software
Operators and Maintainers Configurations
Prerequisites Describe AnyOffice User Authentication
Understand the Common faults and positioning
A basic understanding of computer technology method of Anyoffice Device
Be familiar with data communications network Understand the troubleshooting method of
elementary knowledge Anyoffice Device
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge 3 working days

2.26 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
2.26.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training

Describe enterprise network design principles
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Describe enterprise network design basic
process
ORS91 Lecture, Case-study 1d
Analyze general enterprise requirements for
network design
Target Audience Describe best practices of enterprise network
Planners and Designers design

Describe Huawei enterprise network products
Administrators
Operators and Maintainers Design general enterprise network

1 working day

2.26.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training

Describe concepts of campus network
Designing Enterprise Campus Network Describe Huawei OneNet campus network
solution
List common technologies in campus network
Target Audience
Describe Huawei OneNet campus business
Planners and Designers solution
Administrators Choose appropriate products for campus

network

1 working day

A general experience in network design Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

2.26.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training

Analyze of the general needs of enterprise
Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise network construction
Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN
Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS
Target Audience L3VPN architecture
Planners and Designers Select the appropriate technology and solutions

for enterprise networking
Administrators
Choose the appropriate product for enterprise
networking
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology
Class Size

2.26.4 Data Center Network Design Training
Training Path List Principles of Data Center Network Design

Design Data Center Network Architecture
Designing Data Center Network Design Data Center Network Areas
Design Data Center Network Panels
ORS94 Lecture 2d
Design Data Center Network Services
Target Audience
Design Data Center Network Interconnection
Planners and Designers Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution
Administrators Describe Data Center WAN Optimization
Operators and Maintainers Solution
Prerequisites Describe Data Center NetStream Solution

List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center
A basic understanding of computer technology Network
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center
A general familiarity with MPLS/VPN Network Solution
Objectives List Huawei CloudEngine Products
Duration
participants will be able to: 2 working days
Outline Data Center Network Overview
Class Size
Outline Trend of Data Center Network
Outline Data Center Network Solution Min 6, Max 12
2.27 Security Technology Fundamental Training
2.27.1 Firewall Technology Fundamental Training

Understand the definition and classification of
Firewall Elementary Technology
firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.
OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Target Audience Understand the service process and
basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the packet filtering scenario
Administrators and configuration
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Understand the principles of the NAT
Prerequisites
technology.
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary Duration
knowledge 1 working days
Be familiar with Router&Switch Class Size
elementary knowledge

2.28 Security Advance Technology Training
2.28.1 Firewall VPN Technology Training
Training Path VPN.

Understand the principles of L2TP.
Basic VPN Technology
Understand the principles of the IPSec
OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d technology.

technology.
Understand the basic configuration of
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
VPN
OFW11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d Understand Advanced features and
Target Audience configuration of IPSec VPN.
Operators and Maintainers Understand Advanced features and
Prerequisites configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
Understand Advanced applications and
configuration of SSL VPN.
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
Understand Scenarios of comprehensive
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary
VPN applications.
knowledge
Troubleshooting of VPN.
Objectives
Duration
3 working days
Min 6, Max 12
2.28.2 Firewall UTM(Unified Threat Management) Technology Training
Training Path Describe the basic knowledge of UTM

Understand Intrusion detection and
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Intrusion prevention technology.
Understand major antivirus technologies
for gateways
Target Audience Understand the key technology of Web
Operators and Maintainers filtering.
Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
Prerequisites
Understand the main DPI technology.
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Troubleshooting of UTM
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary Duration
knowledge
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
2.28.3 Firewall Reliability &Attack Defense Technology Training
Training Path Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup

principle
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Basic Networking and Configuration
OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
Backup Typical Networking.
Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Advanced Firewall Security Features
Describe Advanced Firewall Security
Features
Understand Firewall Reliability
Target Audience
Technology
Operators and Maintainers Understand Virtual Firewall Technology
Prerequisites Understand Basic Attack Defense
Technologies on Firewall
Duration
knowledge 3 working days

2.29 USG2000/5000 Firewall Training
2.29.1 USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product

Overview participants will be able to:
OFW21 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d Describe the basic knowledge of
USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic
Installation
Describe the application scenario of
OFW22 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d
Target Audience
Describe the hardware Installation and
Installers and Commissioning Staffs maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Operators and Maintainers Describe the basic CLI configuration of
Prerequisites
Describe the basic WEB management of
Be familiar with PC operation system USG2000/5000 firewall
Be familiar with data communications network Duration
1 working days
knowledge Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.29.2 USG2000/5000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product
Overview USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the application scenario of
Describe the basic CLI configuration of
OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d USG2000/5000 firewall
firewalls.
Basic VPN Technology Understand firewall functions and technologies.
OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Understand the service process and
basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the principles of the NAT
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology technology.
VPN.
USG2000/5000 UTM Technology Understand the principles of L2TP.

Understand the principles of GRE.
technology.
USG2000/5000 Routine Maintenance and Understand the principles of the SSL VPN
Troubleshooting
technology.
OFW24Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d Understand the basic configuration of
Target Audience VPN
Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
principle
Prerequisites Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Be familiar with PC operation system Basic Networking and Configuration
Be familiar with data communications network Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
elementary knowledge Backup Typical Networking.
Be familiar with network security elementary Troubleshooting of HA technology.
knowledge Understand USG2000/5000 UTM Typical
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Networking and Configuration.

Understand the Method To Upgrade the
Objectives
USG2000/5000
On completion of this program, the Understand USG2000/5000 Routine
participants will be able to: Maintenance Steps.
Describe the basic knowledge of Understand the troubleshooting method of
USG2000/5000 Class Size
Duration Min 6, Max 12

4 working days
2.30 USG6000 Next Generation Firewall Training
2.30.1 USG6000 Installation and Commissioning Training

USG6000 Series Product Overview
OFW31 Lecture ,Operation demonstration 0.5d Describe the basic knowledge of USG6000
firewall
Describe the application scenario of USG6000
USG6000 Series Product Basic Installation firewall
Describe the hardware Installation and
maintenance of USG6000 firewall
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs USG6000 firewall
Operators and Maintainers Describe the basic WEB management of

USG6000 firewall
Prerequisites
Duration
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
1 working days
elementary knowledge Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
knowledge
2.30.2 USG6000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path firewall

Describe the application scenario of USG6000
USG6000 Series Product Overview firewall

USG6000 firewall
USG6000 firewall
OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d firewalls.
Understand the service process and
Basic VPN Technology basic configuration of firewalls.
technology.
Firewall Dual-system hot backup
Technology VPN.
OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Understand the principles of L2TP.
USG6000 IPS & Anti-Virus Technology technology.
technology.
VPN
USG6000 Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
OFW34 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d principle
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Target Audience Basic Networking and Configuration
Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
Operators and Maintainers Backup Typical Networking.
Prerequisites Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Understand the technology principles of
USG6000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Understand the Configuration Method of
USG6000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Understand the Method To Upgrade the
knowledge
USG6000
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Understand USG6000 Routine Maintenance
Objectives Steps.
Understand the troubleshooting method of
USG6000
Describe the basic knowledge of USG6000
Duration Class Size

2.30.3 USG6000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

Understand USG6000 Application Signature
USG6000 Advanced Features Overview
technology
Understand USG6000 SA(Service Awareness)
Feature
Target Audience Understand USG6000 Bandwidth Management
Feature
Understand USG6000 Intelligent Policy
Prerequisites Configuration
Be familiar with PC operation system Understand USG6000 intelligent uplink selection

Feature
Understand USG6000 User Management
Feature
knowledge Duration

2.31 USG9000 High-end Firewall Training
2.31.1 USG9000 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path knowledge

Objectives
OFW41 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware structure of
Huawei's high-end series firewall
USG9000 Series Product Basic Installation Describe the performance parameter of
Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Understand the distributed board of Huawei's
Target Audience
high-end series firewall
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Master USG9000 Hardware Installation
Operators and Maintainers Master USG9000 Basic CLI Configuration
Prerequisites Master USG9000 Basic WEB Configuration

Duration
Be familiar with data communications network 1 working days
elementary knowledge Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.31.2 USG9000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Huawei's high-end series firewall

Describe the performance parameter of
Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Understand the distributed board of Huawei's
OFW41Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d
high-end series firewall
Master USG9000 Basic CLI Configuration
Master USG9000 Basic WEB Configuration
Firewall Elementary Technology Understand the definition and classification of
OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d firewalls.

Understand the service process and
Basic VPN Technology basic configuration of firewalls.
OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d technology.
Firewall Dual-system hot backup
Technology VPN.
OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Understand the principles of L2TP.

technology.
USG9000 IPS & Anti-Virus Technology
OFW43 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d technology.
VPN
USG9000 Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
principle
OFW44Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Target Audience Basic Networking and Configuration
Operators and Maintainers Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot

Backup Typical Networking.
Prerequisites
Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Be familiar with PC operation system Master USG9500 Hardware Installation
Be familiar with data communications network Understand the technology principles of
elementary knowledge USG9000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Be familiar with network security elementary Understand the Configuration Method of

knowledge USG9000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Understand the Method To Upgrade the
USG9000
Objectives
Understand USG9000 Routine Maintenance
On completion of this program, the Steps.
participants will be able to: Understand the troubleshooting method of
Describe the hardware structure of USG9000
Duration Class Size

2.31.3 USG9000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
USG9000 High-end Firewall Advanced On completion of this program, the

Features Overview participants will be able to:
OFW45 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2d Understand USG9000 Application Signature
Target Audience technology

Understand USG9000 SA(Service Awareness)
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Feature
Administrators Understand USG9000 IP-CAR Feature
Operators and Maintainers Understand USG9000 intelligent uplink selection
Prerequisites Feature
Understand USG9000 virtual system Feature
Understand USG9000 IPv6 Feature
elementary knowledge Duration
Be familiar with network security elementary 2 working days
knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.32 SVN(Security Virtual Network) Training
2.32.1 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training

Understand the hardware architecture
SVN Product Overview and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device
OSV11 Lecture 0.5d
Understand the main hardware
component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
SVN Product Basic Installation and Understand the software architecture of
Configuration
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
OSV12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Understand the application environment
Target Audience of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application scenario of
Installers and Commissioning Staffs SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Operators and Maintainers Describe the hardware installation of
Administrators SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Prerequisites Understand the physical environment
requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device
Describe the basics configuration of
Duration
knowledge

2.32.2 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Understand the main hardware

component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
SVN Product Overview Understand the software architecture of
OSV11 Lecture 0.5d
Understand the application environment
of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application scenario of
SVN Functions and Features
OSV13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Understand the principles of the SSL
VPN technology
Understand the basics configuration of SSL VPN
SVN Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Understand the Solution deployment
OSV14Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d
Describe the high-level function
Target Audience
configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000
Operators and Maintainers Device
Prerequisites Understand the System Status of
Be familiar with PC operation system Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login
Be familiar with data communications network Manage page
elementary knowledge Understand the Common faults and
Be familiar with network security elementary positioning method of
knowledge SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Understand the troubleshooting method of
Objectives SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Duration
Understand the hardware architecture Class Size
and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device Min 6, Max 12
2.33 ASG( Application Security Gateway) Training
2.33.1 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training

Describe Network Orientation of ASG
ASG Product Overview Understand Hardware Structure of ASG
Lecture,
Understand Function Feature of ASG
OAS11 0.5d
Know the Typical Application of ASG
Describe ASG login method
ASG Product Basic Installation and Describe ASG Initialization configuration
Configuration
Describe ASG Installation Procedure
OAS12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d
Describe the Installation Procedure of
Target Audience ASG Manager
Understand Overview of Updating the
signature database on ASG
Understand ASG Online Updating for the
Administrators
signature database
Prerequisites
Understand ASG Local Updating for the
Be familiar with PC operation system signature database

1 working days
Class Size
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

2.33.2 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Understand Function Feature of ASG

Know the Typical Application of ASG
ASG Product Overview Describe the management module
function of ASG
OAS11 Lecture 0.5d
Understand ASG Manager Function
Configuration
Describe the Alarm Management function
ASG Functions and Features Overview
of ASG Manager
OAS13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe the configuration of Alarm
Management function in ASG Manager
Describe ASG Maintenance tool
ASG Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Describe ASG Hardware Maintenance
OAS14Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d Describe ASG Software Maintenance
Target Audience Describe ASG Software Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager Routine
Operators and Maintainers Maintenance and Main method
Prerequisites Understand ASG Manager Software
Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager fault
finding in routine maintenance
Understand the basic troubleshooting
knowledge
knowledge
Describe ASG Manager Troubleshooting
method
Objectives
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Describe Network Orientation of ASG
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG Min 6, Max 12
2.34 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training
2.34.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Device

Understand the software Function of
NIP Product Overview IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware architecture of
ONI11 Lecture, 0.5d
NIP Device
Understand the hardware specifications
NIP Product Basic Installation and of NIP Device
Configuration Understand the hardware main
ONI12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d component of NIP Device
Target Audience Understand the software architecture of
NIP
Operators and Maintainers Understand the software application scenario of
Installers and Commissioning Staffs NIP Device
Administrators Understand the hardware installation of
Prerequisites NIP Device
Understand the physical environment of
NIP Device
Understand the basic configuration of NIP
knowledge
Device
Duration
Objectives
1 working days
Class Size
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device Min 6, Max 12
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS
2.34.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Understand the hardware specifications

of NIP Device
NIP Product Overview Understand the hardware main
component of NIP Device
ONI11 Lecture 0.5d
Understand the software architecture of
NIP
Understand the software application scenario of
NIP Product Functions and Features
Overview NIP Device
ONI13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Understand the concept of Intrusion detection
and Intrusion prevention
Understand Intrusion detection technology
NIP Product Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Understand Intrusion prevention technology
ONI14 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d Understand the application of Intrusion detection
technology
Target Audience Understand the application of Intrusion

prevention technology
Operators and Maintainers Understand Application control of IPS Device
Prerequisites Understand Application control of IDS Device
Be familiar with PC operation system Understand Threat Prevention of IPS Device
Be familiar with network security elementary Understand Threat Prevention of IDS Device
knowledge Understand Typical Application scene of IPS
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Device

Understand Typical Application scene of IDS
Objectives
Device
On completion of this program, the Understand the maintenance operations of NIP
participants will be able to: Device
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device Understand the software patches of NIP Device
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Understand the Troubleshooting of NIP Device
Device Duration
Understand the software Function of
IPS/IDS Device 2 working days
Understand the hardware architecture of Class Size
NIP Device
Min 6, Max 12
2.35 Security Management Software Training
2.35.1 Policy Center Operation and Maintenance Training

Policy Center Product Overview
OPC11 Lecture, 0.5d Describe Terminal Security Management system
Background.
Describe Terminal Security Management system
Policy Center Product Basic Installation and
Configuration component
Lecture, Operation demonstration Understand Policy Center System Background
OPC12 Hands-on exercise 1d
Understand Policy Center System Architecture
Understand Policy Center System Functions
Policy Center Functions and Features
Configuration Describe Policy Center System Typical
Lecture, Operation demonstration Scenarios and Performance index
OPC13 Hands-on exercise 1d
Understand Policy Center Installation Planning
and Preparations
Policy Center Routine Maintenance and Be familiar with Policy Center Installation
Troubleshooting Process
OPC14 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic
Operation
Target Audience Understand Functional modules Definition of
Policy Center
Understand the technology and application of
Prerequisites
Policy Center System each Component
Be familiar with data communications network Understand the Policy Center Routine
elementary knowledge Maintenance Methods
knowledge
3 working days
Be familiar with OS.
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
2.36 Anti-DDoS Defense System Training
2.36.1 Anti-DDoS Defense System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe Principle of Anti-DDoS attack

and Anti-DDoS defense technology
Anti-DDoS Solution Operation and Understand network Design of
management Center
OAD11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d Understand network Design of Detecting
Target Audience Center
Understand network Design of Cleaning
Center
Prerequisites Understand mirroring traffic, monitor
network traffic and redirection traffic in
Anti-DDoS Solution
Master basic configuration and system
management
Master Anti-DDoS Product Management
knowledge
and Customer Management
Master Anti-DDoS Solution Report management
Objectives
and System maintenance
3 working days
Describe Huawei Anti-DDos Product
Component Class Size
Describe Anti-DDos Network Orientation
Min 6, Max 12
and Typical Application
2.37 UMA System Training
2.37.1 UMA System Operation and Maintenance Training

Describe UMA orientation and product
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance value
Training
Master UMA system architecture and
OUM11 Lecture, Operation demonstration 1d
system component
Target Audience Master UMA main function feature
Know the UMA application network
Master UMA initial configuration
Prerequisites Master UMA basic function configuration
Be familiar with PC operation system Know Common fault finding in UMA

1 working days
Class Size
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

2.38 Security Planning and Design Training
2.38.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Firewall Planning and Design
OSCD1 Lecture, 1d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge

knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary
knowledge
Objectives

Understand Huawei Security Concept
Understand Huawei Security
Competence Center
Be familiar with Huawei Security Products
Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security
Products Application and Solution
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
3 Enterprise UC&C Training Solution
3.1 Training Path
3.1.1 UC Career Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-UC (Fast-Track)
Professional Implementing Huawei Unified
Communication Solutions
5d
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Associate Huawei Unified Communication
Administration
5d
Elective Guide:
Projects in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses
Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
3.1.2 CC Career Certification Training Path
Expert
Professional
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei

Associate Contact Center Administration Training
5d
Elective Guide:
Projects in Associate corresponding to HCNA courses
3.1.3 VC Career Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-VC-IHVCP
HCNP-VC-IHVP
Huawei Video
Conference Implementing Huawei
Professional Advanced ViewPoint
Protocol
3d System 5d
HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Associate Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration 5d
Elective Guide:
Follow the paths to learn.
Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first
3.1.4 Huawei eSpace IPT System Training Path

Training Training
Huawei eSpace IPT System Huawei eSpace IPT System
Configuration and Operation Training Troubleshooting Training
5d 3d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U1900 voice system.
Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System
Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.
3.1.5 Huawei eSpace UC System Training Path
Planning and Design Operation and Maintenance Advanced Technology Training

Training Training
Huawei eSpace UC System
Configuration and Operation Training
8d
Elective Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC system.
Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System
Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.
3.1.6 CC Operation and Maintenance Training Path
Planning and Design Operation and Maintenance Advanced Technology

Training Training Training
Voice Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and
Operation Training
8d
Multimedia Contact Center

Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation (Including Voice
Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and
Operation) Training
10d
Elective-Guide:
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U2900 access gateway.
Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/ Multimedia Contact Center.
Electing by customer: Manager/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to Management and
Monitoring/Service introduction, configuration and operation/Installation and Commissioning.
3.1.7 Video Conference Product Training Path

Video Conference H.323 and SIP Protocol
System( Terminal/MCU/
SMC/RSE) Operation and 2d
Maintenance 5d
Video Conference
System( Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Advanced Features Operation
and Maintenance 5d
TP/RP Series Product Operation

and Maintenance
2d
Technology Video Conference TelePresence(TP) and

Fundament System( Terminal/MCU/SMC) RoomPrecense(RP) Series
Technology Fundamental
als Training Technology Fundamental 1d
2d
Elective Guide
Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using VC system.
Enterprise UC&C Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
UC Career Certification Training Programs

HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified
Communication Administration Training 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-UC (Fast Track) Implementing Huawei Unified

5 6 ~ 12
Communication Solutions Training
CC Career Certification Training Programs
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact

5 6 ~ 12
Center Administration Training
VC Career Certification Training Programs
HCNA-VC Training 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-VC Training 8 6 ~ 12
IVS Specialist Certification Training
HCS-Field-IVS Training 3 6 ~ 12
Huawei eSpace IPT system Training
Huawei eSpace IPT System Configuration and

5 6 ~ 12
Operation Training
Huawei eSpace IPT System Troubleshooting Training 2 6 ~ 12
Huawei eSpace UC System Training
Huawei eSpace UC System Configuration and

8 6 ~ 12
Operation Training
CC general Training Programs
Contact Center Management and Monitoring Training 3 6 ~ 12
CC Contact Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,

8 6 ~ 12
Configuration and Operation Training
Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,

Configuration and Operation Training(Including Voice
10 6 ~ 12
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation Training)
CC eSpace VTM Training
eSpace VTM Operation and Maintenance Training 7 6 ~ 12
VC Operation and Maintenance Training
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC/RSE)

5 6 ~ 12
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced

5 6 ~ 12
Features Operation and Maintenance Training
TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
Huawei eSpace IVS System Traning
Huawei IVS System Operation and Maintenance Training 5 6 ~ 12
VCM Intelligent Analysis System Deployment and

3 6 ~ 12
Management Training
Enterprise Network Management System eSight-UCC Traning
eSight-UCC Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
eSight-UCC UC Business Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight-UCC IVS Business Management Training 0.5 6 ~ 12

Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert Course
3.4 UC Career Certification Training Programs
3.4.1 HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration
Training Path Understand the call flow of U1900 intra-office

Perform the data configuration on 1900, IAD
HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified and IP Phone
Communication Administration
Describe the inter-office call flow of U1900
OUCX1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5 d
Complete the data configuration in related
Target Audience devices to realize the inter-office call
Describe the number conversion application
Those who hope to become a UC engineer
scenario
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-UC
Understand the number conversion types and
Prerequisites
their priority
A general familiarity with PC operation system Configure the number conversion
A general familiarity with network knowledge Describe the intelligent routing application
A general familiarity with communication theory scenario

Configure intelligent routing
Objectives
Understand the voice service of Huawei
On completion of this program, the eSpace IPT solution
participants will be able to: Understand the various voice service
Understand the traditional voice network configuration of Huawei eSpace IPT solution
Understand the components, interfaces and Describe the advanced features of eSpace IPT
signaling in the traditional voice network Solution
Know the architecture in the VoIP Network Understand the application scenarios of
Master the basic knowledge in the VoIP eSpace IPT advanced features
Network Perform the configuration of eSpace IPT
Understand the signaling and media protocols advanced features
in the VoIP network Know U1900 users default call right
Know basic concepts of the Huawei eSpace Describe the right control application scenario
IPT solution Configure common call restriction policies
Describe system architecture and products at Perform the maintenance of devices of eSpace
each layer of the Huawei eSpace IPT solution IPT system
Understand the operation interfaces of every Describe the routine maintenance and
element of eSpace IPT solution troubleshooting methods of U1900
Understand the functions of administrator Describe the routine maintenance and
operation interfaces troubleshooting methods of IAD
Get some basic concepts about calls Configure and upgrade IP Phones in batches
Understand the interrelationship between Understand the troubleshooting process
these concepts
Collect and analyze various types of fault
Describe the registration flow of the users reference information
under U1900
Diagnose common system faults exercise 2 working days
Rectify common faults Class Size
Duration
Min 6, max 12
5 working days, including hands-on
3.4.2 HCNP-UC (Fast-Track) Implementing Huawei Unified Communication
Solutions
Training Path Master Active&standby network configuring

Understand the mechanism of remote disaster
HCNP-UC (Fast-Track) Implementing Huawei
Unified Communication Solutions recovery network
Know the registration process and call process
OUCX2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5 d
of multi-node centralized network
Target Audience Master fundamental and configuring of local
regeneration
Those who hope to become an advanced
Master configuring of multi-node centralized
Unified Communication engineer
network
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
Understand the registration process and call
Prerequisites process of peer to peer mode network
A general familiarity with PC operation system Understand the registration process and call
process of convergent mode network
A general familiarity with network knowledge
Understand the ECS application deployment
A general familiarity with communication theory
types
HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge
Know the installation of ECS application
Objectives
Know the principle of terminal account
On completion of this program, the Master how to configure the terminal account
participants will be able to: in BMU
Know the development tendency of Know the registration process and call process
communication of terminal
Know the architecture of eSpace UC solution Know the presence and IM service
Know the component element of eSpace UC Know UC self-service operation
solution Master how to make multimedia conference
Know various services provided in eSpace UC service
solution Master how to commission the corporate
Understand the Typical networking of eSpace directory service
UC solution Understand console service
Know components and their functions of Understand the toll fraud prevention measure
eSpace UC solution Know the basic service configuration of
Know calling processes of eSpace UC solution eSpace UMS
Know required licenses of eSpace UC solution Understand eSpace Audio Recorder solution
Understand eSpace UC service management features
system Get familiar with the CDR service scenarios
Understand gateway and terminal login Configure the CDR service in Single node
interfaces Learn about precautions for eSpace UC
Understand self-service portal routine maintenance
Understand terminal portal Get familiar with typical tools and methods for
Understand the reliable IPT network routine maintenance
Understand the troubleshooting process Duration
Understand how to collect and analyze various 5 working days, including hands-on
types of fault reference information exercise 2 working days
Understand how to diagnose common system
Class Size
faults
Understand how to rectify common faults Min 6, max 12
3.5 CC Career Certification Training Programs
3.5.1 HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration Training
Training Path system of the eSpace U2980 series gateway.

Understand the cable connections and
HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact applications of the U2980.
Center Administration Training
Master the basic concepts of the U2980.
OCCX1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d
Master the basic connection configuration of
Target Audience the U2980.
Understand basic principles of the agent
Those who hope to become a Contact
service.
Center engineer
Get familiar with interworking configuration.
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-CC
Be skilled in agent service configuration.
Prerequisites
Get familiar with basic concepts and scenarios
A general familiarity with PC operation system about routing in a contact center.
Objectives Understand the call allocation policies.

Be skilled in contact center policy
On completion of this program, the configuration.
participants will be able to: Learn about basic principles of the IVR
Learn about the contact center's development service.
history.
Be skilled at IVR service configuration.
Get familiar with eSpace CC solution.
Understand basic concepts about eSpace BIR.
Know typical networks of eSpace CC.
Get familiar with the networking scheme,
Understand interfaces and protocols of eSpace component relationships, and service process
CC. for the eSpace BIR voice report service.
Master functions of components in eSpace Be skilled in commissioning the eSpace BIR
CC. voice report service.
Get familiar with U2980 LMT management Understand the basic concepts and functions
page. of eSpace CMS.
Get familiar with WAS platform management Know the component relationships and service
and operation page. processes of eSpace CMS.
Get familiar with Agent management and Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
operation page. monitoring and inspection services.
Get familiar with CMS platform management Configuration administrator routine operations.
and operation page.
Operation administrator routine operations.
Get familiar with BIR platform management
Service manager routine operations.
and operation page.
Inspector routine operations.
Understand the planning and design principles
Agent routine operations.
of the eSpace CC system.
Routine maintenance of the eSpace CC
Know how to install the software for the
system.
eSpace CC system.
Methods for collecting logs for the eSpace CC
Understand the networking and hardware
system.
Sequence for powering on the eSpace CC Duration
components upon power outage and methods
5 working day, including hands-on exercise
for restarting the eSpace CC services.
2 working day
eSpace CC backup scenarios and policies.
Class Size
Methods for changing passwords for users in
the eSpace CC system. Min 6, max 12
3.6 VC Career Certification Training Programs
3.6.1 HCNA-VC Training
Training Path Master MCU Functions and Features

Master SMC Roles and Product Lines
HCNA-VC-IHVCA Introducing Huawei Video
Conference Administration Master SMC Architecture
OVCX1 Lecture, Hands-on 5d Master SMC Features and Benefits

exercise Know Huawei MCU Interoperability with MS-UC
Target Audience
Know Huawei VC Interoperability with IBM
Those who hope to become a video SameTime
conference associate Know Huawei MCU Interoperability With Skype
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC Know Huawei MCU Interoperability With Other
certificate Vendors
Prerequisites Know Huawei Video Conference system Design

Master HD terminal Installation and
Configuration
Master MCU Installation and Configuration
Master SMC Installation and Configuration
Objectives Know TP Room Recommendations
On completion of this program, the Master HD terminal Software Upgrade
participants will be able to: Master MCU Software Upgrade
Know Video Conference Concept Master SMC Software Upgrade
Know Video Conference Development History Mater Terminal Optimization & Tuning
and Trend Master Basic Diagnostic Method
Know Video Conference Product Portfolio Master Log Collection
Know Video Conference Technological Know Troubleshooting strategies and
Innovation Methodologies
Know Videoconferencing Application Modes Master Event monitoring
Know Huawei Videoconferencing Solutions Master HD terminal troubleshooting method
Know H.323 and SIP framework Protocol Master MCU troubleshooting method
Concept Master SMC troubleshooting method
Know H.323 Conference Scheduling Flow Duration
Master HD terminal Roles and Product Lines
5 working days, including Hands-on exercise
Master HD terminal Basic Work Principle
2 working days
Master HD terminal Functions and Features
Class Size
Master HD terminal Hardware Interfaces
Master MCU Roles and Product Lines Min 6, Max 12
Master MCU Basic Work Principle
3.6.2 HCNP-VC Training
Training Path Technology

Know Basic Concepts of Video Codec and their
HCNP-VC-IHVCP Huawei Video Conference
Protocol Differences.
Lecture, Hands-on Know Common Video Codec Streams, RTP

OVCX2 3d
exercise Packetization Formats, and SDP Descriptions
Understand the Concept and Structure of the
HCNP-VC IHVP Implementing Huawei Integrated Videoconferencing System
Advanced Video Conference System
Know Components of Videoconferencing Room
OVCC3 Lecture, Hands-on 5d Understand Installation Skills of Different
exercise
Videoconferencing Rooms
Target Audience Know Advanced Features 9000 and TE Series

Master Maintenance and Fault Diagnosis
Those who hope to become a video
Understand Basic Concept and Work Principle of
conference professional
MCU
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-VC
Know Application Scenarios and Use Methods of
Prerequisites Advanced Features of MCU
A general familiarity with PC operation system Know Basic troubleshooting Methods of MCU
Understand Basic Concepts and Work Principle
of SMC Platform
Objectives
Advanced Features of SMC Platform
On completion of this program, the Be Familiar with Basic Fault Location Methods
participants will be able to: on SMC Platform
Understand Wireshark interface Master Diagnostic Functions Provided by the
Know about Wireshark basic operations Network Diagnostician
Know basics of the H.323 protocol Master Network Statistics Query Using NLog
Know Signaling Process of Conference Master Basic Approaches to Troubleshooting
Scheduling Videoconferencing System
Know How to Troubleshoot Common Faults Master How to Troubleshoot Terminals
Understand the Usage SIP Master How to Troubleshoot Service
Know Signaling Process of SIP Messages Management Center (SMC)
Understand Common SIP Call Process and SDP Master How to Troubleshoot Multipoint Control
Negotiation Process Units (MCUs)
Learn the Basic Principles of RTP and RTCP Understand Basic Concepts and Functions of
Master the Application of RTP and RTCP Firewall
Know common audio encoding algorithms and Master Problems and Solutions of Video
their differences Services under Firewall
Learn audio-related technologies Master Typical Problems and Positioning Method
Understand the Video Image Processing of Video Services under Firewall

Duration Class Size
8 working days, including Hands-on exercise Min 6, Max 12

3 working days
3.7 IVS Specialist Certification Training
3.7.1 HCS-Field-IVS Training
Training Path Know how to add a camera to the IVS platform

Have basic understanding on the rights system
Basic knowledge of video surveillance system Configure roles and users
VS01 Lecture 0.5d Configure the recording system

Use the recording function
Know the structure of the alarm system
Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and Know the operation process of the alarm system
advanced maintenance training Deploy the eSpace IVS alarm system
VS03 Lecture, Hands-on 2.5d Know eSpace IVS's central devices
exercise
Know how to log in to and operate the decoder
Know the common troubleshooting methods
Target Audience
Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases
Administrators Know Huawei IPC Series Products
Operators and Maintainers Describe hardware features of Huawei video
Prerequisites surveillance IP cameras (IPCs)
Know IPC Fittings Familarize with Huawei IPC
web management pages
Know how to perform basic operations on IPC
Objectives
web pages
On completion of this program, the Know the basic troubleshooting procedures
participants will be able to: Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases
Know video surveillance systems at different Know FAQs
development stages Duration
Know typical video surveillance solutions
3 working daysincluding hands-on exercise
Describe video surveillance development
1working days
Know Huawei's VCN3000
Class Size
Know the architecture of Huaweis IVS Platform
Know typical networking modes Min 6, Max 12
Know how to use the basic functions of eSpace
IVS
3.8 Huawei eSpace IPT System Training
3.8.1 Huawei eSpace IPT System Configuration and Operation Training
Training Path Describe the U1900 system function and feature

Describe the U1900 system maintenance
U1900 System Introduction method
OUC11 Lecture 0.5 d Describe the U1900 system technical

specifications
Describe the concepts of prefix, office route,
U1900 System Configuration office route selection code
OUC12 Lecture, Hands-on 3d Perform U1900 system operation

exercise Describe the configuration ways to U1900
system
IAD Introduction and Installation Perform U1900 system user configuration
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d Perform U1900 system trunk configuration

exercise Perform U1900 system service configuration
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and Describe IAD function and feature
Configuration
Describe the classification of IAD
OUC53 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d Describe the module of IAD
exercise
Describe IAD technical specification
U1900 System Maintenance and Describe IAD Power-Off/Network Interruption
Troubleshooting
survival
OUC14 Lecture, Demonstration 0.5d
Perform the IAD installation
Target Audience Describe the difference between IP phone and

traditional phone
Operators and Maintainers Describe the IP phone function and feature
Prerequisites Perform the IP phone installation
A general familiarity with PC operation Perform the IP phone upgrade
system Perform the IP phone operation

A general familiarity with network Perform the IP phone configuration
knowledge Describe the contents of the routine
A general familiarity with communication maintenance
theory Perform the system maintenance of eSpace
A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge U1900
Objectives Upgrade U1900
Diagnose the common faulty cases
Perform troubleshooting of U1900
Duration
Describe U1900 system positioning
Describe the U1900 system composition 5 working days, including hands-on exercise
Describe the hardware structure of U1900 2.5 working days
system
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
3.8.2 Huawei eSpace IPT System Troubleshooting Training
Training Path A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge

A general familiarity with U1900 system
UC Signaling and Protocols Objectives
OUC03 Lecture 0.5 d
U1900 System Architecture Know analog voice fundaments
Know digital voice fundamentals
OUC15 Lecture 0.5 d
Know signaling and protocols in VoIP network
Describe U1900 Hardware Structure and
U1900 Terminal Registration Faults
Components
Describe U1900 Software Architecture and
OUC16 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5 d
exercise Modules
Analyze U1900 Call Process and Faults
U1900 Call Faults
Identify IP phone registration faults
OUC17 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5 d Describe IP phone registration process

exercise Explain registration information
Target Audience Handle registration faults
Operators and Maintainers Describe U1900 call troubleshooting process
Prerequisites Handle routine call faults

Duration
A general familiarity with PC operation
system 2 working days, including hands-on exercise
A general familiarity with network 0.5 working day
knowledge Class Size
A general familiarity with communication
theory Min 6, max 12
3.9 Huawei eSpace UC System Training
3.9.1 Huawei eSpace UC System Configuration and Operation Training

UC System Introduction
Prerequisites
OUC71 Lecture 0.5 d
A general familiarity with network knowledge
U1900 System Introduction A general familiarity with communication theory
A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
OUC11 Lecture 0.5 d
Objectives

U1900 System Configuration
OUC1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d Describe the UC system solution
2 Describe the UC system function
Describe the classification of UC system
UC System Configuration
Describe the UC system capacity
OUC7 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d Describe the UC system network architecture
2 Describe U1900 system positioning
Describe the U1900 system composition
AR Voice System Configuration
Describe the hardware structure of U1900
system
OUC42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d
Describe the U1900 system function and feature
Describe the U1900 system maintenance
IAD Configuration and Maintenance
method
Describe the U1900 system technical
OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5 d
specifications
Describe the concepts of prefix, office route,
IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and office route selection code
Configuration
Perform U1900 system operation
OUC5 Lecture, Hands-on exercise0.5 d
3 Describe the configuration ways to U1900
system
eSpace Desktop Routine Operation Perform U1900 system user configuration
Perform U1900 system trunk configuration
OUC5 Lecture, Hands-on exercise0.5 d
Perform U1900 system service configuration
5
Describe the UC system solution
UC System Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Describe the UC system function
Describe the classification of UC system
OUC73 Lecture, Hands-on exercise0.5d
Describe the UC system capacity
Describe the UC system network
architecture Perform eSpace Desktop routine operation
Describe the concepts on voice-featured AR Perform eSpace Desktop common setting
Perform basic configuration on voice-featured List UC system maintenance methods
AR Perform UC system maintenance
Describe the configuration methods of IAD Perform UC system troubleshooting
Perform the IAD configuration Duration
Perform the IAD maintenance
8 working days, including hands-on exercise
Perform the IAD security maintenance
3.5 working days
Describe the difference between IP phone and
traditional phone
Class Size
Describe the IP phone function and feature Min 6, max 12

Perform the IP phone installation
Perform the IP phone upgrade
Perform the IP phone operation
Perform the IP phone configuration
3.10 CC General Training Programs
3.10.1 Contact Center Management and Monitoring Training

Describe eSpace CC concepts
eSpace CC Solution Introduction Describe eSpace CC system architecture
Describe eSpace CC AEP function
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d
Describe eSpace CC multimedia features
Describe eSpace CC report function
eSpace CC Agent Service Commissioning Describe eSpace CC monitoring function

Describe eSpace CC agent function
OCC22 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Get familiar with U2980
exercise
LMT/WAS/Agent/CMS/BIR management page.
Understand basic principles of the agent service.
eSpace CC Report Service Commissioning Get familiar with interworking configuration.
OCC31 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d Be skilled in agent service configuration.

exercise Learn about basic principles of the IVR service.
eSpace CC Monitoring and Inspection Describe report typical configuration
Service Commissioning
Implement Datastation installation configuration
OCC41 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d
exercise Implement BIR installation configuration
Describe report secondary development principle
Understand the basic concepts and functions of
eSpace CC Routine Operations
eSpace CMS.
OCC51 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d Know the component relationships and service
exercise processes of eSpace CMS.
Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
Target Audience
monitoring and inspection services.
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Configuration administrator routine operations.
Operators and Maintainers Operation administrator routine operations.
Service Managers Service manager routine operations.
Managers Inspector routine operations.
A general familiarity with PC operation system 3 working days, including hands-on exercise
Computer basics 1.25 working days
On completion of this program, the Min 6, max 12

3.11 CC Contact Center Operation and Maintenance Training
3.11.1 Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation

Training
Training Path
eSpace CC System Maintenance
eSpace CC Solution OCC24 Lecture, Hands-on 1d

Introduction exercise
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
eSpace CC Gateway Service Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Commissioning Operators and Maintainers
OCC11 Lecture+, Hands-on 1.5d
Prerequisites
exercise
eSpace CC Agent Service Computer basics
Commissioning Objectives
OCC22 Lecture, Hands-on 1d
exercise On completion of this program, the
eSpace CC Voice IVR Commissioning
Describe eSpace CC system architecture
OCC23 Lecture+, Hands-on 1d
exercise Describe eSpace CC AEP function
eSpace CC Report Service Commissioning
Describe eSpace CC monitoring function
OCC31 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Describe eSpace CC agent function
exercise
Get familiar with U2980 LMT management page.
Get familiar with WAS platform management and
eSpace CC Monitoring and Inspection operation page.
Service Commissioning
Get familiar with Agent management and
exercise operation page.
Get familiar with CMS platform management and
operation page.
eSpace CC Routine Operations
Get familiar with BIR platform management and
OCC51 Lecture, Hands-on 1d operation page.
exercise Describe U2900 series gateway system
structure and function
Describe U2900 series gateway hardware
structure
Describe U2900 series gateway software Understand the basic concepts and functions of
structure eSpace CMS.
Describe U2900 series gateway interfaces and Know the component relationships and service
protocols processes of eSpace CMS.
Describe U2900 series gateway function and Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
specification monitoring and inspection services.
Analyze U2900 series gateway networking Configuration administrator routine operations.
Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link, Operation administrator routine operations.
trunk circuit Service manager routine operations.
Implement U2900 series gateway basic Inspector routine operations.
operation Agent routine operations.
Implement U2900 series gateway device data Routine maintenance of the eSpace CC system.
configuration Methods for collecting logs for the eSpace CC
Implement U2900 series gateway office data system.
configuration Sequence for powering on the eSpace CC
Implement U2900 series gateway service data components upon power outage and methods for
configuration restarting the eSpace CC services.
Understand basic principles of the agent service. eSpace CC backup scenarios and policies
Get familiar with interworking configuration. Methods for changing passwords for users in the
Be skilled in agent service configuration. eSpace CC system.
Learn about basic principles of the IVR service. Duration
8 working day, including hands-on exercise 4
Describe report typical configuration
working day
Implement Datastation installation configuration
Class Size
Implement BIR installation configuration
Describe report secondary development principle Min 6, max 12
3.11.2 Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and
Operation Training (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation) Training
Training Path
eSpace CC System Maintenance
eSpace CC Solution OCC24 Lecture, Hands-on 1d

Introduction exercise
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

eSpace CC Gateway Service Operators and Maintainers
Commissioning Prerequisites
OCC11 Lecture+, Hands-on 1.5d
exercise
Computer basics
eSpace CC Agent Service
Objectives
Commissioning
OCC22 Lecture, Hands-on 1d On completion of this program, the
exercise
Describe enterprise communication concepts
eSpace CC Voice IVR Commissioning Describe eSpace CC concepts
OCC23 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Describe eSpace CC system architecture

exercise Describe eSpace CC AEP function
eSpace CC Report Service Describe eSpace CC report function
Commissioning Describe eSpace CC monitoring function

exercise Describe eSpace CC agent function
Get familiar with U2980 LMT management page.
eSpace CC Monitoring and Inspection Get familiar with WAS platform management and
Service Commissioning operation page.
OCC41 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Get familiar with Agent management and
Get familiar with CMS platform management and
eSpace CC Routine Operations operation page.
Get familiar with BIR platform management and
Describe U2900 series gateway system structure
eSpace CC Multimedia Technology and function
Service Commissioning Describe U2900 series gateway hardware
OCC61 Lecture, Hands-on 2d structure
exercise Describe U2900 series gateway software
structure
Describe U2900 series gateway interfaces and
protocols Operation administrator routine operations.
Describe U2900 series gateway function and Service manager routine operations.
specification Inspector routine operations.
Analyze U2900 series gateway networking Agent routine operations.
Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link, Describe Huawei WECC application scenario
trunk circuit Describe Huawei Email call scenario
Implement U2900 series gateway basic operation Describe Huawei Fax call scenario
Implement U2900 series gateway device data Describe Huawei SMS call scenario
configuration Implement text chat service configuration
Implement U2900 series gateway office data Implement click to dial service configuration
configuration
Implement call back request service configuration
Implement U2900 series gateway service data
Implement escorted browsing service
configuration
configuration
Understand basic principles of the agent service.
Routine maintenance of the eSpace CC system.
Get familiar with interworking configuration.
Methods for collecting logs for the eSpace CC
Be skilled in agent service configuration. system.
Learn about basic principles of the IVR service. Sequence for powering on the eSpace CC
Be skilled at IVR service configuration. components upon power outage and methods for
Describe report typical configuration restarting the eSpace CC services.
Implement Datastation installation configuration eSpace CC backup scenarios and policies.
Implement BIR installation configuration Methods for changing passwords for users in the
Describe report secondary development principle eSpace CC system.
Understand the basic concepts and functions of Duration
eSpace CMS.
10 working day, including hands-on exercise
Know the component relationships and service
5 working day
processes of eSpace CMS.
Class Size
Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
monitoring and inspection services. Min 6, max 12
Configuration administrator routine operations.
3.12 eSpace VTM System Training
3.12.1 eSpace VTM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe eSpace CC system architecture

Describe eSpace CC AEP function
eSpace CC Solution Introduction
Describe eSpace CC outbound function
OCC01 Lecture 0.5d
Describe eSpace CC QC function
Describe eSpace CC monitoring function
eSpace CC Gateway Service Commissioning Describe eSpace CC agent function

Describe U2900 series gateway system
OCC11Lecture+, Hands-on exercise 1.5d
structure and function
Describe U2900 series gateway hardware
structure
eSpace VTM Solution and Composing
Describe U2900 series gateway software
Principle
Lecture structure
OCCB1 1d
Describe U2900 series gateway interfaces and
protocols
eSpace VTM system Installation and Describe U2900 series gateway function and
Commissioning specification
OCCB2 Lecture, hands-on 2d Analyze U2900 series gateway networking
exercise Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,
trunk circuit
eSpace VTM system operation Master eSapce VTM Solution and product
orientation
OCCB3 Lecture, hands-on 1d
Know eSpace VTM functions and features
exercise
Know eSpace VTM functional unit
Master eSpace VTM assemblies function and
eSpace VTM system maintenance
principle
OCCB4 Lecture, hands-on 1d Master eSpace VTM assemblies network
exercise connection
Know the message handing flow of eSpace VTM
Target Audience signal, data and files.
Operators and maintainers Master eSpace VTM system installation logic
Service managers Master eSpace VTM system assemblies

installation and configuration
Prerequisites
Master eSpace VTM system assemblies
Communication basic knowledge connection and configuration
Contact Center Fundamental knowledge Know eSpace VTM system service
Objectives commissioning
Master the main work content and operation for
Describe enterprise communication concepts
system administrator in different scenario
Master the main work content and operation for recovery principle and strategy
quality inspector in different scenario Duration
Master the main work content and operation for
counter in different scenario 7 working days, including hands-on exercise
Master eSpace VTM system daily maintenance 2 working days
Master eSpace VTM reboot flow when power off Class Size
Master eSpace VTM system and user password
Min 6, max 12
setttings
Master eSpace VTM system back-up and
3.13 VC Operation and Maintenance Training
3.13.1 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC/RSE) Operation and

Training Path Describe Huawei Video Conference System

Overview
Video Conference System Overview Describe Huawei video conference technology
innovation
OVC01 Lecture 0.5d
Describe Huawei video conference solution
Describe H.323 protocol structure
Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
H.323 Protocol Master video conference schedule signaling
flow
OVC03 Lecture 0.5d
Learn HD Terminal product positioning, product
specifications
Master HD Terminal product features
HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance
Know the Hardware Structure of HD Terminal
OVC11/12/13 Lecture, Hands-on 1.d Know the installation and initial configuration of
HD Terminal
Know the operation of remote controller of HD
MCU Operation and Maintenance Terminal

Know the maintenance and diagnostics of HD
OVC21/22 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Terminal
Know how to upgrade the software of HD
Terminal
SMC Operation and Maintenance Know MCU structure composing
Know MCU basic feature
OVC31/32 Lecture, Hands-on 1d
Know MCU boards and daughter boards
Master MCU Web basic configuration
Master MCU outside GK scenario conference
RSE Operation and Maintenance
configuration
OVC51 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference
configuration
Know MCU Web advanced settings
Target Audience Master MCU software upgrade
Master MCU fault disposal flow
Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
Administrators
Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
Prerequisites Know SMC2.0definition
Know video conference communication basic Describe SMC2.0 functions of Huawei video
knowledge conference
Know video conference development process Master SMC2.0 system structure
and trend Master SMC2.0 system main function

Master SMC2.0 routine operation
Master SMC2.0 routine Maintenance Master Basic Operation of Recording System
Master SMC2.0 routine fault and exclude Know Typical Network of Recording System
methods Duration
Master SMC2.0 conference schedule
Master SMC2.0 conference control 5 working days, including Hands-on
Master SMC2.0 routine Maintenance exercise 2 working days
Master SMC2.0 routine fault disposal Class Size
Know Product Forms, Performance
Min 6, Max 12
Specifications of Recording Server
3.13.2 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation
Training Path Know the Advanced Features of the VP 9000

and TE series
SIP Protocol
Master the Maintenance and Fault Diagnosis
Lecture, Hands-on Understand Basic Concept and Working

OVC04 1d
exercise Principle of MCU
Advanced Features of MCU
Video Conference System-Advanced
Know Basic Troubleshooting Methods for MCU
OVC0A Lecture, Hands-on 4d Understand Basic Concepts and Working
exercise
Principle of SMC Platform
Know Application Scenarios and Usage Methods
Target Audience
of Advanced Features of SMC Platform
Monitoring Staffs Be Familiar with Basic Fault Location Methods
Operators and Maintainers on SMC Platform
Administrators Master Diagnostic Functions Provided by the
Planners and Designers Network Diagnostician
Prerequisites Master Network Statistics Query Using NLog
Master Basic Approaches to Troubleshooting
Videoconferencing System
Master How to Troubleshoot Terminals
Master How to Troubleshoot Service
Objectives Management Center (SMC)
On completion of this program, the Master How to Troubleshoot Multipoint Control
participants will be able to: Units (MCUs)
Understand the Usage of SIP Understand Basic Concepts and Functions of

Firewall
Understand SIP Commands
Master Problems and Solutions of Video
Know the Signaling Process of SIP Messages
Services under Firewall
Know Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Master Typical Problems and Positioning Method
Understand Common SIP Call Process and SDP
of Video Services under Firewall
Negotiation Process
Understand the Concept and Structure of the
Duration
Integrated Videoconferencing System 5 working days, including Hands-on exercise
Know Components of a Videoconferencing 1.25 working days
Room
Class Size
Understand Installation Skills of Different
Videoconferencing Rooms Min 6, Max 12
3.13.3 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
TP/RP Product Introduction
OVC41 Lecture 0.25d
TP/RP Routine Operation and

Maintenance
OVC42 Lecture, Hands-on 1.75d
Target Audience

Administrators
Prerequisites

Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Know Huawei telepresence basic feature
Know Huawei telepresence development and tend
Know Huawei telepresence series product
Know Huawei telepresence product principle
Know Huawei telepresence product structure
Describe Huawei telepresence application scenarios
Master Huawei telepresence conference operation
Master Huawei telepresence conference control operation
Master Huawei telepresence conference troubleshooting
Know Huawei telepresence series product software upgrade
Know telepresence product fault classification
Master telepresence product troubleshooting methods
Describe telepresence product troubleshooting cases
Duration
2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.25 working days

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
3.14 Huawei eSpace IVS System Training
3.14.1 Huawei IVS System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path know how to configure and operate IVS system

via OMU Portal
Basic knowledge of video surveillance system Know how to use the basic functions of eSpace
IVS
OVS01 Lecture 0.5d
Know how to add a camera to the IVS platform
Have basic understanding on the rights system
Huawei IVS System Operation and Configure roles and users
Maintenance Training Configure the recording system

OVS03 Lecture, Hands-on 4.5d Use the recording function
exercise
Know the structure of the alarm system
Know the operation process of the alarm system
Target Audience
Deploy the eSpace IVS alarm system
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Know eSpace IVS's central devices
Operators and Maintainers Know how to log in to and operate the decoder
Prerequisites Know the common troubleshooting methods
Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases
Know the classification, structure, and fittings of
cameras
A basic understanding of Huawei eSpace IVS
Know common image processing technologies
system primary daily operation and maintenance
employed by cameras
Objectives
Know how to select appropriate cameras
On completion of this program, the Know Huawei IPC Series Products
participants will be able to: Describe hardware features of Huawei video
Know video surveillance systems at different surveillance IP cameras (IPCs)
development stages Know IPC Fittings
Know typical video surveillance solutions Describe hardware features of Huawei video
Describe video surveillance development surveillance IP cameras (IPCs).
Know Huawei's VCN3000 Know how to install various types of IPCs
Know the architecture of Huaweis IVS Platform Familarize with Huawei IPC web management
Know typical networking modes pages
Master typical service processes. Know how to perform basic operations on IPC
Know the relationship between VCN3000 web pages
internal interfaces. Know the basic troubleshooting procedures
Know the relationship between VCN3000 Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases
external interfaces. Know FAQs
Know how to install VCN3000 hardware. Duration

Know the process of installing the VMU two-
5working daysincluding hands-on exercise
node cluster
2 working days
Know the OMU Web management system
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
3.14.2 VCM Intelligent Analysis System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Know VCM network system

Know VCM basic functions and application
Basic knowledge of VCM Intelligent scenarios
Analysis System Know network planning of VCM system
OVS04 Lecture 0.5d
Master VCM system installation steps
Know VCM system
VCM Intelligent Analysis System Know VCM login note
Deployment and Management Describe the configuration process of VCM
OVS05 Lecture, Hands-on 2.5d system
exercise
Know VCM system configuration
Master VCM system handling operation
Target Audience
Know the VCM management system operation
Installers and Commissioning Staffs Master VCM system inspection function
Operators and Maintainers Master VCM system troubleshooting
Prerequisites Know each module in VCM log system
Duration
A basic understanding of computer technology 3 working daysincluding hands-on exercise
Objectives 1 working days
Class Size
Know basic knowledge of VCM products
3.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight-UCC Training
3.15.1 eSight-UCC Operation and Maintenance Training
Describe about physical resource

Training Path
management functions
Use link resource management functions
eSight Enterprise NMS Operation and
Maintenance Use electronic label management features
ONM11 Lecture, Hands-on 2d Use about NE Explorer

exercise Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Target Audience Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Describes the remote alarm notification
Monitoring Staffs
procedure
Administrators
Describes the basic concepts of performance
Prerequisites management
Describes the performance monitoring process
Describes the ways to browsing performance
monitoring data
Describe the flow of backing up NE
Objectives configuration files
Describe common operations for managing NE
configuration files
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
Describe the basic concepts of network
files
management
Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing
Describe the network management functions
up parameters
Describe the network management component
Describe an overview of the functions provided
Describe the enterprise network overview
by the smart configuration tool
Describe the basic functions of eSight
Describe the networking mode of eSight
template
system
Describe eSight related indicators
plan sheet
Describe the installation profile
Describe the functions of Deployment record
Master the eSight installation and uninstall
management
steps
Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
Master eSight license function and application
Describe querying logs
Describe the user authority control and
Describe Lower-Layer NMS
managed domain management of eSight
Describe licenses management
Describe topology management
Describe backing up and restoring the
Describe the steps of accessing a resource
231
database exercise 1 working day

Describe NE packages management
Class Size
Duration
Min 6, Max 12
2 working daysincluding hands-on
232
3.15.2 eSight-UCC UC Business Management Training
eSight-UCC UC Business On completion of this program, the

Management participants will be able to:
OUC81 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d Understand basic UC device management
exercise functions supported by the eSight
Target Audience Understand simple processes of managing UC

devices on the eSight
Monitoring Staffs Duration
Administrators 0.5 working daysincluding hands-on
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system Class Size

233
3.15.3 eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management Training

Understand the telepresence configuration
query and conference diagnosis features
eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management
Master the procedure for telepresence
OUC81 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d configuration query
exercise Master the procedures for SMC configuration
Target Audience and diagnosis before and during a conference
Understand that eSight, routers, telepresence
devices, and telepresence SMC must work
Monitoring Staffs
together to enable telepresence conference
Administrators
diagnosis
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working daysincluding hands-on
Objectives
Class Size
234
3.15.4 eSight-UCC IVS Business Management Training
Training Path
eSight-UCC IVS Business Management
OVS11 Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d

exercise
Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites

Objectives

Have a basic knowledge of configuration
management, service tracing, and data
analysis in video surveillance
Know how to perform video surveillance
operation and maintenance (O&M)
management operations
Know how to use the configuration
management, service tracing, and data
analysis functions in video surveillance
Duration
0.5 working daysincluding hands-on

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
235
Training Programs
236
Training Programs
4 Enterprise IT Training Courses
4.1 Training Path
4.1.1 Storage Career Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-Storage-CUSN HCNP-Storage-CBDS HCNP-Storage-CDPS

Professional Constructing Unified Constructing Big Data Constructing Data
Storage Network 5d Solution 5d Protection System 5d
HCNA-Storage-BSSN
Associate Building the Structure of
Storage Network 5d
Elective Guide
Follow the path to learn.
237
Training Programs
4.1.2 Cloud Computing Certification Training Path
Expert
HCNP-Cloud-FCDC HCNP-Cloud-FCDS
HCNP-Cloud-BDAP
FusionCloud DataCenter FusionCloud Desktop
Professional Building Big Data
Solution Solution 3d
3d 3d Analysis Platform
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP
Associate Building Cloud Computing
Platform 5d
Elective Guide
Follow the path to learn
238
Training Programs
4.1.3 Server Specialist Certification Training Path

Server Specialist Certification
Training Programs
3d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include RH V2/V3 series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.
Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.
239
Training Programs
4.1.4 Data Center Specialist Certification Training Path

Training Training
Enterprise Data Center Network HCS-Field-MicroDC Training
Design Training
2d 1d
Enterprise Data Center Security

Design Training
1d
Enterprise Data Center Disaster

Recovery and Backup Design
Training 2d
Technology IP Technology Foundation Firewall Technology Foundation Storage Technology

Foundation Training (Fast-Track) Training (In13 Security Foundation Training
Training (In 13 IP Programs) 3d Programs) 2d 1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include Data Center Solution products trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: Micro DC solution and large-scale data center solutions.
Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.
240
Training Programs
4.1.5 Unified Storage Training Path

Training Training
OceanStor Unified Storage T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/ OceanStor Unified Storage
System Design Training 68T)Storage Array Deployment and System Advanced Feature
1d Management Training 1d
4d
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)
2d
T SeriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T)
Storage System Deployment and
Management Training
4d
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end

Storage System Deployment and
Management Training 4d
SNS Series (SNS2124/SNS2224/

SNS2248) FC Switch Product
Deployment and Management Training
1d
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage

System Deployment and
VIS6000T Series Virtual

Storage Gateway System
Deployment and Management
3d
Training
V3 series(53/55/56/58/68/69)Storage
System Deployment and Management
Training 5d
Huawei Storage System

Troubleshooting Training
2d
Storage Technology Storage Fundamental

Foundation Training Technology Training
1d
Elective Guide
241
Training Programs
The training programs in the path include T series storage array OceanStor 18500/18800, SNS, Dorado, VIS6000T
products and technologies trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: centralized storage, backup, storage virtualization, disaster
recovery, cloud computing storage infrastructure and data center storage infrastructure.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
242
Training Programs
4.1.6 Massive Storage Training Path

Training Training
Enterprise Big Data Storage OceanStor 9000 Storage System Big Data Storage Advanced
Deployment and Management Technology Training
Design Training
1d Training 3d 1d
N8500V2 Clustered NAS

System Deployment and
Technology Foundation Storage Fundamental

Technology Training
Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include OceanStor 9000, N8500, VTL6900 and HDP3500E products and
technologies trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: file sharing, file-level data centralized storage and
management, unstructured data backup and management, file-level DST, file system backup and disaster recovery.
243
Training Programs
4.1.7 Server Products Training Path

RH V2 Series Rack Server
Training 1d
RH V3 Series Rack Server

Training 1d
X6000 Series Server

Training 1d
E6000 Series Blade Server

Training 1d
E9000 Series Blade Server

Training 1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include RH V2/V3 series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.
244
Training Programs
4.1.8 Cloud Computing Training Path

Training Training
Desktop Cloud Solution(R5)
3d
FusionCube Solution Deployment

and Management Training
2d
FusionInsight Solution
Training 1d
FusionShpere[R3 or R5]
Solution Deployment and
Management Training 2d/3d
Technology Foundation
Training
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include, FusionSphere Solution, Desktop Cloud Solution, FusionCube and
FusionInsight trainings.
FusionCube and Desktop Cloud solution need FusionSphere knowledge. Its suggested to sale these two training
solution together. If customers are familiar with FusionSphere already, they can buy the need courses only.
245
Training Programs
4.1.9 IT Network Management Training

Training Training
Enterprise Network Management
eSight-IT O&M Training
1 day
Technology
Foundation Training
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include eSight V3R2 product technologies trainings.
The training programs cover the following scenarios: data center IT equipments management.
Operators and Maintainers are proposed to learn the operation and maintenance training programs.
246
Training Programs
4.1.10 Disaster Recovery and Backup Training Path

Training Training
OceanStor Backup Solution Training
Disaster Recovery and Backup Disaster Recovery and Backup
Design Training Advanced Technology Training
1d Training
4d 1d
Business Continuity and Disaster

Recovery Solution Deployment
and Management Training 3d
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library

System Introduction
3d
Storage Technology Storage Technology Foundation

Foundation Training Training
1d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include VTL6900/OceanStor Backup Solution/ Business Continuity and Disaster
Recovery Solution
OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and Management Training2 type of scenes
Disk-DiskFilesystem Backup/Oracle RAC Backup/VMware Backup
Disk-VTLOracle Database Backup
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution Deployment and Management TrainingActive-
Passive/Active-Active/3DC
Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology TrainingDisaster Recovery and Backup Key
technology/Feature and network
Disaster Recovery and Backup Design TrainingDisaster Recovery and Backup Plan/Design/method
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System IntroductionVTL6900 is required in Disk-VTL backup scenethis course
introduces knowledge of VTL product
Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation,
operation and maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively
247
Training Programs
Duration Training
Training Programs Level (working Location
Class
Size
days) (Proposed)
Storage Career Certification Training
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage 5 6~12

Network Training
HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage 3 6~12

Network Training(Fast-Track , For channel )
HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage 5 6~12

Network Training
HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution 5 6~12

Training
HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection 5 6~12

System Training
Cloud Computing Career Certification Training
HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing 5 6~12

Platform Training
HCNP-Cloud-FCDC FusionCloud DataCenter Solution 3 6~12

Training
HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Building Big Data Analysis 3 6~12

Platform Training
HCNP-Cloud-FCDS FusionCloud Desktop Solution 3 6~12

Training
Server Specialist Certification Training
HCS-Field-Server Training 3 6~12
Data Center Specialist Certification Training
HCS-Field-MicroDC Training 1 6~12
IT Fundamental Training
Storage Fundamental Technology Training 1 6~12
IT Advanced Training
OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced Feature 6~12

1
Training
248
Training Programs
OceanStor Unified Storage System Design Training 1 6~12
Big Data Storage Advanced Technology Training 1 6~12
Big Data Storage Design Training 1 6~12
Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology 6~12

1
Training
Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training 1 6~12
Unified Storage Training
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage 6~12

4
System and Management Training
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage 6~12

System Deployment and Management Training (Fast- 2
Track , For channel )
T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System 6~12

4
OceanStor V3 Storage System Deployment and 6~12

5
Management Training
OceanStor18500/18800 High-end Storage System 6~12

4
SNS Series(SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch 6~12

1
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System 6~12

2
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System 6~12

3
Huawei Storage System Troubleshooting Training 2 6~12
Massive Storage Training
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and 6~12

3
Management Training
N8500 V2 Cluster NAS System Deployment and 6~12

3
Management Training
Data Protection Training
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and 6~12

3
Management Training
249
Training Programs
Server Training
RH V2 Series Rack Server Deployment and 6~12

1
Management Training
RH V3 Series Rack Server Deployment and 6~12

1
Management Training
X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management 6~12

1
Training
E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and 6~12

1
Management Training
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server 6~12

1
Huawei Server Troubleshooting Training 2 6~12
Cloud Computing Training
Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and 6~12

3
Management Training
FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management 6~12

2
Training
FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and 6~12

2
Management Training
FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and 6~12

3
Management Training
FusionInsight Solution Deployment and Management 6~12

1
Training
Huawei Cloud Computing System Troubleshooting 6~12

2
Training
IT Network Management Training
Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT Operation 6~12

1
Disaster Recovery and Backup Solution Training
OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and 6~12

4
Management Training
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution 6~12

3
Level Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert
250
Training Programs
Course
Proposed Training Location: If the training delivery will be In China and only contain IT trainings, its
highly recommended to be held in Chengdu city as IT instructor team and the best IT lab locate
there.
251
Training Programs

4.4 Storage Career Certification Training Programs
4.4.1 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training
Training Path key technologies

Understand the basic concepts and structures
HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate- of a NAS system
Building the Structure of Storage Network) Master multipath technology and host
OHC11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo 5d connection basics for both the technology and
Target Audience application
Understand Huawei all series storage product
Those who want to be storage engineer
feature and main application
Those who want to achieve HCNA-Storage
Master SAN storage array product function,
certification hardware, interface, network and typical
Operators application
IT Managers Master storage array and mapping configuration
on ISM
Master SAN storage product routine
Prerequisites maintenance and troubleshooting
Understand the application scenarios and key
Have basic network knowledge
technologies of Backup and Disaster Recovery.
Have basic computer knowledge
Have basic knowledge of Windows/Linux Understand the background and
application scenarios of Big Data.
Objectives Understand the status quo and key
On completion of this program, the technologies of Cloud Computing.

participants will be able to: Duration
Know the basics of storage systems and
5 working days, including 1.5 days of
networks, structures and components
hands-on practice
Understand the basics of RAID concepts,
Class Size
common RAID principles, features and different
RAID application scenarios Min 6, Max 12
Identify the basics of the FC-SAN and IP-SAN
252
Training Programs
4.4.2 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network

Training(Fast-Track , For channel )
Training Path
HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate- Building the

Structure of Storage Network Fast-Track , For channel
OHC11092 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo 3d
Target Audience
Those who want to be storage engineer

Those who have storage background , but dont know Huaweis storage array, and they want to
achieve HCNA-Storage certification
Operators
IT Managers
Prerequisites
Have basic network knowledge

Have basic computer knowledge
Have basic knowledge of Windows/Linux
Have storage background, understand storage basic knowledge,such as RAID,LUN,SAN,NAS, Backup,
Disaster Recovery.
Objectives

Master multipath technology and host connection basics for both the technology and application
Understand Huawei all series storage product feature and main application
Master SAN storage array product function, hardware, interface, network and typical application
Master storage array and mapping configuration on ISM
Master SAN storage product routine maintenance and troubleshooting
Duration
working days ,including 1.5 days for lab

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
253
Training Programs
4.4.3 HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training

Master unified storage structure,
HCNP- CUSN Huawei Certified Network Associate-
component
Constructing Unified Storage Network
Know storage data process and
OHC12091 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, 5d communication protocol, principle and
Demo
Know storage system advanced
Enterprise ICT technology
technology and application
management personal and IT
Know connection and application between
technology personal
storage and mainstream OS platforms
Those who hope to systemically learn
Master storage system fault diagnosis
and master storage technology and
and disposal method
application, build information storage
Understand storage performance factor
and data protection solution ability
and optimization
Maintainers
Master storage system and network
Managers
(SAN) common technology and
Planners and Designers application; master information storage
Prerequisites system and SAN storage solution plan,
deployment, management and
Know server basal knowledge and
maintenance ability
application
Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and
Duration
technology 5 working days
Understand storage system basal
Class Size
operation and technology
254
Training Programs
4.4.4 HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training
HCNP-CBDS Huawei Certified Network Professional- On completion of this program, the

Constructing Big Data Solution participants will be able to:
OHC12092 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo 5d Be familiar with Big Data concept,
Target Audience development and key technology
Be familiar with Big Data Storage solution
Enterprise ICT technology management architecture and technology: distributed
personal and IT technology personal Storage, clustered NAS,DST, load
Those who hope to systemically learn and balancing , quota, connection, file system
master storage technology and snapshot, mirror and replication technology
application, build information storage and Command Big Data Storage OceanStor9000
data protection solution ability Maintainers architecture, network planning, deployment,
Managers operation and management
Planners and Designers Command Big Data Storage troubleshooting
Prerequisites Command Big Data Storage solution
planning programming
Know server basal knowledge and
Duration
application
Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology 5 working days
Understand main OS and DB operation and Class Size
technology
Min 6, Max 12
255
Training Programs
4.4.5 HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training
HCNP-CDPS Huawei Certified Network On completion of this program, the

Professional- Constructing Data Protection System participants will be able to:
OHC12093Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo 5d Be familiar with backup and recovery system
Target Audience architecture, backup component, backup media,

Backup mode and strategy
Enterprise ICT technology management Be familiar with backup network, backup and
personal and IT technology personal recovery technology and application
Those who hope to systemically learn and Know DR solution, especially the cloud disaster
master storage technology and application, technology and application scenario
build information storage and data protection Command backup system troubleshooting
solution ability Maintainers Command backup DR technology and
Managers application, master backup and recovery system
Planners and Designers and data protection solution plan, deployment
Prerequisites and management
Duration
Know server basal knowledge and application
Know SAN,NAS concept and technology 5 working days
Understand mainstream database system basal Class Size
operation and technology
Min 6, Max 12
256
Training Programs
4.5 Cloud Computing Career Certification Training Programs
4.5.1 HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training
Training Path Be familiar with basic knowledge of

FusionStorage solution
HCNA-BCCP Huawei Certified Network
Associate-Building Cloud Computing Platform Describe the hardware structure of Huawei Cloud
Computing solution
OHC11 Lecture, hands-on exercise 5d
Be familiar with basic knowledge of Huawei
Target Audience server
Those who hope to become Cloud
storage
Computing engineers
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-Cloud
switch
certificate
Be familiar with basic knowledge of Huawei TC
devices
Administrators
Master the typical hardware deployment mode of
Planners and designers
Huawei Cloud Computing solution
Prerequisites
Describe the function of FusionCompute
Be familiar with basic knowledge of network Be familiar with the structure of FusionCompute
Be familiar with basic knowledge of server Master the features of FusionCompute
Be familiar with basic knowledge of storage Describe the function of FusionManager
Objectives Be familiar with the structure of FusionManager

Master the features of FusionManager
Be familiar with the structure and function of
FusionAccess
Describe the basic concept of Cloud Computing
Master the service process of FusionAccess
Describe the deployment and business mode of
Describe the features of FusionAccess
Cloud Computing
Be familiar with the structure of FusionInsight
Describe the values and applications of Cloud
Master the function of FusionInsight
Computing
Describe the deployment of Huawei Cloud
Describe the strategy of Huawei Cloud
Computing solution
Computing
Describe the design of Huawei Cloud Computing
Be familiar with computing virtualization
solution
technology
Master the configuration of Huawei Cloud
Be familiar with storage virtualization technology
Computing hardware
Be familiar with network virtualization technology
Be familiar with basic knowledge of
Computing software
FusionSphere solution
Be familiar with basic knowledge of FusionCube
Computing service
solution
Duration
Be familiar with basic knowledge of
FusionAccess solution 5 working days
257
Training Programs
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
258
Training Programs
4.5.2 HCNP-Cloud-FCDC FusionCloud DataCenter Solution Training

Familiar with Cloud OS Concept and Main
HCNP-Cloud- FCDC Huawei Certified
Network Professional- FusionCloud components
DataCenter Solution
Familiar with Huawei FusionSphere Datacenter
Virtualization Solution
Target Audience Describe the features and theories of
Computing virtualization
Describe the features and theories of Storage
Computing engineers
virtualization
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud
Describe the features and theories of
certificate
Networking virtualization
Know typical devices passthrough thechnology
Administrators
and theory
Master Huawei Private and Hybrid Cloud
Prerequisites
Solution
Be familiar with operation system basic Master Huawei cloud computing troubshooting
knowledge and applications processes and methods
Be familiar with server basic knowledge and Know the processes and methods of cloud
applications project design
Be familiar with network security basic Design Private Cloud solution based on Huawei
knowledge and applications FusionSphere
Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and Duration

applications
3 working days
Be familiar with virtualization basic knowledge
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
259
Training Programs
4.5.3 HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Building Big Data Analysis Platform Training

Describe FusionInsight solution
HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Huawei Certified
Network Professional-Building Big Data Describe FusionInsight HD architecture
Analysis Platform
Describe HDFS component features
Describe MapReduce component features
Target Audience Describe YARN component features
Those who hope to become Cloud Describe Spark component features

Computing engineers Describe Kerberos component features
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud Describe HBase component features
certificate Describe Hive component features
Operators and Maintainers Describe Loader component features
Administrators Describe Flume component features
Planners and designers Describe FusionInsight Manager features
Prerequisites Master the integrated design of FusionInsight

Master the installation and deployment of
Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and
FusionInsight
applications
Master the routine maintenance of
Be familiar with server basic knowledge and
FusionInsight
applications
Duration
Be familiar with network security basic
knowledge and applications 3 working days
Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and Class Size
applications
Min 6, max 12
Objectives
260
Training Programs
4.5.4 HCNP-Cloud-FCDS FusionCloud Desktop Solution Training

Describe FusionCloud Desktop solution
HCNP-Cloud-FCDS Huawei Certified
Network Professional-FusionCloud Desktop Describe the advantage of FusionCloud Desktop
Solution
solution
Describe the architecture of FusionAccess
Target Audience Master the features and theories of
FusionAccess
Computing engineers Master the components and the principle
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud Master AD(Active Directory) features
certificate Master DNS feature
Operators and Maintainers Master DHCP feature
Administrators Familiar with FusionAccess redirection
Planners and designers Master FusionAccess key service process

Familiar with high security of FusionAccess
Prerequisites
Master FusionAccess Deploy process
Be familiar with operation system basic Master the routine maintenance of FusionAccess
knowledge and applications
Master FusionAccess troubshooting processes
Be familiar with server basic knowledge and and methods
applications
Duration
Be familiar with network security basic
knowledge and applications 3 working days
Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and Class Size
applications
Min 6, max 12
Be familiar with virtualization basic knowledge
Objectives
261
Training Programs
4.6 Server Specialist Certification Training Programs
4.6.1 HCS-Field-Server Training
Be familiar with Windows and Linux

Basic Knowledge on Huawei Servers
Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP
OSV71 Lecture 0.3 d Know basic knowledge of server
Objectives
Product Knowledge on Huawei Server On completion of this program, the

OSV72 Lecture 0.7 d Master server basic knowledge
Describe the models, position, main functions
and application scenarios of RH series rack
Huawei Server Site Survey servers, X series high density server, E6000
blade server and E9000 Converged
OSV73 Lecture 0.2d
Infrastructure Blade Server
Master the hardware structure, views and
Hardware Installation and Cable interface of RH series rack servers, X series high
Connection of Huawei Servers density server, E6000 blade server and E9000
OSV74 Lecture 0.2 d Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.

Master Huawei server site survey process and
key points
Huawei Server Configuration and Master the hardware installation and cabling of
Operation RH series rack servers, X series high density
OSV75 Lecture 0.4 d server, E6000 blade server and E9000
Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Master BMC function, management and
Routine Maintenance and
maintenance of RH series rack servers, X series
Troubleshooting for Servers
high density server, E6000 blade server and
OSV76 Lecture 0.2 d
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.
Master RAID plan and configuration of RH series
E9000 Blade Server Product rack servers, X series high density server, E6000
Technology blade server and E9000 Converged
OSV77 Lecture 1d Infrastructure Blade Server.

Master OS installation method of RH series rack
servers, X series high density server, E6000
Target Audience blade server and E9000 Converged
Infrastructure Blade Server.
Master management and operation of MM
Administrators
module of E6000 and E9000 server.
Master management and operation of switch
module of E6000 and E9000 server.
262
Training Programs
Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts of RH series rack servers, X series high density
replacement of RH series rack servers, X series server, E6000 blade server and E9000
high density server, E6000 blade server and Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server. Duration
Master the methods of log collection of RH
series rack servers, X series high density server,
3 working days
E6000 blade server and E9000 Converged Class Size
Infrastructure Blade Server.
Min 6, max 12
Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods
263
Training Programs
4.7 Data Center Specialist Certification Training Programs
4.7.1 HCS-Field-MicroDC Training
Training Path hardware architecture

Know MicroDC solution typical application
HCS-Field-MicroDC scenarios
Familiar with MicroDC solution planning and
ODC01 Lecture 1d
design
Target Audience Familiar with MicroDC solution hardware
installation
Familiar with MicroDC solution software
Administrators
deployment
Know the HUAWEI devices commissioning
Prerequisites methods
Know basic computer knowledge Know MicroDC daily maintenance
Know basic IP technology and knowledge Master MicroDC troubleshooting methods
Know server knowledge Duration

Objectives 1 working dayincluding 0.25 day hands-on
On completion of this program, the practice
Know requirements and position of MicroDC
Min 6, Max 12
solution
Know MicroDC solution software structure and
264
Training Programs
4.8 IT Fundamental Training Programs
4.8.1 Storage Fundamental Technology Training
Training Path Understand the basics of RAID concepts,

common RAID principles, features and different
Storage Technology Foundation
RAID application scenarios
Identify the basics of the FC-SAN and IP-SAN
OST01 Lecture 1d
key technologies
Target Audience Understand the basic concepts and structures of
a NAS system
Master multipath technology and host
Prerequisites
connection basics for both the technology and
Know computer basal knowledge application
Know OS basal knowledge Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Min 6, Max 12
Know the basics of storage systems and
networks, structures and components
265
Training Programs
4.9 IT Advanced Training Programs
4.9.1 OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced Feature Training
OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced On completion of this program, the

Feature
OST0A Lecture 1d Master unified storage structure, component
Target Audience Know storage data process and communication

protocol, principle and application
Operators and Maintainers Know storage system advanced technology and
Managers application
Planners and Designers Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Know server basal knowledge and application Class Size
Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology
Understand main OS and DB operation and Min 6, Max 12
technology
266
Training Programs
4.9.2 OceanStor Unified Storage System Design Training
OceanStor Unified Storage System Design On completion of this program, the

OST0B Lecture 1d Be familiar with SAN system
Target Audience Be familiar with SAN system plan process

Be familiar with SAN system plan methods
Duration
Manager
Prerequisites 1 working day
Class Size
Know PC OS
Know basal computer knowledge Min 6, Max 12
Know basal storage technology
267
Training Programs
4.9.3 Big Data Storage Advanced Technology Training

Be familiar with Big Data background
Big Data Storage Advanced Technology
Be familiar with Huaweis Big data basic
Training
technology, like Erasure Code, Wushan File
OST0C Lecture 1d
system.
Target Audience
Be familiar with hardware and network of
Operators and Maintainers OceanStor 9000.
Managers Be familiar with Advanced feature of OceanStor

9000, like InfoAllocator, InfoTier,InfoEqualizer
etc.
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Understand main OS and DB operation and Class Size
technology
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
268
Training Programs
4.9.4 Big Data Storage Design Training
Training Path Know big data storage advanced technology

Objectives
Enterprise Big Data Storage Design Training
OST0D Lecture 1d participants will be able to:
Target Audience Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 networking
Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 performance
monitoring and improvement
Managers
Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 best practice.
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
Class Size
Understand main OS and DB operation and Min 6, Max 12
technology
269
Training Programs
4.9.5 Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology Training

Be familiar with backup and recovery system
Disaster Recovery and Backup architecture, backup component, backup media,
Advanced Technology Backup mode and strategy
OST0E Lecture 1d
Be familiar with backup network, backup and
Target Audience recovery technology
Be familiar with Data deduplication, CDP
technology principle
Managers
Know DR solution, technology and application
scenario
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Understand main OS and DB operation and
Objectives
270
Training Programs
4.9.6 Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training

Description the basic concepts of disaster
Disaster Recovery and Backup Design
Training recovery and backup
Description the requirement analysis of disaster
OST0F Lecture 1d
recovery and backup
Target Audience Description the design principles, processes and
methods of disaster recovery and backup
solution
Manager
Master the key technology of disaster recovery
Prerequisites
disaster and backup solution
Familiar with the IT system architecture and the Master of the plan and design methods of
basic knowledge disaster recovery and backup solution
Familiar with storage and SAN system Duration
technology
1 working day
Familiar with backup and disaster recovery basic
knowledge and experience Class Size

271
Training Programs
4.10 Unified Storage Training Programs
4.10.1 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and

Management Training
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage On completion of this program, the

Array Product Introduction
OST11 Lecture 0.25d Describe T series product position
Describe T series product structure
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage Describe T series product hardware
Array Plan and Design configuration and component
Describe T series product software structure and
OST12 Lecture 0.25d
component
Describe T series product main features and
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage typical application scenario
Array Installation and Configuration
Understand T series storage plan and design
OST13 Lecture, Hands-on 1d target
exercise Understand T series storage plan rule
Understand T series storage plan method
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Routine Maintenance Master storage system hardware installation
Master storage system device cabling
OST14 Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d
Master storage system power on sequence
exercise
Master device configuration
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage Master basal operation configuration
Array Troubleshooting
Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248 structure
OST15 Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248

exercise configuration
Master T series product management
Array Advanced Function Master T series product license using
Master T series product basal application
OST16 Lecture, Hands-on 2d configuration
exercise
Target Audience Master T series product performance stat.
function using
Master T series product upgrade
Managers
Know T series product common fault disposal
Master T series product fault disposal process
Prerequisites
Describe UltraPath product request and product
Know PC OS position
Know basal computer knowledge Know UltraPath product main function feature
Know basal storage technology Know UltraPath product application scenario and
deployment scheme
272
Training Programs
Know Snapshot definition, principle and Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature
configuration process and using
Know LUN Copy definition, principle, Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature
configuration process application scenario
Know Remote replication definition, principle, Describe Dynamic RAID Group Expansion
configuration process principle, configuration
Know Smart Cache definition, principle, Duration
configuration process
4 working days
Describe Split Mirror definition, principle,
configuration process Class Size
Describe Thin Provisioning configuration feature Min 6, Max 12
request
273
Training Programs
4.10.2 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and

Management Training (Fast-Track , For channel )
Training Path Know basal storage technology

Objectives
Array Product Introduction
OST11 Lecture 0.25d participants will be able to:
Describe T series product position
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage Describe T series product structure

Array Plan and Design Describe T series product hardware
configuration and component
OST12 Lecture 0.25d
Describe T series product software structure and
component
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage Describe T series product main features and
Array Installation and Configuration
typical application scenario
OST13 Lecture, Hands-on 1d Master storage system hardware installation
exercise Master storage system device cabling
Master storage system power on sequence
Array Routine Maintenance Master device configuration
Master basal operation configuration
Master T series product management
exercise
Master T series product license using
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage Master T series product basal application
Array Troubleshooting
configuration
Lecture, Hands-on Master T series product performance stat.

OST15 0.25d
exercise function using
Target Audience
Master T series product upgrade
Operators and Maintainers Know T series product common fault disposal
Managers Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Know PC OS Class Size
Know basal computer knowledge
Min 6, Max 12
274
Training Programs
4.10.3 T seriesV2 (S26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and

Management Training

Describe T series V2 product position
S26T /S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array
Product Introduction Describe T series V2 product structure
Describe T series V2 product hardware
OST17 Lecture 0.25 d
Describe T series V2 product software structure
S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array and component
Plan and Design
Know T series V2 product hardware installation
OST18 Lecture 0.25 d plan
Know T series V2 product deployment and
configuration plan
S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array
Installation and Configuration Master T series V2 product hardware installation
Master T series V2 product basal operation
OST19 Lecture, Hands-on 1d
configuration
exercise
Describe storage pool basal principle
S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial
Routine Maintenance reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
OST1A Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d
exercise Reconstruction performance analysis
Storage pool configuration
Troubleshooting
Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248
OST1B Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d configuration
exercise
Know T series V2 product maintenance tool
using
Advanced Function Master T series V2 product routine maintenance
method
OST1C Lecture, Hands-on 2d
Know T series V2 product upgrade process and
exercise
Target Audience precaution
Know T series V2 product common fault disposal
Master T series V2 product fault disposal
Managers
process
Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,
Prerequisites
deployment and configuration
Know PC OS Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
Know basal computer knowledge plan, deployment and configuration
Know basal storage technology Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,

plan, deployment and configuration
Objectives
Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
On completion of this program, the configuration process
275
Training Programs
Know LUN Copy definition, principle and configuration process

configuration process Duration
Know Remote replication definition, principle and
4 working days
Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
Describe clone principle, technology and
276
Training Programs
4.10.4 OceanStor V3 Storage System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Describe OceanStor V3 product software

structure and component
5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Product Introduction Know OceanStor V3 product hardware
installation plan
OST1U Lecture 0.5 d
Know OceanStor V3 product deployment and
configuration plan
5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage Master OceanStor V3 product hardware
Array Plan and Design
installation
OST1V Lecture 0.5 d Master OceanStor V3 product basal operation

configuration
5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Installation and Configuration Know OceanStor V3 product maintenance tool
using
OST1W Lecture, Hands-on 0.5 d Master OceanStor V3 product routine
exercise
maintenance method
Know OceanStor V3 product upgrade process
5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Troubleshooting and Routine and precaution
Maintenance
Know OceanStor V3 product common fault
OST1X Lecture, Hands-on 0.5 d
disposal
exercise
Master OceanStor V3 product fault disposal
5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage process
Array Advanced Function
Lecture, Hands-on deployment and configuration

OST1Y 3 d
exercise Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,
Target Audience
Describe IP-ScaleOut principle, key technology,
Operators and Maintainers deployment and configuration
Managers Describe StoragePool principle, key technology,
Planners and Designers deployment and configuration
Prerequisites Describe CIFS principle, key technology,
Know PC OS
Describe NFS principle, key technology,
Describe SmartQuota principle, key technology,
Objectives deployment and configuration
On completion of this program, the Describe SmartDedupe and SmartCompression
participants will be able to: principle, key technology, deployment and

configuration
Describe OceanStor V3 product position
Describe Snapshot principle, key technology,
Describe OceanStor V3 product structure
Describe OceanStor V3 product hardware
Describe File System Snapshot principle, key
technology, deployment and configuration
277
Training Programs
Describe Remote Replication principle, key Class Size

technology, deployment and configuration
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
5 working days
278
Training Programs
4.10.5 OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment and

Management Training

Describe OceanStor 18500/18800 product
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage
Product Introduction position
OST1D Lecture 0.25 d
structure
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage hardware configuration and component
Plan and Design
OST1E Lecture 0.25 d software structure and component
Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product
hardware installation plan
Installation and Configuration Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product
deployment and configuration plan
OST1F Lecture, Hands-on 1 d Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product
exercise
hardware installation
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product basal

Routine Maintenance operation configuration
OST1G Lecture 0.25 d
Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248
configuration
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product
Troubleshooting
maintenance tool using
OST1H Lecture 0.25 d Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product routine

maintenance method
Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product upgrade
process and precaution
Advanced Function
Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product common
OST1I Lecture 2 d fault disposal
Target Audience Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product fault

disposal process
Operators and Maintainers Describe storage pool basal principle
Managers Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial
Planners and Designers reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction
Prerequisites Describe Pre-copy and Equalization
Reconstruction performance analysis
Know PC OS
Objectives
Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,
On completion of this program, the plan, deployment and configuration
279
Training Programs
Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology, configuration process

plan, deployment and configuration Describe clone principle, technology and
Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and configuration process
configuration process Duration
Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
4 working days
Know Remote replication definition, principle and Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and
280
Training Programs
4.10.6 SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product Deployment

and Management Training
Training Path Know basal computer knowledge
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) Know basal storage technology

FC Switch Product Introduction Objectives
OST1J Lecture 0.5d On completion of this program, the

SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248)
FC Switch Configuration Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248
configuration
OST1K Lecture, demo 0.5d
Duration
Target Audience
1 working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Know PC OS
281
Training Programs
4.10.7 Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management
Training

Describe Dorado2100 G2/5000 product position
Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Product
Introduction Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product
hardware/software structure component
OST1L Lecture 0.25d
Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product main
function feature
Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Understand Dorado2100 G2/5000 product
Installation and Configuration
typical application case
OST1M Lecture, Hands-on 1.5d Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product
exercise hardware/software installation process
Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product basal
Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage
configuration method
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Know Dorado2100 G2 product routine
OST1N Lecture, Demo 0.25d maintenance operation process
Target Audience Know Dorado2100 G2 product upgrade process
Know Dorado2100 G2 product fault disposal
operation
Managers
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Know PC OS
Class Size
Know basal storage technology Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
282
Training Programs
4.10.8 VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and

Management Training

Describe VIS6000T product position
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Product
Introduction Know VIS6000T product software/hardware
structure component
OST1O Lecture 0.25d
Know VIS6000Tproduct main function feature
Understand VIS6000Tproduct typical application
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Plan and case
Design
Know VIS6000T product hardware
OST1P Lecture 0.5d installation/network plan
Master VIS6000T product hardware/software
installation and deployment
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Installation
and Configuration Master VIS6000T product basal function
configuration
OST1Q Lecture, Hands-on 0.75d
Know VIS6000Tproduct maintenance tool
exercise
Know VIS6000Tproduct routine maintenance
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Routine method
Maintenance Master VIS6000T product common fault disposal
process
OST1R Lecture 0.25d
Know VIS6000T product fault disposal basal
principle and method
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Know VIS6000T product replication function
Troubleshooting
principle, key technology, application plan,
OST1S Lecture 0.25d network and connection

Master VIS6000T product replication function
application deployment and configuration,
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Advanced
troubleshooting
Function
Know VIS6000T product mirror function
OST1T Lecture, Hands-on 1d principle , key technology, application plan,
exercise network and connection
Target Audience
Master VIS6000T product mirror function
Operators and Maintainers application deployment and configuration,
Managers troubleshooting
Planners and Designers Know VIS6000T product snapshot function
Prerequisites principle, key technology, application plan,
network and connection
Know PC OS
Master VIS6000T product snapshot function
application deployment and configuration,
troubleshooting
Objectives
Duration
283
Training Programs
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
284
Training Programs
4.10.9 Huawei Storage System Troubleshooting Training

Huawei Storage System Operators and Maintainers
Troubleshooting Introduction
Managers
OST1Z01 Lecture Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
Huawei Storage System
Troubleshooting Tools Know PC OS
OSTZ02 Lecture, Hands-on
Know HUAWEI HCNP storage technology or
exercise
more
Huawei Storage System Objectives
Troubleshooting Commands
OSTZ03 Lecture, Hands-on participants will be able to:
exercise
Describe storage issues definiation and position
Huawei Storage System Fault Master HUAWEI storage troubleshooting tools
Environmental Information Collection and commands
Method introduction
Master HUAWEI storage fault environmental
OST1Z04 Lecture, Hands-on
exercise information collection methods
Master HUAWEI storage troubleshooting
Huawei Storage System methods for hardware issues
Troubleshooting for Hardware Issues
Master HUAWEI storage troubleshooting
OST1Z05 Lecture, Hands-on methods for configuration issues
exercise Duration
Huawei Storage System 2 working days

Troubleshooting for Configuration Issues
Class Size
OST1Z06 Lecture, Hands-on
exercise Min 6, max 12
285
Training Programs
4.11 Massive Storage Training Programs
4.11.1 OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Know Windows, Linux OS operation

Know NAS system knowledge
OceanStor 9000 product Introduction
Know cluster system foundation
Lecture Objectives
OST25 0.25d

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Technology
Describe OceanStor 9000 product, position,
main function, application scenario
OST26 Lecture 0.5d
Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 product
hardware installation Planning
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Installation Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 product
and Configuration Planning
deployment and configuration Planning process
OST27 Lecture 0.25d and tools
Command OceanStor 9000 product hardware
installation
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Installation
and Configuration Command OceanStor 9000 typical networking
Command OceanStor 9000 product file sharing
exercise configuration
Command OceanStor 9000 InfoAllocator
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Advanced configuration and application
Function Principle and Deployment
Command OceanStor 9000 InfoEqualizer
OST29 Lecture, Hands-on 1d configuration and application
exercise
Command OceanStor 9000 InfoStamper
configuration and application(optional)
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Routine
Maintenance Command OceanStor 9000 InfoTier
configuration and application(optional)
OST2A Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d
exercise Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 maintenance
tool
OceanStor 9000 Storage System Command OceanStor 9000 routine maintenance

Troubleshooting method
OST2B Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 upgrade

exercise process and notice
Target Audience Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 troubleshooting
method
Command OceanStor 9000 troubleshooting case
Managers
Planners and Designers Duration
Prerequisites 3 working days
Know storage foundation
286
Training Programs
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
287
Training Programs
4.11.2 N8500 V2 Cluster NAS System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Know NAS system knowledge

Know cluster system foundation
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System
Introduction Objectives
OST2C Lecture 0.25d On completion of this program, the

DescribeN8500V2R1 Clustered NAS product
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS Technology
type, position, main function, application
scenario
OST2D Lecture 0.25d
Describe N8500V2R1 clustered NAS NFS,CIFS,
DST, replication technology principle
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Installation Be familiar with N8500 product hardware
and Configuration Planning
installation planning
OST2E Lecture 0.25d Be familiar with N8500 product deployment and
configuration planning
Be familiar with network and bond mode
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Installation
and Configuration Command N8500V2R1 product hardware
installation
OST2F Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d
exercise Command N8500V2R1 typical networking
Command N8500V2R1 deployment tool
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Advanced Command N8500V2R1 product file sharing basic
Function Principle and Deployment
operation configuration
OST2G Lecture, Hands-on 1d Command N8500V2R1 Backup, DST
exercise
configuration and application
Command N8500V2R1 file system snapshot ,
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Routine
Maintenance mirror image, replication principle, configuration
and application
OST2H Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d
exercise Be familiar with N8500V2R1 maintenance tool
method
N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Command N8500V2R1 routine maintenance

Troubleshooting method
OST2I Lecture, Hands-on 0.5d Be familiar with N8500V2R1 upgrade method

exercise Be familiar with N8500V2R1 product
Target Audience troubleshooting method
Operators and Maintainers Command N8500V2R1 typical fault case
Managers Duration
Planners and Designers 3 working days
Know storage foundation Min 6, Max 12
Know Windows, Linux OS operation
288
Training Programs
4.12 Data Protection Training Programs
4.12.1 VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Know Windows, Linux OS operation

Know virtual tape library knowledge
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System
Introduction Know cluster knowledge
OST35 Lecture Objectives

Installation and Configuration Planning Describe VTL6900 positioning , architecture ,
features, application scenarios
OST36 Lecture 0.25d
Be familiar with VTL6900 Approaches to
deploying and to planning VTL6900 deployment
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System and using configuration tools
Installation and Configuration
Be familiar approaches and procedure for
OST37 Lecture, Hands-on 1d installing the VTL6900 hardware
exercise
Be familiar with Approaches to installing and
deploying the VTL6900
Routine Maintenance Be familiar with Approaches to using ISM
ServiceTool to finish Daily maintenance tasks
exercise Be familiar with Approaches to upgrading the
VTL6900
VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Be familiar with Approaches to locating and
Troubleshooting
handling the VTL6900 faults
OST39 Lecture, Hands-on 0.25d Command VTL6900 clustered mechanism
exercise
Command VTL6900 data deduplication principle
and application
Advance Function Principle and Application Command VTL6900 Tape Out principle and
application
OST3A Lecture, Hands-on 1d
exercise Command VTL6900 replication principle and
Operators and Maintainers Duration
Managers 3 working days

Planners and Designers Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Know storage foundation
289
Training Programs
4.13 Server Training Programs
4.13.1 RH V2 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Describe the models, position, main

functions and application scenarios of RH
RH V2 Series Rack Server V2series servers
Introduction
Master the hardware structure, views,
OSV11 Lecture 0.4 d
interfaces and hardware installation of RH
V2 series servers
RH V2 Series Server Configuration and
Master BMC configuration of RH V2
Deployment series servers
OSV12 Lecture, demo 0.3 d Master RAID plan and configuration of
RH V2 series servers
Master OS installation method of RH
RH V2 Series Rack Server Routine series servers
Master the steps, methods and cautions
OSV13 Lecture, hands-on 0.3 d
of parts replacement of RH V2 series
exercise
Target Audience servers
Master the methods of log collection of
Administrators
Be familiar with basic troubleshooting
Prerequisites
methods of RH V2series servers
Be familiar with Windows and Linux Duration
1 working days
Know basic knowledge of server
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
290
Training Programs
4.13.2 RH V3 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Describe the models, position, main

functions and application scenarios of RH
RH V3 Series Rack Server V3 series servers
Introduction
Master the hardware structure, views,
OSV81 Lecture 0.4 d
interfaces and hardware installation of RH
V3 series servers
RH V3 Series Server Configuration and
Master BMC configuration of RH V3
Deployment series servers
OSV82 Lecture, demo 0.3 d Master RAID plan and configuration of
Master OS installation method of RH V3
RH V3 Series Rack Server Routine series servers
Master the steps, methods and cautions
of parts replacement of RH V3 series
exercise
Target Audience servers
Master the methods of log collection of
Administrators
Be familiar with basic troubleshooting
Prerequisites methods of RH V3 series servers
1 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
291
Training Programs
4.13.3 X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training

X6000 Server Introduction
and application scenarios of X6000 series
servers
OSV21 Lecture 0.4 d
Master the hardware structure, components,
views, modules, blade types and hardware
installation of X6000 series servers
X6000 Server OS Installation
Master BMC configuration of X6000 series
OSV22 Lecture, demo 0.3 d servers
Master RAID plan and configuration of X6000
series servers
X6000 Server Routine Maintenance and Master OS installation method of X6000 series
Troubleshooting
servers
Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts
exercise
Target Audience replacement of X6000 series servers
Master the methods of log collection of X6000
series servers
Administrators
Prerequisites
of X6000 series servers
1 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
292
Training Programs
4.13.4 E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training

E6000 Blade Server Introduction and application scenarios of E6000 series
servers
OSV31 Lecture 0.4 d
Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
and hardware installation of E6000 series
servers
E6000 Blade Server OS Installation
Master iMana function, management and
OSV32 Lecture, demo 0.3 d maintenance of E6000 blade server
Master RAID plan and configuration of E6000
series servers
E6000 Blade Server Routine Maintenance and Master OS installation method of E6000 series
Troubleshooting
servers
exercise
Target Audience replacement of E6000 series servers
Master the methods of log collection of E6000
series servers
Administrators
Prerequisites
of E6000 series servers
1 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, max 12
293
Training Programs
4.13.5 E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server Deployment and Management

Training
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server On completion of this program, the

Introduction participants will be able to:
OSV51 Lecture 0.2 d Describe the models, position, main functions
and application scenarios of E9000 Converged
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces
Server Hardware Installation
and hardware installation of E9000 Converged
OSV52 Lecture, demo 0.2 d
Master BMC function, management and
maintenance of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade
Server Management and Configuration Blade Server
OSV53 Lecture, demo 0.4 d Master RAID plan and configuration of E9000
Master OS installation method of E9000
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting
replacement of E9000 Converged Infrastructure
exercise
Target Audience Blade Server
Master the methods of log collection of E9000
Administrators
Prerequisites
of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
294
Training Programs
4.13.6 Huawei Server Troubleshooting Training
Training Path methods

Master server routine troubleshooting methods
Huawei Server Troubleshooting
Familiar server component replacement process
and notes
OSV91 Lecture, hands-on
exercise Master server routine problems help channel
Target Audience Understand Huawei server tools system
Operators and Maintainers Master Huawei server tools operation
Administrators Understand Huawei server hardware fault

phenomenon
Prerequisites
Master Huawei server hardware troubleshooting
Be familiar with basic knowledge of Windows methods
and Linux operating system Master Huawei server management software
Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP troubleshooting methods
Know basic knowledge of server Master Huawei server operating system
Be familiar with Huawei server products and installation method
operations Master routine troubleshooting methods of
Objectives Huawei server operating system installation
Duration
Master server routine inspection and Class Size
maintenance operations
Master server troubleshooting ideas
Min 6, max 12
Familiar server log information collection
295
Training Programs
4.14 Cloud Computing Training Programs
4.14.1 Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training
Training Path FusionCloud Desktop

Master the protocol of FusionCloud Desktop
Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and
Master the service commissioning process of
Management
FusionCloud Desktop
OCL16 Lecture, hands-on exercise 3d
Master the access process of FusionCloud
Target Audience Desktop
Operators and maintainers Master the installation of FusionAccess
Administrators Master the image tool of FusionCloud Desktop
Planners and designers Master the Management and Maintenance of

FusionCloud Desktop
Prerequisites
Describe the peripherals of FusionCloud
Be familiar with PC and Server operating system Desktop
Know basic knowledge of network Describe the peripherals redirection principle
Know basic knowledge of server Master the method of troubleshooting
Know basic knowledge of storage Master the solution of different faults
Objectives Master AD(Active Directory) features
Master DNS feature
Master DHCP feature
Master the upgrade process of FusionCloud
Describe the location of FusionCloud Desktop
Desktop
Describe the features and advantages of
Master the compatibility of FusionCloud Desktop
FusionCloud Desktop
Duration
Describe the basic concept of FusionCloud
Desktop 3 working days
Describe the Cases of FusionCloud Desktop Class Size
Master the structure and configuration of
FusionCloud Desktop Min 6, max 12
Master the components and functions of
296
Training Programs
4.14.2 FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training

Describe FusionCube solution
FusionCube Solution Deployment and
Management Describe the structure and functions of
FusionCube
Describe the hardware structure of FusionCube
Target Audience
Describe FusionCompute structure and functions
Operators and maintainers Describe FusionCompute routine operations and
Administrators maintenance
Planners and designers Describe FusionManager structure and functions

Describe FusionManager routine operations and
Prerequisites
maintenance
Be familiar with PC operating system Duration
Know basic knowledge of datacom
2 working days
Know basic knowledge of storage Class Size
Objectives Min 6, max 12
297
Training Programs
4.14.3 FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and Management Training
FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and On completion of this program, the

Management
OCL14 Lecture, hands-on exercise 2d Describe FusionSphere solution
Target Audience Describe FusionSphere installation procedure

Describe FusionCompute structure and functions
Operators and maintainers
Describe FusionCompute routine operations and
Administrators
maintenance
Describe FusionManager structure and functions
Prerequisites Describe FusionManager routine operations and
maintenance
Be familiar with PC operating system
Know basic knowledge of datacom Duration
Know basic knowledge of server 2 working days
Know basic knowledge of storage
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
298
Training Programs
4.14.4 FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training
Training Path Master FusionSphere Concept, Components

and Deployment Model
FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and
Management Describe FusionSphere Critical Functions
Master FusionSphere Typical Features and Its
Configuration
Target Audience Trough Typical Lab Experiments, Upgrade Skills
Operators and maintainers Understand FusionSphere Advanced Fuctions
Administrators Related Concepts

Master FusionSphere VPC features and
Experiment
Prerequisites
Master FusionSphere Routine Operations,
Be familiar with PC and Server operating system Maintenance and Troubleshooting Methods
Know basic knowledge of network Duration
3 working days, 1.5 days for Lab
Know basic knowledge of storage
Experiments.
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
299
Training Programs
4.14.5 FusionInsight Solution Deployment and Management Training
FusionInsight Solution Deployment and On completion of this program, the

OCL17 Lecture, hands-on exercise 1d Describe FusionInsight Solution
Target Audience Describe the architecture and components of

FusionInsight
Operators and maintainers
Master the networking and plan of FusionInsight
Administrators
Master the installation and maintenance of
Planners and designers FusionInsight
Prerequisites Master the operation and maintenance of
FusionInsight
Be familiar with PC operating system
Know basic knowledge of datacom
Duration
Know basic knowledge of server 1 working day

Know basic knowledge of storage Class Size
Min 6, max 12
300
4.14.6 Huawei Cloud Computing System Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Huawei Cloud Computing Troubleshooting
Target Audience
Huawei Cloud Computing Solution Operators and maintainers

Huawei Cloud Computing Solution Administrators
Huawei Cloud Computing Solution Planners and designers
Prerequisites
Basic knowledge of Huawei FusionCompute

Basic knowledge of Huawei FusionManager
Basic knowledge of Huawei FusionAccess
Objectives

Describe Huawei Cloud Computing Troubleshooting Basic Knowledge
Describe FusionCompute Fault Category
Master FusionCompute Host Faults
Master FusionCompute VRM Nodes Faults
Master FusionCompute Operation and Maintenance Faults
Master FusionCompute Users VM Faults
Describe FusionManager Fault Category
Master FusionManager Management Node Faults
Master FusionManager Operation and Maintenance Faults
Describe FusionAccess Fault Category
Master FusionAccess Management Node Faults
Master FusionAccess Operation and Maintenance Faults
Master FusionAccess End Users Desktop Faults
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 16
301
4.15 IT Network Management Training Programs
4.15.1 Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path features

Be familiar with eSight product architecture
Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT
Be familiar with eSight product deployment
Master eSight server spec requirement
ONM11 Lecture 1d
Master eSight installation planning and
Target Audience preparation
Operators and Maintainers Master eSight installation

Master eSight basic configuration
Prerequisites
Master eSight server product management
Know PC OS software operation
Know server technology Master eSight storage product management
Know Huawei Server Product Management software operation
Know Huawei Server Product Management Master the maintenance of eSight product
Objectives Duration

Describe eSight product position
Min 6, Max 12
Be familiar with eSight product functions and
302
4.16 Disaster Recovery and Backup Solution Training Programs
4.16.1 OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and Management Training
OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and On completion of this program, the

OST81 Lecture, hands-on exercise 4d Be familiar with backup network and system
Target Audience Be familiar with backup solution plan process

Be familiar with backup solution plan methods
Be familiar with backup solution plan and
Manager/Administrator implement in Filesystem, Oracle, and VMware
Prerequisites scenes
Be familiar with routine maintenance and
Know PC OS
troubleshooting
Duration
Know Huawei Storage or VTL 4 working day
Know basal Simpana Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
303
4.16.2 Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution Deployment and
Management Training
Training Path
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery

Solution Deployment and Management
OST82 Lecture, hands-on exercise 3d
Target Audience

Manager/Administrator
Prerequisites
Know PC OS
Know Huawei Storage and VIS
Objectives

Be familiar with Disaster Recovery network and
system
Be familiar with Disaster Recovery solution plan
process
Be familiar with Disaster Recovery solution plan
methods
Be familiar with plan and implement Active-
Passive and Active-Active Disaster Recovery
solutions
Duration
3 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5 Enterprise Wireless Training Solution
5.1 Training Path
5.1.1 GSM-R BSS Training Path
Plan &Design Operation and Maintenance Advanced course
GSM-R Radio Network GSM-R BTS Operation and GSM-R Radio Network
Design and Planning Training Maintenance Training(BSC6000 Optimization Training
2d V901R013) 3d 5d

GSM-R BTS Installation and GSM-R Radio Network
Commissioning Analysis Training
2d 2d

GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and
Commissioning
2d
GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and

3d
GSM-R BSS Data Configuration
4d
GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting
3d
GSM-R System Overview
Technology Basic 1d
Training
GSM-R Basic Principle Training
1d
Training Programs
5.1.2 GSM-R CS Training Path
Plan & Design Operation and Maintenance Improve
eCNS300 System Overview GSM-R Feature Training
1d 5d
GTSOFTX3000 Hardware
Training
1d
GTSOFTX3000 Operation
3d
GTSOFTX3000 Data
Configuration Training
6d
UMG8900 Hardware Training
1d
UMG8900 Operation and

2d
UMG8900 Data
2d
HSS9860 Operation and

2d
Training Programs
5.1.3 GSM-R PS Training Path
Plan &Design Operation and Maintenance Improve
UGW9811 Operation and

2d
UGW9811 Data Configuration

Training
2d
USN9810 Operation and

3d
USN9810 Data Configuration

Training
9d
PS Alarm Monitoring and

Management Training
1d
Training Programs
5.1.4 GSM-R OSS Training Path
Maintenance personnel System Administrator
iManager M2000V200R013 Client iManager M2000V200R013 System

Operation and Maintenance(BSS) Administrator Training (SUN)
2d 5d
iManager M2000V200R013 PS iManager M2000V200R013 System

Operation and Maintenance Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)
2d 3d
Training Programs
5.1.5 eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training Path
Plan&Design Implement & Operate Improve
eLTE Trunking Radio eNodeB Product Training eLTE Trunking Radio RF

Network Planning and (eLTE Broadband Trunking) Network Optimizing
Optimization Overview 1d 5d 1d
eLTE Trunking Radio eCN210 Training

Network Design and
Dimensioning
1d 5d
eSCN230 Training
2d
eOMC910 Operation and

2d
Dispatching System Product

Training
1d
Terminal Product Training

(Trunking)
1d
Training Programs
5.1.6 eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training Path
Plan&Design Implement & Operate Improve
eNodeB Training (eLTE

Broadband Access)
5d
eCN600 Training
5d
eCNS610 Training
2d
U2000 Operation and

Maintenance
2d
Terminal Operation Training

(Access)
1d
Basic Principle eLTE-EPC Network Basic

eLTE Basic Principle
Technology Principle
1d 1d
Training Programs
Enterprise Wireless Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
GSM-R BSS Training
GSM-R System Overview Training 1 6~12
GSM-R Principle Training 1 6-12
GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance 6~12

3
Training(BSC6000 V901R013)
GSM-R BTS Installation and Commissioning 6~12

2
Training
GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and 6~12

2
GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and Maintenance 6~12

3
Training
GSM-R BSS Data Configuration Training 4 6~12
GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting Training 3 6~12
GSM-R CS Training
eCNS300 System Overview Training 1 6~12
GTSOFTX3000 Hardware Training 1 6~12
GTSOFTX3000 Operation and Maintenance 6~12

3
Training
GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration Training 6 6~12
UMG8900 Hardware Training 1 6~12
UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6~12

Training Programs
UMG8900 Data Configuration Training 2 6~12
HSS9860 Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6~12
GSM-R Feature Training 5 6~12
GSM-R PS Training
UGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6~12
UGW9811 Data Configuration Training 5 6~12
USN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training 6~12

3
ATCA
USN9810 Data Configuration Training 9 6~12
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training 1 6~12
GSM-R OSS Training
iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and 6~12

2
Maintenance Training(BSS)
iManager M2000V200R013 PS Operation and 6~12

2
iManager M2000V200R013 System 6~12

5
Administrator Training (SUN)
iManager M2000V200R013 System 6~12

3
Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)
GSM-R RNP&RNO Training
GSM-R Radio Network Design and Planning 6~12

3
Training
GSM-R Radio Network Optimization Training 5 6~12
GSM-R Radio Network Analysis Training 2 6~12
eLTE Principle Training
eLTE Basic Principle Training 1 6~12

Training Programs
eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Training 1 6~12
eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training
eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview 6~12

1
Training
eNodeB Operation and Maintenance 6~12

2
Training(Trunking)
eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Trunking) 2 6~12
eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Trunking) 1 6~12
eCNS210 Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6~12
eCNS210 Data Configuration Training 2 6~12
eOMC910 Client Operation and Maintenance 6~12

2
Training
Dispatching System Operation and Maintenance 6~12

1
Training
Terminal Operation Training(Trunking) 1 6~12
eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Training 1 6~12
eSCN230 Data Configuration Training 1 6~12
eLTE Rapid Solution Training 5 6~12
eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training
eLTE Broadband Access System Overview 6~12

1
Training
eNodeB Operation and Maintenance 6~12

2
Training(Access)
eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Access) 2 6~12
eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Access) 1 6~12

Training Programs
U2000 Client Operation and Maintenance 6~12

2
Training
Terminal Operation Training(Access) 1 6~12
eLTE RNP&RNO Training
eLTE Trunking Radio Network Planning and 6~12

1
Optimizing Overview Training
eLTE Trunking Radio Network Design and 6~12

1
Dimensioning Training
eLTE Trunking Radio RF Network Optimizing 6~12

1
Training
Training Programs
5.4 GSM-R BSS Training
5.4.1 GSM-R System Overview Training

Understand GSM - R system
structure, interface, and business
GSM-R System Overview
Understand the feature
Lecture 1d business of GSM-R
Understand the requirements
of railway business on GSM-R
Target Audience GSM-R solution technology
Field Engineer, Manager characteristic
Prerequisites
Duration
A general mobile communication and
data communication. 1 working day
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.4.2 GSM-R Principle Training
communication technology of
Training Path
multiple access, Cellular technology
Understand GSM - R system
GSM-R Basic Principle Training
structure, interface, and business
Lecture 1d Understand the physical
channel structure, logical channel
function and combination of Um
Target Audience interface
Understand GSM-R mobile
Field Engineer
area division and numbering plan
Prerequisites Understand GSM-R major
technology
data communication.
Duration
Objectives
1 working day
Understand the mobile
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.4.3 GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R013)
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Training Path
Prerequisites
GSM-R BTS3012 Product Description
Lecture 0.5d
data communication.
Objectives

GSM-R DBS3900 Product Description
Lecture 0.5d Describe site maintenance objects.
Describe the concepts of BTS
management status.
Describe the concepts of BTS operation
GSM-R BTS3900 Product Description
status.
Lecture 0.5d Describe BTS routine operation and
maintenance procedure.
Explain how to use BTS remote
maintenance console.
GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance
Training (BSC6000V901R013)
LectureHand-on 1.5d
Exercise Duration
3working days
Target Audience
Class Size
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.4.4 GSM-R BTS Installation and Commissioning Training

GSM-R BTS Installation and
Commissioning participants will be able to:
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 2d
Describe the hardware system structure
Master the hardware installation process
Target Audience Understand the hardware commissioning
process
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and
Maintenance Duration
Prerequisites 2working days
Understand the BTS Product Description Class Size

Understand the BTS Operation and Min 6, Max 12
Maintenance
Training Programs
5.4.5 GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and Commissioning Training

GSM-R BSC Installation and
Commissioning participants will be able to:
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 2d
Describe the hardware system structure
Master the hardware installation process
Target Audience Understand the hardware commissioning
process
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and
Understand the BSC6000 Product Class Size

Description
Min 6, Max 12
Understand the BSC6000 Operation and
Maintenance
Training Programs
5.4.6 GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and Maintenance Training
GSM wireless network operation and

Training Path
maintenance
GSM-R BSC6000 Product Description Objectives
WB30 Lecture On completion of this program, the

1d
Describe the work flow of BSC6000
GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and maintenance.
Maintenance Training Describe important parameters in
Lecture, Hands-on
WB32 Exercise 2d BSC6000 maintenance.
Operate on the BSC6000 maintenance
Target Audience console.
Perform the routine maintenance for
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation
BSC6000.
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Basic knowledge of mobile
communications Class Size
At least 1 year working experience in
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.4.7 GSM-R BSS Data Configuration Training

GSM-R DBS3900 Data Configuration
Lecture, Hands-on Master BSC6000 GSM-R data
Exercise 1d
To complete the global data
configuration
GSM-R BTS3900 Data Configuration
To complete the equipment data
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 1d configuration
To complete the data interface
configuration
GSM-R BSC6000 Data Configuration Understand the CME main interface
Understand the data configuration
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 2d process based on CME
Complete BSC6000 GSM-R data
Target Audience configuration

and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers Duration
Basic knowledge of mobile Class Size

communications
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance
Training Programs
5.4.8 GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting

Training Path
Understand the knowledge, skills and
operations that the maintenance
GSM-R BSS Signaling Flow and analysis
personnel need to grasp.
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 1d Understand the analysis thinking and
process of BSC trouble commissioning.
Master the common method and
processing method of BSC fault
GSM-R BTS Troubleshooting
location..
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 1d Master the BSC system failure
prevention measures.
Understand the relative conception of
GSM-R BSC6000 Troubleshooting alarming.
Query alarms through M2000, LMT, and
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise 1d methods of preserving the alarm log
List the TOP alarm type and find
Target Audience common cause
Draw the alarm processing flow chart,
and can according to the picture to
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
locate the alarm and analysis the cause
Prerequisites
Duration
3 working days
communications
At least 1 year working experience in Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
maintenance
Objectives

Training Programs
5.5 GSM-R CS Training
5.5.1 eCNS300 System Overview Training

Training Path
Describe system structure and hardware
eCNS300 System Overview structure of eCNS300.
Perform software related installation and
Lecture 1d upgrade procedure.
Perform hardware operation and
Target Audience maintenance.
Perform the routine operation and
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line
maintenance.
Maintenance Engineers,
Perform the basic data configuration of
Prerequisites eCNS300.
A general understanding of mobile Duration

communication and data
1 working days
communication.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.5.2 GTSOFTX3000 Hardware Training

Describe the GTSOFTX3000 hardware
structures
GTSOFTX3000 Hardware System
Describe the GTSOFTX3000 cascade
Lectures, 1d structures
Describe the function, indicators, ports
and working mode of each board
Target Audience Explain the types and applications of
GSM-R core network Installation engineers different fibers and cables
GSM-R core network Commissioning Duration

engineers
1working days
GSM-R core network Operation and
maintenance engineers Class Size
Prerequisites Min 6, Max 12
A basic knowledge of telecommunication
Objectives

Training Programs
5.5.3 GTSOFTX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path M3UA based)

Perform the data configuration from
GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and
GTSOFTX3000 Operation and
Maintenance
ATM
Lectures, Hands-on Perform data configuration between
Exercise 3d
GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in
different mode
Target Audience Manage equipments, for example:
checking board status and version
GSM-R core network Installation engineers
Manage data, for example: backup
system data, executing MML commands
maintenance engineers
Manage logs, for example: querying
Prerequisites logs, saving logs
A basic knowledge of telecommunication Manage tracing tasks, for example:

creating a tracing task, checking tracing
Objectives result, saving result
On completion of this program, the Perform the routine operation and
participants will be able to: maintenance
Describe the GTSOFTX3000 hardware Operation of replace the hardware board
structures Operation of change the cable
Describe the GTSOFTX3000 cascade Operation of system backup
structures Operation of system recovery
Describe the function, indicators, ports Manage alarms (browsing alarms,
and working mode of each board querying alarms, printing alarms, dump
Explain the types and applications of alarm logs)
different fibers and cables Create performance tasks
Describe the concept of Hardware Checking status of performance tasks
Configuration Customized performance tasks
Perform hardware configuration Dump the measurement result
Know how to verify hardware Start and stop the process of BAM
configuration Point out key information and its
Perform the connection between directory of BAM
GTSOFTX3000 and MGW
Duration
Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office
information configuration 3 working days
Perform data configuration between
Class Size
GTSOFTX3000 to HLR
Perform data configuration between Min 6, Max 12
GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based,
Training Programs
5.5.4 GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration Training
Training Path Perform hardware configuration

Know how to verify hardware
configuration
GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration
Perform the connection between
Lectures, Hands-on GTSOFTX3000 and MGW
Exercise 6d
Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office
information configuration
Perform data configuration between
Target Audience GTSOFTX3000 to HLR
GSM-R core network Installation engineers Perform data configuration between

GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based,
GSM-R core network Commissioning
M3UA based)
engineers
Perform the data configuration from
GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and
ATM
Prerequisites Perform data configuration between
GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in
different mode
Objectives
Duration
6 working days
Describe the concept of Hardware Class Size
Configuration
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.5.5 UMG8900 Hardware Training

Training Path
Describe UMG8900 hardware structure
Describe UMG8900 logical architecture
GSM-R UMG8900 Hardware System
Describe UMG8900 software
Lectures 1d architecture
Describe UMG8900 Cascading System
Describe main boards' functions of
Target Audience UMG8900
Describe Internal message flow of
GSM-R core network monitor engineers
UMG8900
Describe function of SIWF
GSM-R core network commissioning
engineers Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

Training Programs
5.5.6 UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training

GSM-R UMG8900 Operation and participants will be able to:
Maintenance
Perform interworking with MGW based
Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise 2d on different networking
Perform interworking with BSC based on
Target Audience different scenarios
Perform interworking with MSC/PSTN
GSM-R core network monitor engineers based on different networking
GSM-R core network Operation and Duration
maintenance engineers 2 working days

A basic knowledge of telecommunication Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.5.7 UMG8900 Data Configuration Training
Perform backup and recovery of

Training Path
UMG8900
Query the service status
GSM-R UMG8900 Data Configuration Browse alarm information
Lectures, Hands-on
Browse the performance task
2d
Exercise Configuring System Parameters
Configuring System Time
Target Audience Configuring Frames and Boards
GSM-R core network monitor engineers Configuring the Clock
GSM-R core network Installation engineers Configuring the NMS Interface
GSM-R core network commissioning Configuring the MGW Control Interface

engineers and SIGTRAN Interface
Configure ATM bearer, IP bearer, TDM
Prerequisites bearer
A basic knowledge of telecommunication Configure signaling transfer
Configure MGW data
Objectives
Configure the link
Duration
Configure SIWF 2 working days
Perform operation and maintenance of
Class Size
SIWF
Query equipment status Min 6, Max 12
Query resource information
Training Programs
5.5.8 HSS9860 Operation and Maintenance Training
application
Training Path
Describe HSS9860 interface protocol
function
HSS9860 System and Networking
Describe HSS9860 physical and logical
Overview
Lectures 0.5d
structure
Describe HSS9860 board function
Describe HSS9860 signaling flow
Describe HSS9860 software structure
HSS9860 Subscriber Data Management
GU Describe HSS9860 IP planning
Perform installation of operation PGW
Lectures 0.5d
client with GU network
Perform the method of adding or
deleting subscriber
HSS9860 Data ConfigurationGU
Modify subscription according to
Lectures customer requirement
Hands-on Exercise 1d
Perform configuration of subscription
data
Target Audience
Describe the steps of HSS9860 data
Operation and Maintenance Engineer configuration
Technical Support Engineer Perform hardware and system data
configuration
Prerequisites
Perform interface data configuration
At least half a year experience of Check the data configuration
operation and maintenance of correctness and validity
telecommunication equipments Perform basic debugging of HSS9820
Being familiar with Windows operation (GU)
and basic UNIX operation
Duration
A basic knowledge of mobile
communication 2 working days

Describe HSS9860 product function and
Training Programs
5.5.9 GSM-R Feature Training
Configure and verify Multiple-Engine

Training Path
service
Configure and verify functional
GSM-R Feature Training addressing
Configure and verify call area restriction
Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise 5d Configure and verify location dependent
addressing service
Target Audience Configure and verify SMC integration
service
GSM-R core network telecommunication
Configure and verify access matrix
engineers
service
GSM-R core network commissioning
Configure and verify break-in and force
engineers
release service
Operation and maintenance engineers
Configure and verify missed call SMS
Prerequisites prompt service
Configure and verify priority cell service
A basic knowledge of railway
Perform AC (Acknowledgement Center)
telecommunication system
server software installation and
Objectives uninstallation
Configure AC in BAM
Operate GMS(Group Management
Server) installation
Describe the fundamental of GSM-R
Describe the architecture of GSM-R Duration
system
5 working days
Describe the service and function of
GSM-R system Class Size
Configure and verify eMLPP service
Min 6, Max 12
Configure and verify USS1 service
Configure and verify VBS service
Configure and verify VGCS service
Training Programs
5.6 GSM-R PS Training
5.6.1 UGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
structure of UGW9811.
UGW9811 Routine Operation and
Maintenance Perform software related installation and
Lecture, Lab, Demo 2d upgrade procedure.
maintenance.
Target Audience Perform the Routine Operation and
Maintenance including authorization
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line
management, system information
Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance
management, alarm management, trace
Engineer
management ,log management, license
Prerequisites management ,patch management ,data
backup and restore.
A general understanding of mobile
communication and data Duration
communication.
2 working days
Successful completion of the program
EPC Principle Training. Class Size

Training Programs
5.6.2 UGW9811 Data Configuration Training
UGW9811 Routine Operation and

Training Path
Maintenance Training.
UGW9811 (GGSN) Data Configuration Objectives

(2G/3G)
Lecture, Lab, Demo 5d
Perform configuration of Gn/Gp, Ga and
Target Audience Gi interfaces and route.
Perform data Describe basic concept of
Field Maintenance Engineer, Routine VPN, APN and charging.
Maintenance Engineer, Second line
Perform configuration of VPN, APN and
Maintenance Engineer, Senior Maintenance
charging.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
5 working days
communication and data Class Size
communication.
Min 6, Max 12
Successful completion of the program of
Training Programs
5.6.3 USN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA)

structure of USN9810.
USN ATCA platform Operation and
Maintenance Training(2G/3G/4G) Perform software related installation and
Lecture, Lab, Demo 3d upgrade procedure.
maintenance.
Target Audience Perform the Routine Operation and
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line Maintenance including security
Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance management, system information
Engineer management, alarm management, trace
management, data management, license
Prerequisites management, performance
management.
communication and data Duration
communication.
3 working days
EPC Principle Fundamental Training. Class Size

Training Programs
5.6.4 USN9810 Data Configuration Training
USN ATCA platform Operation and

Training Path
USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration Objectives

Training (2G/3G)
Lecture, Lab, Demo 9d
Perform configuration of USN hardware.
Target Audience Perform configuration of USN Gb, Iu-PS,
Gn, Ga and Gr interfaces.
Field Maintenance Engineer, Second line
Perform configuration of USN basic
service.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
9 working days
communication.
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.6.5 PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training
1 years related experience in PS

Training Path
equipment maintenance.
Successful completion of the program of
PS Alarm Monitoring and Management
GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training.
Lecture, Lab, Demo 1d Objectives

Target Audience participants will be able to:
Understand basic alarm.
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line
Understand basic method of alarm
monitoring and management.
Engineer
Duration
Prerequisites
1 working day
communication.
Min 6, Max 12
Get familiar with TCP/IP.
Training Programs
5.7 GSM-R OSS Training
5.7.1 iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance Training(BSS)
security.
Training Path
Describe the performance specifications
of the M2000 system, including system
iManager M2000 System Overview
capacity, bandwidth, storage capacity,
Lecture 0.5d
processing capability, and client number.
Describe the alarm categories and levels
iManager M2000 Client Monitor and in M2000 system.
Maintenance
1d
Describe the alarm processing ability
Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
supported by the M2000 server.
Browse and query the current alarms in
iManager M2000 Client Performance and
M2000 clients.
Maintenance
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d Manage the alarm level and name in
M2000 and NE.
Target Audience Describe the performance counter and
object categories in M2000system.
All wireless engineer
Query the performance result by the
M2000 Alarm Operation and
setting conditions.
Maintenance Technician and Engineer
Export the performance result files.
M20000 Performance Operation and
Maintenance Technician and Engineer Check the performance task status.
Query the NE configuration data from
M2000 client.
Prerequisites Configure data to NE from M2000 client.
Having basic knowledge in Describe the performance counter
telecommunication and mobile categories and the difference between them.
communication Describe the performance object
categories.
Objectives
Query the performance result by the
On completion of this program, the setting conditions.
participants will be able to: Export the performance result file.
Describe the overall architecture, Define the performance query template.
hardware architecture, software architecture, Check the performance task status.
typical configuration and interfaces of the
M2000
Describe the software structure of the Duration
M2000 equipment, the functions of different 2 working days
parts.
Describe the system reliability of the
M2000 system from the aspects of system
Training Programs
Class Size
Min 6Max12
Training Programs
5.7.2 iManager M2000V200R013 PS Operation and Maintenance Training
Describe the overall architecture,

Training Path
hardware architecture, software
architecture, typical configuration and
M2000 Routine Operation and interfaces of the M2000.
Lecture, Lab 2d
Describe the software structure of the
M2000 equipment, the functions of
different parts.
Target Audience Describe the system reliability of the

M2000 system from the aspects of
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line system security.
Perform the Routine Operation and
Engineer Maintenance of M2000 client.
2 working days
data communication.
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.7.3 iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (SUN)
management commands
Training Path
Describe files system structure
Perform system management operation
iManager M2000 System Solution and
Networking Describe Sybase15 database modules
Lecture 0.5d Describe Sybase15 database operation
commands
Implement start and stop data process
iManager M2000 Operation System and Master how to import and export
Database Management (SUN) database
Lecture, Lab 1d Describe M2000 SUN Single Server
network system structure, logical,
hardware, software structure
iManager M2000 Server Operation and List M2000 server file system composing
Maintenance (SUN HA)
List M2000 system user type
Lecture, Lab 1d
Perform powering on/powering off the
M2000, monitoring system status,
M2000 database management, system
iManager M2000 Administrator Operation backup and restore
Perform M2000 routine maintenance
Lecture, Lab, Demo, 2.5d
Discussion tasks
Describe M2000 SUN HA network
system structure, logical, hardware,
Target Audience
software structure
M2000 Server maintenance engineer List M2000 server file system composing
List M2000 system user type
Prerequisites
Perform powering on/powering off the
Master Solaris basic operations M2000, managing cluster resources,
Master Sybase database basic monitoring system status, M2000
operations database management, system backup
and restore
Objectives
Perform M2000 routine maintenance
On completion of this program, the tasks
participants will be able to: Describe user type in M2000 system
Know M2000 hardware and software Master how to create, modify, delete
structure user information
Describe M2000 software modules Manage user group in M2000 system
structure and modules functions Manage user network right and
List M2000 server typical configuration operation right
Describe M2000 server networking Complete monitor user state
Describe Solaris 10 system Complete M2000 system log
Training Programs
management Master the methods and steps of M2000
Master NEs status checking methods system emergency maintenance
Describe M2000 system software Know M2000 dangerous operations
structure Master normal Trouble Shooting
Describe system software updating methods
procedure and methods Describe Northbound interface functions
Perform NEs mediation software in M2000 system
installation and updating
Duration
Describe M2000 system Backup and
Restore base knowledge 5 working days
Master how to backup and restore
Class Size
M2000 data
Know the base knowledge of M2000 Min 6, Max 12
system emergency maintenance
List M2000 system emergency scene
Training Programs
5.7.4 iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)
function of OSMU
Training Path
Master the system management of
OSMU
iManager M2000System Overview - ATAE
Cluster Master the equipment management,
WP31 Lecture 0.5d service management, software
management, general maintenance
OSMU
iManager M2000 Operation System and Master the method to backup and
Database Management (ATAE Cluster)
restore the different data types of ATAE
WP32 Lecture, Lab 1d Cluster
Describe Northbound Interface Definition
and Function
Perform Northbound Interface
iManager M2000 ATAE Cluster Server
Operation and Maintenance Interconnection Commissioning
WP33 Lecture, Lab 1.5d Handle Northbound Interface Common
Troubleshooting
Explain the meaning of OM user, NE
Target Audience user, mode 1, mode 2 NE
Manage OM user and NE user
Network management operator
Set security policy parameters
Prerequisites Monitor the user status
Having basic knowledge in Describe Oracle storage and SQL
telecommunication and mobile language
communication Describe M2000 database
Perform the M2000 database Usage
Objectives
viewing
On completion of this program, the Describe the concept and features of
participants will be able to: SUSE Linux system
Describe the basic concepts and Perform common operating system
principles of ATAE cluster commands
Describe the ATAE hardware structure
Duration
and its function
Map between principles and the 3 working days
corresponds hardware module
Class Size
Master the networking and typical
application scenario of ATAE Cluster Min 6, Max 12
scheme
Describe the system structure and basic
Training Programs
5.8 GSM-R RNP&RNO
5.8.1 GSM-R Radio Network Design and Planning Training
Interpret the structure of the antenna

Training Path
equipments
Interpret the features of the antenna
GSM-R RNP System Overview
equipments
Lecture 0.25d Implement selecting the suitable
antenna type
Outline the key specifications of antenna
Implement GSM-R radio network
GSM-R Antenna Basics
coverage planning
Lecture 0.75d Explain the link budget model and its
application
Explain the advance technology for
improving coverage
GSM-R Radio Network Planning
Implement GSM-R radio network traffic
Lecture 2d capacity planning on
TCHF/TCHH/SDCCH
Explain the capacity enhancement
Target Audience technology
GSM-R Radio Network Planning Engineers Describe the paging ability of radio
network
Prerequisites Explain GSM-R frequency resource, C/I
Basic knowledge of mobile conception, frequency reuse definition,
communications and frequency tighten reuse technology
and its application
Objectives
Duration
Describe the theory of radio signal Class Size
propagation
Min 6, Max 12
Describe the radio signal propagation
model
Training Programs
5.8.2 GSM-R Radio Network Optimization Training
GSM wireless network optimization

Training Path
Objectives
GSM-R Radio Interface
Lecture 1d participants will be able to:
Describe the function of each kind of
logical channel
Describe the general radio signal
GSM-R BSS Signaling Flow process on Um interface
Lecture 1d State the techniques used on Um
interface
Describe typical GSM-R communication
flow
GSM-R BSC600 Cell Parameters
Perform the operation for interface
Lecture, Lab 1d message trace
Identify the messages on A interface and
Abis interface
GSM-R BSS Handover Algorithm Analysis the messages on A interface
and Abis interface
Lecture 1d Explain the important message
parameters
Identify the fault by the method of
GSM-R Traffic Statistics Analysis analyzing the signaling flow
List the MS behaviors in idle mode
Lecture, Lab 0.5d
Describe the parameters associated with
MS behaviors in idle mode
Describe the operations about
GSM-R Radio Network Performance performance management based on
Management
M2000
Lecture 0.5d
Interpret the general analysis procedure
of traffic analysis
Interpret the functions of some typical
Target Audience
counters
GSM-R Radio Network Optimization
Duration
Engineers
5 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
communications Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.8.3 GSM-R Radio Network Analysis Training

Training Path
Describe the key KPIs of TCH/SDCCH
call drop
Summarize the typical problems of call
Lecture, Case 2d drop in realistic network
Analyze the main reasons of call drop
Describe the key KPIs of handover
Target Audience Summarize the typical problems of
handover failure in realistic network
Analyze the main reasons of handover
Engineers
failure
Prerequisites Study the cases
Completion of the following program(s): Duration
GSM-R BSC6000 Radio Network
2 working days
Optimization Training,
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.9 eLTE Principle Training
5.9.1 eLTE Basic Principle Training
Training Path releases

Describe the radio interface techniques
Explain the difference between the FDD
eLTE Basic Principle
and TDD mode
Lecture 1d Describe the flexible spectrum usage
Outline the concepts of channel coding
Describe the principle for OFDM
Target Audience Have a good understanding of the
Service Engineer OFDMA/SC-FDMA principle, signal
Service Design Engineer generation and processing
Network Design Engineer Explain the pros and cons with OFDMA
and SC-FDMA
Prerequisites Outline the radio interface protocols
Attendees should have a general Detail the time-domain and frequency-
knowledge in cellular systems and radio domain structure in the radio interface in
technology. UL and DL for both FDD and TDD mode
Objectives Duration

Class Size
Describe the evolution of cellular
networks Min 6, Max 12
Summarize the evolution of 3GPP
Training Programs
5.9.2 eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Training
Have basic knowledge of mobile

Training Path
network.
eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Objectives

Training
Lecture 1d
Outline the EPC network structure.
Target Audience Describe the EPC network interface and
protocol.
All Technical and non-Technical Personnel
Describe the EPC network working
Prerequisites procedures.
A general understanding of mobile Duration

communication and data
1 working days
communication.
Be familiar with Windows operation Class Size
system.
Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.10 eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training
5.10.1 eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview Training

Describe mobile network evolution.
eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview Describe the network structure of E-
Training UTRAN/EPC
Lecture 1d Describe the interface and protocol of E-
UTRAN
Describe wireless interface technology
Target Audience
principle such as OFDM,MIMO and so on
System Engineer Describe LTE channel structure , wireless
General Manager frame structure
Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in Duration
telecommunication and mobile
1 working days
communication
On completion of this program, the Min 6Max 12

Training Programs
5.10.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Trunking)
Training Path Know about eNodeB application

scenarios and typical configuration
eNodeB Product Description(Trunking) Powering up/down the eNodeB and
connect up LMT to the node
Lecture 0.5d Finding the alarm list of eNodeB
Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB
eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Finding Faulty Hardware units and
(Trunking) replace them
Lecture,hand-on exercise 1.5d Understand the operation and
maintenance system structure
Complete login eNodeB O&M system
Target Audience
Know eNodeB equipment management
System Engineer
Know eNodeB transmission management
Service Engineer
Master eNodeB wireless management
Prerequisites Backup eNodeB configuration file
Having basic knowledge in
Duration
communication 2 working days0.75d for hand-on exercise

Master eNodeB product description
Understand eNodeB product structure
Training Programs
5.10.3 eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Trunking)

Master eNodeB data configuration
operation
eNodeB Data Configuration (Trunking) Master eNodeB data modification
operations
Lecture, hand-on exercise 2d
Install LMT software
Install eOMC910 client software
Target Audience
Use LMT login eNodeB
System Engineer Use eOMC 910 client and eNodeB
Service Engineer Execute MML in single mode
Prerequisites Execute MML in batch mode
Having basic knowledge in Duration

communication 2 working days1d for hand-on exercise

Training Programs
5.10.4 eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Trunking)
troubleshooting flow
Training Path
Perform the alarm management and
analysis
eNodeB Troubleshooting(Trunking)
Perform the log collection
Lecture 1d Draw hardware fault handling procedure
Handle with the main faults of device
level
Target Audience Draw transport fault handling procedure
Handle with the main faults of transport
System Engineer
level
Service Engineer
Draw radio fault diagnosis process
Prerequisites Check the eNodeB radio configuration
Successful completion of the following Check quality on the air interface
courses: Check the EPC configuration
eLTE System Overview Handle with the main faults of radio level
eNodeB Product Description
Duration
eNodeB Data Configuration
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Outline the procedure of eNodeB
Training Programs

eCNS210 System Overview
Understand eCNS210 system and
Lecture 1d
hardware structure
Understand eCNS210 logical structure
Target Audience Understand eCNS210 internal data flow
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance Duration

1 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
Having EPC basic principle technology
knowledge, and having basic knowledge Min 6Max 12
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.
Training Programs
5.10.6 eCNS210 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Understand eCNS210 system and

hardware structure
eCNS210 Routine Operation and Understand software installation and
Maintenance upgrading process
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise 2d Complete eCNS210 hardware operation
and data configuration
Target Audience
Complete eCNS210 equipment routine
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Complete eCNS210 basic equipment
Having EPC basic principle technology Duration

knowledge, and having basic knowledge
2 working days,0.5 day for exercise
communication. Class Size
Objectives Min 6Max 12
Training Programs
5.10.7 eCNS210 Data Configuration Training
Training Path Understand eCNS210 system and

hardware structure
eCNS210 Data Configuration Understand software installation and
upgrading process
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise 2d Complete eCNS210 hardware operation
Target Audience
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Complete eCNS210 basic equipment
Having EPC basic principle technology Duration

2 working days,1day for hand-on exercise
communication. Class Size
Training Programs
5.10.8 eOMC910 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Familiar the routine operation

Familiar the concrete application
eOMC910 Operation and Maintenance Familiar operation maintenance client
Training
related installation and uninstallation
Lecture 2d Grasp the elementary operation of
operation maintenance client
Target Audience Familiar the functional modules of
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance operation maintenance client
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Grasp the operation of control panel
Grasp the maintenance routine
Prerequisites
Familiar operation terminal related
Be familiar with communication network installation and uninstallation
management technology.
Grasp the elementary operation of
Objectives operation client
Familiar the Concrete application of
Objectives operation client
On completion of this program, the Familiar prepare works for eOMC910
participants will be able to: product complete
Grasp the Network element of eOMC910 Familiar eOMC910 product complete
control. flow
Familiar physical structure and software
structure of eOMC910. Duration
Familiar service and skill of eOMC910.
Understand technical specifications of
eOMC910 Class Size
Familiar Client terminal related
Min 6, Max 12
installation and uninstallation
Training Programs
5.10.9 Dispatching System Operation and Maintenance Training

Describe system structure and structure
Dispatching System Product Training
of eAPP.
Perform hardware installation procedure.
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise, Demo 1d Perform Commissioning of eAPP.
Perform the routine operation and
maintenance.
Target Audience
Duration
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers 1 working day

Basic understanding of trunking Min 6, Max 12
knowledge.
Objectives

Training Programs
5.10.10 Terminal Operation Training(Trunking)

Master the terminal product structure
Terminal Operation Training(Trunking) Understand EG860 hardware installation
Complete EG860 business
Lecture, Demo 1d commissioning
Complete terminal business
Target Audience demonstration
1 working day
Prerequisites
Basic understanding of trunking Class Size

knowledge. Min 6, Max 12
Objectives

Training Programs
5.10.11 eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path UnderstandeSCN230 system and

hardware structure
eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Understand software installation and
Training
upgrading process
Lecture 1d Complete eSCN230 hardware operation
Target Audience
Complete eSCN230 equipment routine
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Complete eSCN230 basic equipment

knowledge, and having basic knowledge Duration
1working days
communication.

Training Programs
5.10.12 eSCN230 Data Configuration Training
Training Path UnderstandeSCN230 system and

hardware structure
eSCN230 Data Configuration Understand software installation and
upgrading process
Lecture 1d Complete eSCN230 hardware operation
Target Audience
Complete eSCN230 equipment routine
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Complete eSCN230 basic equipment

knowledge, and having basic knowledge Duration
1working days
communication.

Training Programs
5.10.13 eLTE Rapid Solution Training

eLTE Rapid System Overview
Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid
Lecture 0.25d
System overview.
eLTE Rapid System Installation and
Commissioning System Logical structure.
Lecture 1.25d
System Products components
eSCN231 Operation and Maintenance
System Typical Application Scenarios
Lecture 1d System Hardware Composition
System Installation Procedure.
eOMC910 Client Operation and Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid
Maintenance System Commissioning and Maintenance
Lecture,Hand-on Exercise 1d Grasp the elementary operation of
operation client of eOMC
Dispatching System Operation and Familiar the Concrete application of
Maintenance Training operation client of eOMC
Lecture,Hand-on Exercise 1d Perform the eMDC routine operation
and maintenance.
Master the terminal product
Terminal Operation structure
Complete EP680/EG860 business
Leture,Hand-on Exercise 0.5d commissioning
Complete terminal business
demonstration
Target Audience
Duration
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers 5 working day

Be familiar with communication network Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.11 eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training
5.11.1 eLTE Broadband Access System Overview Training
Training Path Describe mobile network evolution.

Describe the network structure of E-
eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview UTRAN/EPC
Training Describe the interface and protocol of E-
Lecture 1d UTRAN
Describe wireless interface technology
principle such as OFDM,MIMO and so on
Target Audience
Describe LTE channel structure , wireless
System Engineer frame structure
General Manager
Prerequisites
Duration
1 working days
communication Class Size
Training Programs
5.11.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Access)
Training Path Know about eNodeB application

scenarios and typical configuration
eNodeB Product Description(Access) Powering up/down the eNodeB and
connect up LMT to the node
Lecture 0.5d Finding the alarm list of eNodeB
Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB
eNodeB Operation and Maintenance(Access) Finding Faulty Hardware units and
replace them
Lecture,hand-on exercise 1.5d Understand the operation and
maintenance system structure
Complete login eNodeB O&M system
Target Audience
Know eNodeB equipment management
System Engineer
Know eNodeB transmission management
Service Engineer
Master eNodeB wireless management
Prerequisites Backup eNodeB configuration file
Duration
communication
2 working days0.75d for hand-on exercise
Objectives
Min 6Max 12
Master eNodeB product description
Understand eNodeB product structure
Training Programs
5.11.3 eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Access)

Master eNodeB data configuration
operation
eNodeB Data Configuration (Access) Master eNodeB data modification
operations
Lecture, hand-on exercise 2d Install LMT software
Install eOMC910 client software
Use LMT login eNodeB
Target Audience
Use NMS client to manage eNodeB
System Engineer Execute MML in single mode
Service Engineer Execute MML in batch mode
Prerequisites
Duration
telecommunication and mobile 2 working days1d for hand-on exercise
communication Class Size
Objectives
Min 6Max 12
Training Programs
5.11.4 eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Access)
troubleshooting flow
Training Path
Perform the alarm management and
analysis
eNodeB Troubleshooting(Access)
Perform the log collection
Lecture 1d Draw hardware fault handling procedure
Handle with the main faults of device
level
Target Audience Draw transport fault handling procedure
Handle with the main faults of transport
System Engineer
level
Service Engineer
Draw radio fault diagnosis process
Prerequisites Check the eNodeB radio configuration
Successful completion of the following Check quality on the air interface
courses: Check the EPC configuration
eLTE System Overview Handle with the main faults of radio level
eNodeB Product Description
Duration
eNodeB Data Configuration
1 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Outline the procedure of eNodeB
Training Programs

eCNS210 System Overview
Lecture 1d
hardware structure
Understand eCNS600 logical structure
Target Audience Understand eCNS600 internal data flow

1 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
knowledge, and having basic knowledge Min 6Max 12
communication.
Training Programs

eCN600 Routine Operation and participants will be able to:
Maintenance
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise 2d
maintenance
Target Audience Complete eCNS600 basic equipment
management
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Duration
Prerequisites 2 working days,1 day for exercise
Class Size
in telecommunication and mobile Min 6Max 12
communication.
Training Programs

eCNS600 Data Configuration hardware structure
Understand software installation and
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise 2d upgrading process
Complete eCNS600 hardware operation
Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance Complete eCNS600 service data
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers configuration
Prerequisites
Duration
in telecommunication and mobile Class Size
communication.
Min 6Max 12
Objectives

Training Programs
5.11.8 U2000 Client Operation and Maintenance Training
Create NE and subnet in U2000 systems

Training Path
Manage the NE state in U2000 system
U2000 Operation and Maintenance Know user type in U2000
Training Create, modify and delete user
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise 2d information
Manage the user group in U2000
Target Audience Manage user NE authority and U2000
Wireless Engineer authority
U2000 operation and maintenance Monitor user state
technicians, engineers Query system log
Prerequisites Check NE healthy state
Be familiar with communication network Duration

2 working day,1day for hand-on exercise
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6Max 12
Training Programs
5.11.9 Terminal Operation Training(Access)

Terminal Operation Training(Access)
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise 1d Master teminal product system structure
Complete terminal hardware installation
Complete terminal commissioning
Target Audience
Duration
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance 1 working day
Class Size
Prerequisites
Be familiar with communication access Min 6Max 12
communication technology.
Training Programs

eCNS610 Operation and Maintenace
Lecture,Hand-on Exercise 1d
hardware structure
upgrading process
Target Audience Complete eCNS610 equipment routine
maintenance
Complete eCNS610 basic equipment
management
Prerequisites
Duration
knowledge, and having basic knowledge 1 working day
Class Size
communication.
Min 6Max 12
Training Programs

eCNS610 Data Configuration Training
Lecture,Hand-on Exercise 1d
hardware structure
upgrading process
Target Audience Complete eCNS610 hardware operation
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers Duration
Class Size
in telecommunication and mobile Min 6Max 12
communication.
Training Programs
5.12 eLTE RNP&RNO Training
5.12.1 eLTE Trunking Radio Network Planning and Optimizing Overview Training
principle
Training Path
Know about LTE Protocols and
Procedures
eLTE Radio RNO&RNP Overview
Objectives
Lecture 0.5d
Brief the main functions of Non Access
Antenna Introduction Stratum(NAS), Radio Resource Control
Lecture 0.5d (RRC), Packet Data Convergence
Protocol (PDCP) Radio Link Control
(RLC), Medium Access Control (MAC),
Target Audience the physical layer and their relations
Service Planning Engineer Duration

Service Design Engineer 1 working days
Network Design Engineer
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
Know about LTE Basic communication
Training Programs
5.12.2 eLTE Trunking Radio Network Design and Dimensioning Training
Perform eLTE radio network coverage

Training Path
dimensioning
Perform eLTE link budget
eLTE Radio Network Design
Describe propagation model
Lecture 1d Perform site number dimensioning
Outline capacity dimensioning procedure
Describe traffic model and parameters
Target Audience Perform radio network throughput
calculation
Service Planning Engineer
Analysis DL Throughput
Service Design Engineer
Analysis UL Throughput
Perform throughput per cell(IP)
Prerequisites dimensioning
Successful completion of the following Perform capacity dimensioning
courses: Outline frequency planning
LTE Air Interface Outline TA planning
LTE Protocols and Procedures Outline PCI planning
Outline PRACH planning
Objectives
Duration
Outline eLTE radio network planning
Class Size
Describe eLTE radio network planning
Process Min 6, Max 12
Training Programs
5.12.3 eLTE Trunking Radio RF Network Optimizing Training
Describe fault diagnosis process

Training Path
Perform operations of fault diagnosis
Perform checking hardware connections
eLTE trunking Radio RF Network Optimize
Perform checking version mapping
Lecture 1d Perform checking the eNodeB
configuration
Perform checking quality on the air
Target Audience interface
Describe time and frequency resources
Service Planning Engineer
and throughput calculation
Service Design Engineer
Describe throughput fault diagnosis
procedures and methods
Network Optimize Engineer
Describe processes of data transmission
Prerequisites fault diagnosis
Describe basic requirements for fault
Successful completion of the following
diagnosis
courses:
Perform diagnosis for locating downlink
LTE Air Interface
data transmission faults
LTE Protocols and Procedures
Perform diagnosis for uplink problems
Objectives
Duration
1 working days
Perform handover fault analysis Class Size
Describe typical case of handover fault
Min 6, Max 12
Describe basic principle of access
6 Network Energy Training Solution
6.1 Training Path
6.1.1 Telecom Energy Training Path

Training Training
Power3000 System Design Minishelter(ITS1000M)
Training System Operation and
2d Maintenance Training 2d
Power3000 System
Training 4d
PowerCube1000 System
Operation and
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include Minishelter, Power3000, PowerCube1000 products trainings.
6.1.2 Data Center Energy Training Path

Training Training
IDS1000 Container Data HCS-Field-UPS Huawei
Center Operation and UPS Specialist Certification
Maintenance Training 2d Training 5d
IDS2000 Modular Data

Center Operation and
UPS Operation and

2d
Elective Guide
The training programs in the path include IDS1000, IDS2000 and UPS products trainings.
Enterprise Network Energy Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
UPS Specialist Certification Training Programs
HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Specialist 6~12

5
Certification Training
Power Supply Product Training Programs
Minishelter(ITS1000M) System Operation and 6~12

2
Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and 6~12

4
Power3000(DC Power) System Design Training 2 6~12
PowerCube1000 System Operation and 6~12

4
Data Center Facility Product Training Programs
IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and

2 6~12
IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and

5 6~12
UPS Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6~12
Level Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert

Course
6.4 UPS Specialist Certification Training Programs
6.4.1 HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Specialist Certification Training
Training Path
Master the installation and debugging points, site
HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Field Specialist work content, attention matters of UPS product
Certification and Storage battery
OUPS13 Master the basic Fault determination method

Lecture, Hands-on 5d
exercise and thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Target Audience
Master the trouble diagnosis and treatment
Operators and maintainers methods of UPS product
Prerequisites Master the log analysis capabilities of UPS
Master the commonly testing tools usage of UPS
Have a basic knowledge of electrician
Master the commonly faulty judgment and
Objectives
processing of storage battery
5 working days
Master the application scenarios and basic
Class Size
working principle of UPS product
Master the Structure and components function of Min 6, Max 12
UPS product and Storage battery
378
6.5 Telecom Energy Training Programs
6.5.1 Minishelter(ITS1000M) System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Outline the typical configurations of
Minishelter Operation and Maintenance Minishelter(ITS1000M)

Interpret the functions and specifications of
different parts.
OPS11 Lecture, Hands-on 2d
Exercise Perform hardware configuration and cables
Target Audience
connection.
Operators and maintainers Perform the installation of
Prerequisites Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.
Perform the operation of Minishelter(ITS1000M)
The program is intended for field
system.
maintenance engineers, second line or
Perform the maintenance of
technical support engineers of Minishelter
Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.
(ITS1000M) System Operation and
Maintenance Explain the common fault types.
Objectives Apply fault disposal method

Explain how to prevent the fault
On completion of this program, the Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
participants will be able to: troubleshooting practice
Outline green site solution of
Duration
Interpret the working principle of 2 working days
Minishelter(ITS1000M) system. Class Size
Interpret the basic structure of
Min 6, Max 12
379
6.5.2 Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Outline composing of power system
Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and Interpret the functions and specifications of
Maintenance different composing.
OPS12 Lecture, Hands-on 4d Outline the load capacity and ability of power
exercise system.
Target Audience
Perform DC power system operation and
Operators and maintainers maintenance, etc.
Prerequisites Perform the on-site operation, such as AC
detective-Board replacement, etc.
Have a basic knowledge of power supply
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
Objectives
troubleshooting practice
4 working days
Describe the working principle of power system
Class Size
Describe structure, functions of power system
Outline the features of power system. Min 6, Max 12
380
6.5.3 Power3000(DC Power) System Design Training
Training Path
Explain the design principle of Power 3000 (DC
Power) solution.
Power3000(DC Power) System Design
Outline the design step of Power 3000 (DC
Power) solution.
OPS21 Lecture, Hands-on 2d
exercise Perform power consumption calculation
Target Audience
Perform battery configuration design of Power
Operators and maintainers 3000 (DC Power) solution.
Planners and Designers Perform the design process, design methods of
Prerequisites Power 3000 (DC Power) solution
Duration
Class Size
381
6.5.4 PowerCube1000 System Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
different parts.
PowerCube1000 System Operation and Perform hardware configuration and cables

Maintenance connection.
OPS14 Lecture, Hands-on 4d Perform the installation of PowerCube 1000

exercise Solution.
Target Audience
Perform the operation of PowerCube 1000
Operators and maintainers Solution.
Prerequisites Perform the maintenance of PowerCube 1000
Solution.
Explain the common fault types.
Objectives
Apply fault disposal method
On completion of this program, the Explain how to prevent the fault
participants will be able to: Perform the Field operation, such as Battery
Outline the load capacity and ability of replacement.
PowerCube 1000 Solution. Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from
Interpret the working principle of PowerCube troubleshooting practice
1000 Solution. Duration
Interpret the basic structure of PowerCube 1000
Solution.
4 working days
Class Size
Outline the typical configurations of PowerCube
1000 Solution. Min 6, Max 12
Interpret the functions and specifications of
382
6.6 Data Center Facility Training Programs
6.6.1 IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Describe the installation tools of the container
IDS1000 Container Data Center DC

Operation and Maintenance Describe the installation precautions of the
container DC
OIDS11 Lecture, Hands-on 2d
exercise Describe fastness and combination
Target Audience
Describe the interconnect pipes of the container
Operators and maintainers DC
Prerequisites Describe the interconnect cables of the container
DC
None
Describe the System commission with power
Objectives
supply
On completion of this program, the Describe the Inspections and checks of the
participants will be able to: container DC
Describe the basic structure of the container DC Describe the cooling system troubleshooting
Describe the basic concepts and features of the methods
container DC Describe the power supply system
Describe the typical configurations of the troubleshooting methods
container DC Describe the fire protection system
Describe the values for consumer of the troubleshooting methods
container DC Describe the room management system alarm
Describe the technical advantages of the processing methods
container DC Duration
Describe the application scenarios of the
2 working days
container DC
Class Size
Perform the engineering surveys of the container
DC Min 6, Max 12
383
6.6.2 IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Training path Describe modular DC installation tool

Describe modular DC installation notes
IDS2000 Modular Data Center
Operation and Maintenance Describe modular DC combined cabinet
Describe modular DC fan installation
OIDS12 Lecture, Hands-on 5d
exercise Describe modular DC UPS and UPS battery
Target Audience
installation
Operators and maintainers Describe modular DC cable connection
Prerequisites Describe modular DC system power on
debugging
None
Describe modular DC inspection
Objectives
Describe modular DC UPS fault handle method
On completion of this course, the participants Describe modular DC fan fault handle method
will be able to: Describe management system alarm handle
Describe modular DC basic components methodDuration
Describe modular DC basic concept
5 working days
Describe modular DC technical features
Class size
Describe modular DC typical configuration
Describe modular DC value for consumer Min 6, Max 12
Describe modular DC application scene
384
6.6.3 UPS Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Master the operation and routine maintenance

Master the Structure and components function of
UPS Operation and Maintenance
UPS product and Storage battery
Master the installation and debugging points, site
OUPS12 Lecture, Hands-on 2d
exercise work content, attention matters of UPS product
Target Audience
and Storage battery
Operators and maintainers Master the basic Fault determination method
Prerequisites and thought of UPS product and Storage battery
Master the model selection for UPS and Storage
Have a basic knowledge of electrician battery
Objectives
Duration

Class Size
Master the application scenarios and basic
working principle of UPS product Min 6, Max 12
385
7 Transmission Network Training Solution
7.1 Training Path
7.1.1 WDM Training Path
WDM Principle Introduction WDM Fundamental Training Ethernet Fundamental Training

Prerequisites
WBT (Pre-Learning) 1H ILT/LVC 1D ILT/LVC 2D
OTN Introduction
ASON Fundamental Training
WBT (Pre-Learning) 3H
ILT//LVC 1D
Installation & Commissioning
OptiX WDM Equipment OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power

Installation Training Commissioning) Training
ILT 2D
Engineer
ILT 2D
386
OptiX NG WDM Equipment Tannsmission Based T-SDN
Installation Training Introduction to 400G Technology
Introduction
ILT 1D ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D
OptiX NG WDM Network OptiX NG WDM Network

OptiX NG WDM Synchronization
Protection (EoO/EoW) Special Protection (Packet) Special
Special Topic Training
Topic Training Topic Training
ILT 3D ILT 3D ILT 2D
OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave

OptiX NG WDM DCN Special OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor
Subrack Management Special
Topic Training System Special Topic
Topic
OptiX NG WDM ASON OptiX NG WDM T-SDN

OptiX NG WDM DCN Special
Operation & Maintenance Operation and Maintenance
O&M Engineer
Topic Training
Training Training
OptiX OSN 8800 Hardware

Description
WBT (Pre-Learning) 1.5H
OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered)

Sub-marine System Operation
ILT 5D
OptiX BWS 1600S

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) 2nd OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) 2nd (unrepeatered) Sub-marine
Line Maintenance Training Line Maintenance Training System Operation and
OptiX OSN 9800(Packet)

OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Operation and Maintenance
Training Training
ILT 5D ILT 7D
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line
Maintenance Training Maintenance Training Maintenance Training
OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta

OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line
Training
Maintenance Training Maintenance Training
ILT 3D
ILT 2D ILT 10D
OptiX OSN 1800 Hardware OptiX OSN 1800(Packet)

OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and
Description Operation and Maintenance
Training
WBT (Pre-Learning) 0.5H ILT 4D ILT 5D
OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)

OptiX OSN 1800 Network
Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance
Design Training
Training Training
OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet)

Training
ILT 5D
iManager MDS 6600 (WDM

Designer) Operation Training
ILT 4D
387
OptiX WDM Network OptiX WDM Network
Network Optimization
Assessment Training Optimization Training
Engineer ILT 2D ILT 1D
OptiX WDM Network Expansion OptiX WDM Network

Training Reconstruction Training
ILT 2D ILT 3D
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(WDM)

OptiX WDM Network Design Network Planning and Design
Network Planning & Design Engineer
Training Training
ILT 3D ILT 4D
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network
Design Basic Training
ILT 2D OptiX NG WDM Network Design OptiX NG WDM Packet Network

Training Planning and Design Training
ILT 3D ILT 3D
OptiX BWS 1600S

(unrepeatered) Planning and
Design Training
ILT 3D
Mobile Backhaul
OptiX NG WDM Product IP-oriented Transport Solution
Synchronization Solution
Technical Manager
Overview Training Training

Introduction Training
ILT/LVC 0.5D ILT /LVC 0.5D ILT/LVC 2D
40G/100G Coherent OTU OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OSN 1800 Based Metro Network
Technology OTU Technology Solution Training
WBT (Pre-Learning) 1H ILT /LVC 0.5D ILT/LVC 2D
The WBT indicates optional module
388
7.1.2 RTN Training Path
Prerequisites Digital Microwave Principle OptiX RTN 900 Hardware OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN
Introduction Description Features Introduction
WBT(Pre-Learning 2H WBT(Pre-Learning 1H WBT(Pre-Learning 2H
OptiX RTN 900 Packet Service

Introduction
WBT(Pre-Learning 2H
Network Planning & Design
OptiX RTN 900 Network

OptiX RTN Network OptiX RTN 900 Network
Planning Advanced
Planning Basic Training Planning Training
Training
ILT/LVC 2D ILT/LVC 4D ILT/LVC 2D
OptiX RTN 300 Network

Planning Training
ILT/LVC 2D
389
OptiX RTN 980L
Commissioning
OptiX RTN 900 Installation OptiX RTN 310360380
Installation and Commissioning Installation and Installation and
Training Commissioning Training Commissioning Training
and ILT 7D ILT 7D ILT 4D
OptiX RTN 900 1st Line OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line
OptiX RTN 980L IP Long

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN
Haul Microwave Features
Features Training
Training
ILT 3D ILT 5D
OptiX RTN 310360380 1st OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd

Line Maintenance Training Line Maintenance Training
ILT 2D ILT 5D
OptiX RTN 310 Operation OptiX RTN 360 Operation OptiX RTN 380 Operation
and Maintenance Training and Maintenance Training and Maintenance Training
OptiX RTN 300

OptiX RTN 320 Operation Preconfiguration Tool and
and Maintenance Training Operation
ILT 4D ILT 0.5D
Optimization
Assessment
OptiX RTN Network OptiX RTN Network

and
Assessment Training Optimization Training

ILT 2D ILT 1D
Network Evolution
Transmission
IP-oriented Transport
and Trends
Training
Solution Training
ILT/LVC 2D
Microwave Backhaul
Technical
manager
Solution Evolution Huawei Microwave Microwave Small Cell

ILT/LVC 0.5D Solution Overview Backhaul Solution
ILT /LVC 0.5D ILT/LVC 0.5D
RTN 900 Products Advanced Training
OptiX RTN 900 ERPS OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA OptiX RTN 900 PW APS
Special Topic Training Special Topic Training Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC 0.5D ILT/LVC 0.5D ILT/LVC 0.5D
OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel OptiX RTN 900 LAG OptiX RTN 900 AM Special
APS Special Topic Training Special Topic Training Topic Training
OptiX RTN 900 iManager U2000 RTN

Preconfiguration Tool and OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Network Monitoring
OperationTraining Special Topic Training Training
KPI Analysis of Ethernet

service
ILT/LVC 0.5D
390
7.1.3 MSTP Training Path
391
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental
SDH Principle Introduction Training
WBT (Pre-Learning) 2.5H ILT/LVC 2D
Ethernet Basis SDH Fundamental Training Ethernet Fundamental Training

Prerequisites
WBT (Pre-Learning) 1H ILT/LVC 2D ILT/LVC 2D
IP Basis ASON Fundamental Training
WBT (Pre-Learning) 1H ILT//LVC 1D
OptiX OSN 1500250035007500

Hardware Description
WBT (Pre-Learning) 1H
OptiX NG SDH & OCS

Installation & Commissioning Engineer
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS

Equipment (TDM)
Installation Training
ILT 2D ILT 5D
OptiX NG SDH Equipment

(Packet) Commissioning
Training
ILT 5D

(Packet+TDM) Commissioning
Training
ILT 8D
OptiX NG SDH & OCS OptiX NG SDH & OCS

Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line
OptiX NG SDH & OCS ILT 15D ILT 13D
Equipment (TDM) 1st Line
OptiX NG SDH & OCS OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced
ILT 2D Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation and Maintenance
Operation Training Training
ILT 12D ILT 4D

(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
(Packet) 1st Line Maintenance ILT 12D
Training
ILT 2D OptiX NG SDH Equipment
(Packet) NMC Operation
Training
ILT 10D OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation
OptiX NG SDH Equipment ILT 3D

(Packet+TDM) NMC Operation
O&M Engineer
Training
ILT 15D
(Packet+TDM) 1st Line
ILT 3D (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line
ILT 18D
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)

Training
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 TP-Assist Operation and
ILT 4D
(Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid
Maintenance Training MSTP)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580
(Packet) Operation and ILT 8D ILT 1D
ILT 5D
392
Optimization
Engineer
OptiX SDH Network Assessment OptiX SDH Network OptiX SDH Network Expansion
Network
Training Optimization Training and Reconstruction Training
OptiX SDH Network Design

Basic Training
ILT 2D
Network Planning &
Design Engineer
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH)

OptiX MSTP Network Design
Network Planning and Design
Training
Training
ILT 3D ILT 4D
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network

Design Training
ILT 3D
Mobile Backhaul Hybrid MSTP-Based Mobile

Technical
Manager
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS

Synchronization Solution Backhaul Evolution Solution
Product Overview Training
Introduction Training Training
7.1.4 Transmission OSS Training Path
iManager N2510 OLS iManager U2000 Operation

iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training
Operation and
and Maintenance Training for NOC BO
for NOC FO (Transmission) (Transmission)
(Transmission)
iManager U2000 Monitoring

iManager U2000 LCT iManager U2100 Operation
Training (Transmission
Operation Training and Maintenance Training
Network only)
iManager uTraffic Network

Performance Monitoring
Training(Transmission
Network Only)
ILT 2D
393
Transmission Network Training Programs are designed as follows:
Duration
Training Class
Location Size
days)
Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training
IP-oriented Transport Solution Training 2 6 ~ 12
40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology 0.5 6 ~ 12
Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction 0.5 6 ~ 12
Introduction to 400G Technology 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network Solution

0.5 6 ~ 12
Training
Mobile Backhaul Evolution and Trends Training
Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution 0.5 6 ~ 12
Huawei Microwave Solution Overview 0.5 6 ~ 12
Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution 0.5 6 ~ 12
Transmission Network Planning and Design Training
OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX MSTP Network Design Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning

4 6 ~ 12
and Design Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic

2 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX WDM Network Design Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning

4 6 ~ 12
and Design Training
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training 4 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced 2 6 ~ 12
394
Training
OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and

3 6 ~ 12
Design Training
OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and

3 6 ~ 12
Design Training
OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design Training 3 6 ~ 12
iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer) Operation

4 6 ~ 12
Training
Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training
OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction

3 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training 1 6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training 3 6 ~ 12
Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training
OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training 1 6 ~ 12
Transmission Network Principle Training
SDH Fundamental Training 2 6 ~ 12
WDM Fundamental Training 1 6 ~ 12
Ethernet Fundamental Training 2 6 ~ 12
ASON Fundamental Training 1 6 ~ 12
Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training 2 6 ~ 12
WDM Products Training
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line Maintenance

2 6 ~ 12
Training
395
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance
13 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance

12 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and

7 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and

7 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Training 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Equipment Installation Training 1 6 ~ 12
OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance

3 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance

4 6 ~ 12
Training

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet) Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training 10 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training 3 6 ~ 12
OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine

5 6 ~ 12
System Operation and Maintenance Training
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine

5 6 ~ 12
System Operation and Maintenance Training
OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning)

2 6 ~ 12
Training

7 6 ~ 12
396
OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and
3 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (EoO/EoW)

3 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Synchronization Special Topic

4 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (Packet)

2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM DCN Special Topic Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System Special

1 6 ~ 12
Topic
OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack

1 6 ~ 12
Management Special Topic
RTN 900 Products Training
OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning

7 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training 7 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training 7 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900V1R8 2nd Line Maintenance

7 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features Training 5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 980L IP Long Haul Microwave Features

3 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 980L Installation and Commissioning

7 6 ~ 12
Training
RTN 900 Products Advanced Training
OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
397
OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and

0.5 6 ~ 12
Operation Training
OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 RTN Network Monitoring Training 1 6 ~ 12
KPI Analysis of Ethernet service 0.5 6 ~ 12
RTN 300 Products Training
OptiX RTN 310360380 Installation and

4 6 ~ 12
OptiX RTN 310360380 1st Line Maintenance

2 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd Line Maintenance

3 6 ~ 12
Training

0.5 6 ~ 12
Operation
OptiX RTN 320 Operation and Maintenance

4 6 ~ 12
Training

4 6 ~ 12
Training

4 6 ~ 12
Training

4 6 ~ 12
Training
MSTP Products Training
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview

0.5 6 ~ 12
Training
OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training 2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM)

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line

2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC 12 6 ~ 12
398
Operation Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line

15 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line

13 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet)

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line

2 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC

10 6 ~ 12
Operation Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line

12 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM)

8 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line

3 6 ~ 12
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC

15 6 ~ 12
Operation Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line

18 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and

4 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation

8 6 ~ 12
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and

4 6 ~ 12
OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance

3 6 ~ 12
Training
TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance Training

1 6 ~ 12
(Hybrid MSTP)
Transmission Network OSS Training
399
iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission
1 6 ~ 12
Network only)
iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training 1 6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 OLS Operation and Maintenance

1 6 ~ 12
Training (Transmission)
iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance

2 6 ~ 12
Training for NOC FO (Transmission)

3 6 ~ 12
Training for NOC BO (Transmission)

5 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager uTraffic Network Performance Monitoring

2 6 ~ 12
Training (Transmission Network Only)
Transmission Engineer Certification
Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission

15 6 ~ 12
Technologies and Device Training
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building

10 6 ~ 12
Carrier MSTP Transmission Network Training
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building

10 6 ~ 12
Carrier OTN Transmission Network Training
400
7.4 Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Programs
7.4.1 IP-oriented Transport Solution Training
Hybrid MSTP Network Overview On completion of this program, the

OTA08 Lecture 0.5d Describe the background of OptiX Hybrid
MSTP
Explain the service characters of OptiX Hybrid
All IP Transport Network Solution MSTP
OTA19 Lecture 0.5d Describe the networking characters of OptiX

Hybrid MSTP
Outline the difference of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
Metro OTN Solution network from other network technology
List the trend of Metro transmission network
OTC09 Lecture 0.5d
Illustrate the features of OTN
Describe the application of Huawei OTN
products
OptiX RTN Microwave Network Overview
List the equipment types of OptiX RTN
OTF48 Lecture 0.5d Outline main functions of OptiX RTN
equipment
Target Audience Describe typical networking and protection of

OptiX RTN equipment
Technical manager
Know the typical solutions of OpiX RTN
equipment
Personnel who requires a general understanding Outline the technologies of the transmission
of Huawei OptiX RTN equipment and solution network for All-IP service
Describe the solutions for All-IP network
Prerequisites
Compare the All-IP transport solutions and
Having the basic knowledge about figure out the difference
telecommunications network, especially Duration
transmission network.
Having the experience for telecommunications 2 working days
equipment Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
401
7.4.2 40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology

Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G
OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OTU transmission
Technology
OTC81 0.5d Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK
Lecture
modulation method
Target Audience Describe the basic principle of coherent
detection
Technical manager
List the main functions and features of the
Prerequisites
40G/100G coherent OTU board
Having the basic knowledge for Duration
communication network
0.5 working day
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
402
7.4.3 Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction
Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction On completion of this program, the

OTC156 Lecture 0.5d Understand the development and origin of T-
SDN
Target Audience Describe the T-SDN structure
Technical manager Understand the application scenarios of T-SDN
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP

0.5 working day
technology Class Size
Having experience of IP, WDM network
Min 6, Max 12
operation and maintenance
403
7.4.4 Introduction to 400G Technology
Training Path operation and maintenance

Objectives
Introduction to 400G Technology
OTC157 Lecture 0.5d
Understand the key technologies of 400G
Target Audience
Duration
Technical manager
0.5 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
404
7.4.5 OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network Solution Training
OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network On completion of this program, the
Solution participants will be able to:
OTC181 Lecture 0.5d
List the future direction of Transmission
network.
Target Audience
List the value of OptiX OSN 1800 product.
Technical manager Describe the application solutions of OptiX
Prerequisites OSN1800 product.
Duration
Having working experience in WDM
transmission network 0.5 working day
Upon completion of OptiX OSN 1800 2nd Line Class Size
Maintenance Training or having equivalent
knowledge Min 6, Max 12
Be familiar with Windows operating system
405
7.5 Mobile Backhaul Evolution and Trends Training Programs
7.5.1 Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution
Training Path
Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution
OTF87 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
Technical manager
Prerequisites
Having the basic knowledge for communication

network
Objectives

Describe mobile backhaul trends
Describe the mobile backhaul evolution
strategy based on the current network
Describe the microwave backhaul solution
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
406
7.5.2 Huawei Microwave Solution Overview
Training Path
Huawei Microwave Solution Overview
OTF88 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
Technical manager
Prerequisites

network
Objectives

Describe microwave evolution trend
Describe huawei microwave solution
Outline the features of huawei microwave
products
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
407
7.5.3 Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution

Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution
OTF89 Lecture 0.5d Describe the small cell features
Outline huawei microwave small cell backhaul
Target Audience solution

Duration
Technical manager
Prerequisites 0.5 working day
Class Size
network Min 6, Max 12
408
7.6 Transmission Network Planning and Design Training Programs
7.6.1 OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training
Training Path Describe the structure of SDH network

Outline the service types of SDH network
OptiX SDH Network Design Basics Illustrate the common protection mechanism of
OTA13 1d SDH network

Lecture, Lab
List the procedures of SDH network design
Describe the basic factors that should be
OptiX NG SDH OCS System involved in the SDH network design
Description Accomplish the SDH/PDH service design
OTA28 Lecture 1d
Illustrate the networking applications of the
OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Target Audience Describe the system structure and features of
the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
SDH network junior planning design
Outline the system protection schemes of the
engineer
Prerequisites
Duration
Having the basic knowledge of
2 working days
telecommunications and SDH network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
409
7.6.2 OptiX MSTP Network Design Training
Training Path service demand

List the procedures of SDH network design
OptiX MSTP Network Design Outline network protection types
OTA44 Lecture, Case 3d Describe the key point of complicated network

design
Target Audience Figure out the details of network reliability
design
SDH network planning design engineer
Perform SDH network design including the
Prerequisites
network reliabilty and clock trace design
Having the basic knowledge of List the factors of data service design
telecommunications and MSTP network Describe the key point of the data service
Having working experience in the planning planning according to the bandwidth
and design of MSTP networks requirement
Objectives Perform data service design in the SDH
network
Duration
Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH 3 working days
OCS system Class Size
Outline the equipment capacity of OptiX NG
Min 6, Max 12
SDH OCS system
Choose the right equipment according to the
410
7.6.3 OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training
Training Path Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH

system
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Outline the equipment capacity for packet
3d service access of OptiX NG SDH system

OTA47 Lecture, Case
Outline the common boards for packet service
Target Audience of OptiX NG SDH equipment
Hybrid MSTP network planning design
service demand
engineer
Consider all the required main points for
Prerequisites
planning a Hybrid MSTP network
Having the basic knowledge of List the procedure for designing the Hybrid
telecommunications and Hybrid MSTP MSTP network
network Perform the Hybrid MSTP network design
Having working experience in the planning Duration
and design of Hybrid MSTP networks
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
411
7.6.4 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
List the configuration of iManager MDS 6600

iManager MDS 6600 ASON (SDH)
Network Design Describe the characters of iManager MDS
OTA33 Lecture, Case 4d 6600
Perform SDH ASON network design through
Target Audience iManager MDS 6600
OptiX SDH ASON senior network planning Describe the considerations of ASON planning
design engineer List the steps of ASON planning
Prerequisites Describe the function of ASON planning tool

Accomplish SDH ASON network design
Having the basic knowledge of according to the service demand
telecommunications and SDH network
Perform data import/export operation between
Having a general knowledge of ASON iManager MDS 6600 and NMS
Having working experience in the planning Verify the import/export operation
and design of SDH networks
Duration
Objectives
4 working days
Class Size
Describe the structure of iManager MDS 6600 Min 6, Max 12
412
7.6.5 OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training
Training Path various optical components

Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design for example optical source, optical amplifiers,
Basics
2d etc
OTC47 Lecture
Describe the characteristics of optical interface
Target Audience in WDM system
Outline the functions and features of the
WDM network junior planning
different units in OptiX WDM/NG WDM
design engineer
products
Prerequisites Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM
Having a general understanding of network planning, such as power budget,
telecommunications dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation

and nonlinearity
Objectives
Outline the design process of WDM network
Describe the function module and network
2 working days
structure of WDM system Class Size
Outline the characteristics of various fibers
Min 6, Max 12
Explain the functions and characteristics of
413
7.6.6 OptiX WDM Network Design Training

Outline the functions and features of the
OptiX WDM Network Design different units in OptiX WDM products
OTC03 3d Evaluate the WDM networks including the

Lecture, Case
network architecture, protection mechanism,
Target Audience signal flow and network capacity
Analyze typical configuration of OptiX WDM
WDM network planning
series products
design engineer
Analyze the design process of WDM network
Design a complete OptiX WDM network
Prerequisites according to requirements
Having basic knowledge of Duration

telecommunications
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
414
7.6.7 OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training
Training Path Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product

capacity and features
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Describe WDM network topologies and system
3 applications
OTC31 Lecture, Case
d Outline the designing procedure of WDM
Target Audience network
Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX NG
OptiX NG WDM network planning
WDM
design engineer
Memorize the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 system
Prerequisites
capacity with different traffics
Having working experience in the planning Apply the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 system
and design of WDM products functions and configuration principles in
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM network planning
Network Design Basic Training or having Describe the designing procedure of NG WDM
equivalent knowledge FOADM network
Objectives Fulfill the hardware configuration of NG WDM

FOADM network
Duration
Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product 3 working days
networking Class Size
Outline OSN 8800/6800/3800 product
Min 6, Max 12
functions
415
7.6.8 OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path Describe NG WDM ASON network features

Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
OptiX NG WDM ASON Network Planning steps
Design
OTC36 2d Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
Lecture, Case
design
Understand the special topics of NG WDM
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner ASON network planning and design
Operation Understand NG WDM ASON network features
OTC74 Lecture, Lab 1d
Outline NG WDM ASON network planning
steps
Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Operation design
OTC75 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe features and functions of the
iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner
Target Audience
Plan WDM network
OptiX NG WDM ASON senior network Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Planner operation
planning design engineer Implement the WDM network plan by the MDS
Prerequisites 6600 WDM Planner
Outline system architecture of iManager MDS
Having working experience in the planning 6600
and design of WDM products
Describe features and functions of the
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Network Design Basic Training or having
Complete WDM network design
equivalent knowledge
Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Designer operation
Objectives
Implement the WDM network design by the
On completion of this program, the MDS 6600 WDM Designer
Outline the standards of ASON
4 working days
Illustrate the structure of ASON
Class Size
Describe the networking characters of ASON
Explain the service characters of ASON Min 6, Max 12
416
7.6.9 OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training
Digital Microwave Communication Basics On completion of this program, the

OTF01 Lecture 0.5d
Describe the concept and characters of digital
microwave communication
Describe the theory and function of every part
OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic
in the digital microwave system
OTF40 Lecture 1.5d List the networking application for digital
microwave system
Target Audience List the fadings in microwave propagation
Microwave network junior planning List the common technologies of antifading
engineer Familiar with the microwave network design

contents
Prerequisites
Know the basic information about microwave
Having a general knowledge of Digital planning
Microwave Communication
Duration
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS
and QinQ 2 working days
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet Class Size
and QoS
Min 6, Max 12
417
7.6.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training
Training Path part in the digital microwave system for

details
OptiX RTN Network Planning Know the microwave planning principles
OTF49 Lecture 1.5d Familiar the interference analysis

methods
Familiar with the principles for Ethernet
OptiX RTN Network Service Planning service and TDM service planning
(Hybrid) Know how to select the proper
OTF59 Lecture 0.5d
equipment type and functions for
different scenarios
Implement network design according to
OptiX RTN Network Service Planning
(Packet) the guideline to ensure the high and
OTF60 Lecture 0.5d efficient hybrid service delivery
service, CES service, ATM/IMA service
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning and MPLS tunnel planning
OTF51 Lecture 1d
the guideline to ensure the high and
efficient packet service delivery
Familiar with the working mechanism of
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case
Analysis clock & DCN
OTF61 Lecture 0.5d Know how to select the proper clock &
DCN mode for different scenarios
Target Audience
Familiar with the clock & DCN planning
Microwave network planning engineer guidelines
Prerequisites Implement clock & DCN design
according to the guideline to ensure the
Having a general knowledge of Digital high and efficient planning delivery
Microwave Communication Understand basic principle of frequency
Having the general knowledge of IP, planning and operation procedure.
MPLS and QinQ Master planning to reduce the skills and
Having the general knowledge of methods of relay station.
Ethernet and QoS Master planning method, which design
Objectives appropriate SD spacing to improve the
reliability of the link by planning software
antenna.
Familiar with the microwave network Duration
design contents 4 working days
Describe the theory and function of every
418
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
419
7.6.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training
Training Path clock DCN

Know how to select the proper clock
OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning DCN mode for different scenarios
Familiar with the clock DCN planning
OTF51 Lecture 1d
guidelines
Implement clock DCN design
OptiX RTN Network Planning Case according to the guideline to ensure the
Analysis high and efficient planning delivery
OTF61 Lecture 0.5d Understand basic principle of frequency
planning and operation procedure.
Master planning to reduce the skills and
OptiX RTN Network QoS Planning
methods of relay station.
OTF62 Lecture 0.5d Master planning method, which design
appropriate SD spacing to improve the
reliability of the link by planning
Target Audience
Microwave senior network planning engineer service, CES service, ATM/IMA service
Prerequisites and MPLS tunnel planning
Know how to select the proper
Having a general knowledge of Digital
equipment type and functions for
different scenarios
Having the general knowledge of IP,
MPLS and QinQ
the guideline to ensure the high and
Having the general knowledge of efficient packet service delivery
Ethernet and QoS
Duration
Be familiar with RTN product
Class Size
Familiar with the working mechanism of
420
7.6.12 OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Training
Training Path product

Objectives
OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning
OTF101 Lecture 1d participants will be able to:
Familiar with the RTN 300 network design
contents
OptiX RTN 300 Network Service Planning Know the microwave planning principles
OTF102 Lecture 0.5d Familiar the interference analysis methods

Familiar with the principles for protection and
AM planning
OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Case Familiar with the principles for Ethernet
Study
service planning
OTF103 Lecture 0.5d
Understand basic principle of frequency
planning and operation procedure.
Target Audience Implement network design after the case
analysis to ensure the high and efficient
RTN 300 Network planning engineer
service delivery
Prerequisites
Duration
2 working days
Having a good foundation of Ethernet
Class Size
knowledge Min 6, Max 12
Having the general knowledge of RTN 300
421
7.6.13 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training
Training Path Describe OptiX BWS 1600S system access

capacity
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Identify wavelength distribution and service
Planning and Design
3d process ability for OptiX BWS 1600S products
OTC71 Lecture, Case
Evaluate the network resilience, which include
Target Audience network architecture, protection mechanisms,
signal flow and network capacity
OptiX BWS 1600S senior network planning
Outline the designing procedure of OptiX BWS
design engineer
1600S network
Prerequisites
Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM BWS 1600S products
Network Design Basic Training or having Complete the exercises of OptiX BWS 1600S
equivalent knowledge network design
Objectives Duration

Describe the functions and features of OptiX
Min 6, Max 12
BWS 1600S products
422
7.6.14 OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path Outline the equipment capacity for packet

service access of OptiX NG WDM system
OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning Outline the common boards for packet service
and Design
of OptiX NG WDM equipment
OTC110 Lecture, Case 3d
Target Audience service demand
Consider all the required main points for
OptiX NG WDM packet network planning
planning a OptiX NG WDM packet network
design engineer
List the procedure for designing the OptiX NG
Prerequisites
WDM packet network
Having working experience in the planning Perform the OptiX NG WDM packet network
and design of NG WDM Packet Network design
Objectives Duration

Describe the application of OptiX NG WDM
Min 6, Max 12
packet system
423
7.6.16 OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design Training
Training Path Outline OptiX OSN 1800 product functions

Describe OptiX OSN 1800 product capacity
OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design and features
Describe OptiX OSN 1800 network topologies
and system applications
Outline the designing procedure of OptiX
Target Audience
OSN 1800 network
OptiX OSN 1800 network planning design Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX
engineer OSN 1800
Prerequisites Memorize the OptiX OSN 1800 system

capacity with different traffics
Having working experience in the planning Apply the OptiX OSN 1800 system functions
and design of WDM/MS-OTN products and configuration principles in network
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM planning
Network Design Basic Training or having Describe the designing procedure of OptiX
equivalent knowledge OSN 1800 FOADM network
Objectives Duration
Class Size
Describe OptiX OSN 1800 product
networking Min 6, Max 12
424
7.6.17 iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer) Operation Training
Training Path Network Design Basic Training or having

equivalent knowledge
OptiX NG WDM Network Design Objectives
OTC31 Lecture, Case 2d On completion of this program, the

Outline system architecture of iManager MDS
iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer)
Operation 6600.
OTC149 Lecture, Lab 2d Describe features and functions of the

iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer.
Complete WDM network design.
Target Audience
Simulate the fault and analyze the
OptiX WDM network planning design survivability for ASON network
engineer Duration
Prerequisites
4 working days
Having working experience in the planning Class Size
and design of WDM products
Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM Min 6, Max 12
425
7.7 Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training
Programs
7.7.1 OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
Training Path
SDH Network Assessment
OTA93 Lecture, Case 3d
Target Audience
OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment

Having working experience with at least 2 years in the maintenance of optical transport network
Objectives

List the main items of SDH network resource
List the main items of SDH network assessment
Describe the requirement of SDH network resource assessment
Describe the main contents about SDH service capacity and efficiency assessment
Describe the items and contents about SDH network security assessment
Describe the measures about SDH survivable network assessment
List the methods about trail usability assessment
Describe the items and contents about SDH network OM assessment
Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork assessment
Describe the methods about clock subnetwork assessment
Describe the methods about spare part assessment
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
426
7.7.2 OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training
Training Path
SDH Network Optimization
OTA94 Lecture, Case 3d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment

Having working experience with at least 2 years in the maintenance of optical transport network
Upon completion of OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
Objectives

Describe the causes and effects of discrete services
Recognize the discrete services of the network
Eliminate discrete services
Optimize the lower level cross-connection of SDH equipment
Optimize the trails to improve the network usage efficiency
Describe the items and contents about SDH network security optimization
Describe the measures about SDH survivable network optimization
List the methods about trail usability optimization
Describe the items and contents about SDH network OM optimization
Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork optimization
Describe the methods about clock subnetwork optimization
Describe the methods about spare part optimization
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
427
7.7.3 OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training
Training Path
SDH Network Expansion

Reconstruction
OTA43 Lecture, Lab 3d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Having working experience in the maintenance of SDH products

Having been attend SDH series 2nd Line maintenance training
Objectives

Outline the scenario of SDH network expansion
List the key point of network expansion
Interpret the operation of SDH network expansion
Perform SDH network expansion and verify the service interconnection
Outline the scenario of SDH network reconstruction
List the key point of network reconstruction
Interpret the operation of SDH network reconstruction
Perform SDH network reconstruction and verify the service interconnection
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
428
7.7.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Assessment
OTC72 Lecture, Case 2d
Target Audience
OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX
BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Training program
Objectives

Describe methods of assessing WDM network design performance
Analyze and assess WDM network design performance
Provide suggestions on optimizing WDM network design performance
Describe methods of assessing running performance of a WDM network
Analyze and assess running performance of a WDM network
Provide suggestions for optimizing running performance of a WDM network
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
429
7.7.5 OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Optimization
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Objectives

Describe the method for optimizing design performance of a WDM network
Describe the procedure for designing a solution to design performance optimization of a WDM network
Complete the solution to the design performance optimization of a WDM network
Describe how to optimize operating performance of a WDM network
Describe the process of optimizing operating performance of a WDM network
Design solutions to optimizing operating performance of a WDM network
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
430
7.7.6 OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Expansion
Target Audience

Prerequisites
BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX Metro 6100 Second Line
Maintenance Training program
Objectives

Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power calculation
Outline the process of OptiX WDM network expansion
Implement the indices testing during network expansion
Complete the OptiX WDM network service expansion of OTM/OADM stations
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
431
7.7.7 OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Objectives

Describe OptiX WDM system upgrade reconstruction methods, which include 2 5G upgrading to 10G, 10G
upgrading to 40G and 400G upgrading to 800G
Describe OptiX WDM equipment software upgrade methods
Describe OptiX WDM network reconstruction methods, which include the site type reconstruction, the protection
type reconstruction and wavelength reconstruction
Complete the OptiX WDM network reconstruction
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
432
7.8 Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training
Programs
7.8.1 OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training
Training Path network performance

Analyze and access microwave network
Microwave Network Performance performance
Assessment
OTF63 0.5d Complete microwave network performance
Lecture
assessment
Describe the methods about capacity
Microwave Network General Assessment assessment
Describe the methods about frequency
OTF64 Lecture 0.5d
assessment
Describe the methods about reliability
assessment
Microwave Network Assessment Case
Analysis Describe the methods about NMS DCN
OTF65 Case Study 1d assessment
Complete microwave network performance
assessment
Target Audience
Complete microwave network capacity
OptiX RTN network optimization engineer assessment
or senior maintenance engineer Complete microwave network frequency
Prerequisites assessment
Complete microwave network reliability
Be familiar with OptiX RTN series equipment
assessment
Having working experience with at least 1
Complete microwave network NMS DCN
years in the maintenance of microwave
assessment
transport network
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Describe methods of assessing microwave Min 6, Max 12
433
7.8.2 OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training
Training Path
Microwave Network Optimization
OTF66 Lecture 0.5d
Microwave Network Optimization Case

Analysis
OTF67 Case Study 0.5d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Be familiar with OptiX RTN equipment

Having working experience with at least 2 years in the maintenance of microwave transport network
Upon completion of OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training
Objectives

Describe the microwave network optimization procedure
Complete the solution to the design performance optimization of a RTN network
Describe how to optimize the capacity of a RTN network
Describe the methods about frequency optimization
Describe the methods about topology optimization
Describe the methods about NMS DCN optimization
Complete microwave network performance optimization
Complete microwave network capacity optimization
Complete microwave network frequency optimization
Complete microwave network reliability optimization
Complete microwave network NMS DCN optimization
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
434
7.9 Transmission Network Principle Training Programs
7.9.1 SDH Fundamental Training
Training Path
SDH Principle
OTA01 Lecture 1d
SDH Networking and Protection
OTA02 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
SDH series equipment operation and maintenance engineer

SDH series equipment operation and maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
NA
Objectives

Describe the structure of the SDH frame
Illustrate the multiplexing procedure of PDH signal to SDH signal
Outline the function of section and path overhead
Explain the working mechanism of the pointer
Describe the common SDH network topologies and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of linear MSP
Explain the protection mechanism of MS shared protection ring
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in ring/mesh topology
Analyze the service signal flow before/after the protection switch takes place
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
435
7.9.2 WDM Fundamental Training
Training Path
WDM Basics
OTC01 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
WDM network operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having working experience in the planning and design of WDM networks

Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training and OptiX NG WDM
Network Design Training or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

Describe the function module and network structure of WDM system
Explain the functions and characteristics of various optical components
Explain the key technologies of WDM system, for example optical source, optical amplifiers, etc
Describe the characteristics of optical interface in WDM system
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
436
7.9.3 Ethernet Fundamental Training
Training Path
Ethernet Basics
OTA03 Lecture 2d
Target Audience
Personnel who requires a general knowledge of Ethernet over SDH technology

Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of data telecommunications

Objectives

Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Explain the technical background of the Ethernet and its basic concepts
Illustrate the Ethernet frame structure
Describe the function of VLAN and L2 switching
Outline the classification of Ethernet service
Explain the function and applications of different types Ethernet service
Outline the basic concepts of data traffic
List basic concepts of network and internet
Describe the applications of familiar protocol and standard
Illustrate basic structure of IP network
Tell the basic knowledge of IP address
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
437
7.9.4 ASON Fundamental Training
Training Path
ASON Basics
OTA07 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
Technical manager, ASON operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of SDH and data telecommunications basics

Objectives

Explain the service characters of ASON
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
438
7.9.5 Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training
Training Path
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction
OTA45 Lecture 1d
Hybrid MSTP Network Application
OTA46 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer

Hybrid MSTP novice
Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of SDH and Ethernet communications basics

Objectives

Describe the classification of IP addresses
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format for Ethernet
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format for TDM E1
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product networking
Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Classify the service types of Ethernet
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
439
7.10 WDM Products Training Programs
7.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM System Description
OTC24 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX NG WDM (OTN) Field Maintenance
OTC29 Lecture, Lab 1.5d
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of WDM basics
Objectives

Describe the position of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical transport network
Describe the functions and features of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) systems
Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) systems, which include OTU, MUX/DEMUX,
OA, OSC/ESC, XCS etc
Describe the protection and features of OptiX OSN i8800(OTN) systems
Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products alarm indicators
Describe the running environment of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products
List the routine maintenance items of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products
Perform the basic maintenance operations of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products, such as board replacement,
fiber connection, optical power adjusting, etc
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products
Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager U2000/Web LCT
Perform the NE configuration, board configuration, and protection configuration of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN)
products via iManager U2000/Web LCT
Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products via iManager U2000/Web LCT
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
440
7.10.2 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
WDM Basics Be familiar with Windows operating system

Having a general knowledge of WDM
OTC01 Lecture 1d basics
Objectives
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) Hardware On completion of this program, the

Description and Application
OTC25 Lecture 2d
structure of WDM system
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d various optical components
for example optical source, optical amplifiers,
OTN Basics
etc
OTC05 Lecture 1d Describe the characteristics of optical

interface in WDM system
Describe the system structure and features of
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) systems
OptiX NG WDM Optical Layer Grooming
Describe the main functions of the boards
OTC153 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d
Outline the system protection modes of OptiX
OSN 8800(OTN) systems
List the common network topologies and
OptiX NG WDM Electrical Layer Grooming
network elements of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN)
OTC154 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d systems
Describe the network applications of OptiX
OSN 8800(OTN) systems
OptiX NG WDM Commissioning
Describe the architecture and main features
Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2.5d of U2000

OTC28
Describe the main functions of U2000
NG WDM (OTN) System Troubleshooting Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance
signals and function for different layers
OTC30 Lecture, Lab 2.5d
Outline alarm and performance events
generation mechanism
Target Audience Analyze the alarm and performance events
and locate the failures in OTN
OptiX NG WDM equipment field
maintenance engineer Describe the advantages of OTN
Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
different components function
441
Describe the main features of the optical OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) equipment
layer grooming and electrical layer grooming Perform the commissioning of supervisory
Describe OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) system channel
signal flow and fiber connection, which Perform the main path commissioning of
include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) equipment
Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in Perform indices testing during the
different network elements commissioning process
Describe the functions, architecture and the Eliminate the fault occurring during the
menus of iManager U2000 commissioning process
Implement iManager U2000 basic operations, Explain the troubleshooting ideas and
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) data configuration methods for OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products
and system management Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN
Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products 8800(OTN) troubleshooting
through iManager U2000 Describe the fault handling flow
Configure the typical protection for the Analyze and eliminate the common faults of
equipment OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products
Check the data configuration correctness and Improve the ability of eliminating faults
validity through case analysis and practice
Check the equipment running condition such Duration
as power connections, fiber connections,
mounted boards, etc 13 working days
Outline and perform the commissioning Class Size
procedure for OptiX OSN /8800(OTN)
Min 6, Max 12
equipment
Perform the single station commissioning of
442
7.10.3 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path List the main functions and features of OptiX

OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 Hardware Generalize the categories of boards
Description and Signal Flow Revie
OTC122 Lecture 0.5d
boards
Outline typical node signal flow of OptiX OSN
OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation and 8800
Maintenance Perform the commissioning for OptiX NG
OTC65 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 3d WDM systems
Describe the characteristics of various
protection types and their application
OptiX OSN 8800 (OTN) Advanced
Troubleshooting scenarios
OTC64 Lecture, Lab 3d Understand the operations related to the

OSN 8800 product protection
Fulfilled the service configuration and verify
OptiX NG WDM Ethernet Operation and the characteristics of various protection types
Maintenance
Locate and eliminate the trouble based on
maintenance rules
Illustrate troubleshooting common operation
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware, List the troubleshooting methods

Networking and Application Introduction Briefly introduce the general workflow in
OTC86 Lecture 1d OptiX OSN 8800 equipment troubleshooting
Enhance the troubleshooting analyze and
reaction ability through case discussion and
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Service
Configuration practice
OTC87 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d Explain the IP over WDM principle

Describe the Ethernet service and protection
of NG WDM equipment
Target Audience
Configure the Ethernet service and protection
OptiX NG WDM senior operation and through iManager U2000
maintenance engineer Implement the routine maintenance and
Prerequisites troubleshooting of NG WDM Ethernet service
Describe the OSN 8800 hardware
Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800
List the OSN 8800 packet boards
(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC
Describe the networking application of OSN
Operation Training
8800 (Packet)
Objectives
Illustrate the service and protection type of
On completion of this program, the OSN 8800 (Packet)
participants will be able to: Implement the data configuration through
Describe the position and networking ability iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet
of OptiX OSN 8800 service and protection
443
Duration Class Size
444
7.10.4 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training

Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN
OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology and QinQ
Introduction
OTC85 0.5d Describe the classification of IP addresses
Lecture
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware, Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
Networking & Application Introduction
Describe the OSN 8800 hardware
OTC86 Lecture 1d
List the OSN 8800 packet boards
8800 (Packet)
Configuration Illustrate the service and protection type of
OTC87 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 2d OSN 8800 (Packet)
Implement the data configuration through
iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet service
OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Features and protection
OTC88 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 1.5d Describe the function and features of QoS in
OSN 8800 (Packet)
Implement the QoS configuration through
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Routine iManager U2000
Maintenance Describe the function and features of OAM in
OTC89 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 1d
OSN 8800 (Packet)
Implement the OAM configuration through
iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) System
Troubleshooting Implement the NMS side routine maintenance
OTC90 Lecture, Lab 1d for OSN 8800 (Packet)
List the common analysis methods of packet
Target Audience network fault locating
OptiX OSN 8800 packet network operation Outline the fault handling flow
and maintenance engineer Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
Prerequisites APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc

Illustrate the application of common
Having working experience in WDM troubleshooting methods for packet network
transmission network Analyze common faulty of the OSN 8800
Upon completion of OptiX OSN (Packet) network
6800/8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance
Duration
Training or having equivalent knowledge
Be familiar with Windows operating system 7 working days
445
7.10.5 OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe the common SDH network topologies

and their features
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting Explain the protection mechanism of linear
MSP
OTA14 Lecture, Lab 2d
Explain the protection mechanism of MS
shared protection ring
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Hardware Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
Description & Application ring/mesh topology
OTC48 Lecture 1d
Analyze the service signal flow before/after the
protection switch takes place
Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) product
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Product
Configuration Configure the required
OTC49 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 2.5d SDH/Synchronization/Overhead units
Configure the typical protection for the network
and equipment
U2000 System Introduction Configure the common services for the typical
SDH networks
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d Analyze and maintain the configured
equipment/units/services
Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OCS)
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Field Maintenance
product indicators
OTC50 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 1d Describe the operation environment of OptiX
OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
Target Audience Perform the NE configuration, board
OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) operation and configuration, service provisioning and
maintenance engineer protection configuration for equipment via NMS

Perform the routine maintenance via NMS
Prerequisites
Perform the basic maintenance operations of
Be familiar with Windows operating system OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment such as
Objectives board replacement, resetting etc
Complete the routine maintenance records of
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment
U2000
OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) system
List the common analysis methods of fault
OSN 8800(OCS) system
locating
Outline the fault handling flow
OSN 8800(OCS) system
446
Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption, Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
error bit, etc from troubleshooting practice
Illustrate the application of common Duration
troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
7 working days
testing, alarm and performance events
analysis, replacement, etc Class Size
Analyze common faulty of the network consist
Min 6, Max 12
of OptiX NG SDH OCS series
447
7.10.6 OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Training
Training Path
OptiX OSN 8800 100G Operations and

Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX NG WDM relative technical training

Objectives

Describe the position and networking ability of OptiX OSN 8800
Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
Generalize the categories of boards
List different usage of the common NG WDM network node types
Describe NG WDM network application modes and main features
Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G transmission
Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK modulation method
Describe the basic principle of coherent detection
List the main functions and features of the 40G/100G coherent OTU board
Configure the common data configuration by U2000
Configure the OCh trail by U2000
Configure 100G board electrical layer services by iManager U2000
List the Items of Routine Maintenance;
Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on U2000
Implement routine operation and maintenance on NMS side
Describe the optical power commissioning requirements
List the optical power commissioning procedures
Perform the optical power commissioning for 100Gbit/s and mixed transmission system
List the items of testing the network
Master the common methods for trouble shooting
Analyze common faults
Handle typical faults
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
448
7.10.7 OptiX NG WDM Equipment Installation Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Installation
OTC133 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM network installation engineer

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge of telecommunications

Objectives

Outline the functions and features of the different units in OptiX NG WDM products
Describe the hardware installation procedure
Describe cable routing and related installation specifications for the equipment
Outline the safety precautions to be taken during the installation
Perform the hardware installation inspection according to the checklist
Duration
1 day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
449
7.10.8 OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training
Training Path
OptiX WDM Installation
OTC04 Lecture, WBT 2d
Target Audience
WDM network installation engineer

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge of telecommunications

Objectives

Outline the functions and features of the different units in OptiX WDM products
Describe the hardware installation procedure
Describe cable routing and related installation specifications for the equipment
Outline the safety precautions to be taken during the installation
Perform the hardware installation inspection according to the checklist
Duration
2 days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
450
7.10.9 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM ASON

Operation#Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM ASON operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800 (OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation Training.
Objectives

Fulfill the WDM ASON trail configuration
Complete the ASON routine maintenance items
Describe The Basic Thoughts and Methods of NG WDN ASON Fault Locating
Quickly restore interrupted ASON services under emergency conditions.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
451
7.10.10 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation &

Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 1800 operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having working experience in the maintenance of WDM products

Upon completion of OTC01 WDM Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

Describe the system structure and features of OptiX OSN 1800
Outline the system protection modes of OptiX OSN 1800
List the common network topologies and network elements of OptiX OSN 1800
Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN 1800
Check the equipment running condition such as power connections, fiber connections, mounted boards, etc
Describe OptiX OSN 1800 system signal flow and fiber connection
Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN 1800 data configuration and system management
Configure OptiX OSN 1800 through NMS
Configure the typical protection for the equipment
Check the data configuration correctness and validity
Perform the single station commissioning of OptiX OSN 1800
Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX OSN 1800
Eliminate the fault occurring during the commissioning process
Apply different troubleshooting methods according to actual faults
Perform the common troubleshooting operations of WDM network
Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of OptiX WDM network faults
Describe the fault handling flow
Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX WDM network
Improve the ability of eliminating faults through case analysis and practice
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
452
Training Path Describe the basic concepts of MPLS

OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
Introduction
OTC85 Lecture 0.5d Describe the network applications of OptiX
OSN 1800 equipment.
Explain the system structure and features of
OptiX OSN 1800 System Introduction OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.
State the main functions of the cards in the
OTC111 Lecture 1d
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.
System signal flow of OSN 1800
The protection and design principle of OSN
Configuration 1800
OTC112 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 1.5d Metro access backhaul application acenes of
OSN 1800
Key factors in networking of OSN 1800
OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Features
Describe OSN 1800 product feature (packet)
OTC113 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 1d Master packet services configuration

Outline the configuration of protection for OSN
1800 (packet)
OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) Routine Describe the function and features of QoS in
Maintenance
OSN 1800 (Packet)
OTC114 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 0.5d
Implement the QoS configuration through
iManager U2000
Describe the function and features of OAM in
Troubleshooting OSN 1800 (Packet)
OTC115 Lecture, Lab 0.5d Implement the OAM configuration through
iManager U2000
Target Audience
List the items of routine maintenance
OptiX OSN 1800 operation and Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on
maintenance engineer U2000
Prerequisites Implement routine operation and maintenance
Having working experience in the
network fault locating
maintenance of WDM products
Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
Objectives
APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc
On completion of this program, the Illustrate the application of common

participants will be able to: troubleshooting methods for packet network
Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN Analyze common faulty of the OSN 1800
and QinQ (Packet) network

453
Duration Class Size
454
7.10.12 OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe the classification of IP addresses

OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Introduction
Lecture 0.5d Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
OTC85
OSN 1800V (Packet) equipment.
OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) System Explain the system structure and features of
Introduction
OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) equipment.
OTC144 Lecture 1d
OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) equipment.
Metro access backhaul application scenes
Configuration of OSN 1800V (Packet)
OTC112 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d Describe OSN 1800V (Packet) product
feature
Master packet services configuration
OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Features
Outline the configuration of protection for
Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d OSN 1800V(Packet)

OTC113
Describe the function and features of QoS in
OSN 1800V(Packet)
OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) Routine Implement the QoS configuration through
Maintenance iManager U2000
OSN 1800V(Packet)
Troubleshooting iManager U2000
OTC115 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d List the items of routine maintenance
Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on
Target Audience U2000

Implement routine operation and
OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) operation and maintenance
maintenance engineer List the common analysis methods of packet
Prerequisites network fault locating
maintenance of WDM products Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
APS switching failed, OAM errors, etc
Illustrate the application of common
Objectives
troubleshooting methods for packet network
On completion of this program, the Analyze common faulty of the OSN 1800V
participants will be able to: (Packet) network
Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, Duration
VLAN and QinQ
5 working days
455
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
456
7.10.13 OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Check the equipment running condition such

OptiX OSN 1800V (OTN) Operation and mounted boards, etc
Maintenance
Describe OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) system
signal flow and fiber connection
Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN
Target Audience 1800V(OTN) data configuration and system
OptiX OSN 1800V (OTN) operation and management
maintenance engineer Configure OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) through

NMS
Prerequisites
Configure the typical protection for the
Having working experience in the equipment
maintenance of WDM products Check the data configuration correctness and
Be familiar with Windows operating system validity
Objectives Perform the single station commissioning of
OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)
Perform the main path commissioning of
Eliminate the fault occurring during the
commissioning process
Apply different troubleshooting methods
according to actual faults
various optical components
Perform the common troubleshooting
operations of WDM network
Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of
etc
OptiX WDM network faults
Describe the characteristics of optical
Describe the fault handling flow
interface in WDM system
Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX
WDM network
Improve the ability of eliminating faults
through case analysis and practice
Duration
OSN 1800V(OTN)
List the common network topologies and 5 working days
network elements of OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Class Size
OSN 1800V(OTN) Min 6, Max 12
457
7.10.14 OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training

Appreciate the networking applications of the
OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Hardware and OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)
Networking
OTC140 Lecture 1d
the OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)
OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Service and used on the OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)
Configuration Outline the system protection schemes of the
OTC141 Lecture, Lab 2d OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)
Outline the operation environment of OptiX
OSN 1800V(TDM) series equipment
OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Routine and
Maintenance List the status description of OptiX OSN
OTC143 Lecture 1d 1800V(TDM) equipment indicators
List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN
1800V(TDM) equipment
OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Troubleshooting Perform the basic maintenance operations of
OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) equipment
OTC142 Lecture 1d
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
OSN 1800V(TDM) equipment
Target Audience
Configure protection attributes in OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) operation and 1800V(TDM) network, such as SNCP, LMP,
maintenance engineer RMP etc

Configure services of OSN 1800V(TDM)
Prerequisites
Duration
maintenance of WDM products 5 working days
Be familiar with Windows operating system Class Size
458
7.10.15 OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description &

Application
OTC116 Lecture 1d
OptiX OSN 9800 Field Maintenance
OTC151 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
OptiX OSN 9800 equipment field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the position and networking ability of OptiX OSN 9800
List the main functions and features of OptiX OSN 9800
List the main functions and features of the boards
Outline the equipment operation precautions
Perform the basic maintenance operations
Replace the boards
List the items of routine maintenance
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
459
7.10.16 OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training
Training Path maintenance of WDM products

WDM Basics
Objectives
OTC01 Lecture 1d
OTN Basics
OTC05 Lecture 1d Outline the characteristics of various fibers
various optical components
OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OTU Explain the key technologies of WDM system,
Technology
OTC81 Lecture 0.5d
etc
Describe the characteristics of optical interface
OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description & in WDM system

Application Describe the architecture and main features of
OTC116 Lecture 2d
U2000
U2000 System Introduction Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance
signals and function for different layers
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d
Outline alarm and performance events
generation mechanism
OptiX OSN 9800 Products Configuration Analyze the alarm and performance events
and locate the failures in OTN
OTC117 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 2.5d
Describe the advantages of OTN
Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
different components function
OptiX OSN 9800 Commissioning
Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G
OTC118 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab 1.5d transmission
Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK
modulation method
OptiX OSN 9800 System Troubleshooting Describe the basic principle of coherent
1d detection
OTC119 Lecture, Lab
Target Audience 40G/100G coherent OTU board
List the main functions and features of OptiX
OptiX OSN 9800 operation and
OSN 9800
maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Having working experience in the List the main functions and features of the
460
boards Outline the equipment operation precautions
List different usage of the common OptiX OSN Perform the basic maintenance operations
9800 network node Types. Replace the boards
Describe OptiX OSN 9800 network application List the items of routine maintenance.
modes and main features. Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on
List key factors in OptiX OSN 9800 networking U2000
Explain the principles of various protection Implement routine operation and maintenance
types applied in the OSN 9800 products on NMS side
Describe the characteristics of various Review NG WDM network node signal flow
protection types and their application scenarios List the common indices on optical power
Perform the operations related to the OSN calculation
9800 product protection Calculate the optical power
Configure client 1+1 protection and ODUk Perform the Optical Power Commissioning
subnet connection protection (SNCP) List the Optical Power Commissioning
Able to create an OptiX OSN 9800 network by Procedures
iManager U2000 Perform the Optical Power Commissioning for
Backup database by iManager U2000 100Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s and Hybrid Transmission
Describe the FOADM and ROADM features System
Describe the FOADM and ROADM application Understand the Operations Related to Tests
scope Performing
Understand the FOADM and ROADM Describe the basic thoughts and methods of
functional units and the matching relations of fault
these functional units Locating Comprehend the methods of
Configure optical layer services by U2000 rectifying different types of faults
Diagram the electrical layer service grooming List the common methods for trouble shooting
model of OptiX OSN 9800 Analyze common faults independently.
List the boards which have electrical layer Handle typical faults
cross-connect function
Duration
Configure electrical layer services
independently by station 10 working days
Configure end-to-end electrical layer services Class Size
independently by trail
Min 6, Max 12
461
7.10.17 OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training
Training Path Perform the operations related to the OSN

9800 product protection
OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description # Configure client 1+1 protection and ODUk
Application Overview
1d subnet connection protection (SNCP)
OTC120 Lecture
Able to create an OptiX OSN 9800 network by
iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 9800 Products Configuration Backup database by iManager U2000

Overview Describe the FOADM and ROADM features
Describe the FOADM and ROADM application
scope
Target Audience
Understand the FOADM and ROADM
OptiX OSN 9800 operation and functional units and the matching relations of
maintenance engineer these functional units
Prerequisites Configure optical layer services by U2000
Diagram the electrical layer service grooming
model of OptiX OSN 9800
maintenance of WDM products
List the boards which have electrical layer
cross-connect function
Objectives
Configure electrical layer services
On completion of this program, the independently by station
participants will be able to: Configure end-to-end electrical layer services
List the main functions and features of OptiX independently by trail
OSN 9800 Outline the equipment operation precautions
Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 9800 subrack Perform the basic maintenance operations
Generalize the categories of boards Replace the boards
List the main functions and features of the List the items of routine maintenance.
boards Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on
List different usage of the common OptiX OSN U2000
9800 network node Types. Implement routine operation and maintenance
Describe OptiX OSN 9800 network application on NMS side
modes and main features. Duration
List key factors in OptiX OSN 9800 networking
3 working days
Explain the principles of various protection
types applied in the OSN 9800 products Class Size
Describe the characteristics of various Min 6, Max 12
protection types and their application scenarios
462
7.10.18 OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Training Path restoration/back-up, security/user

management, etc
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and Implement the equipment hardware
Maintenance
2d configuration
OTC59 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab
Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS
1600S system
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500) Implement data configuration, optical power

Operation and Maintenance adjustment, protection configuration and
network expansion through iManager U2000
List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S
equipment and perform the WDM products
OptiX SLM 1630/RPT 1660 Operation and
testing
Maintenance
OTC61 Lecture, Lab 1d Illustrate the application of common
troubleshooting methods, such as optical
Target Audience power testing, alarm and performance events
analysis, replacement, etc
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
from troubleshooting practice
Prerequisites
Describe the structure, functions and features
Be familiar with Windows operating system of OptiX NPE equipment
Objectives Explain the functions and specifications of
different boards
Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE
equipment
Explain the functions, characteristics of optical
Describe the network topologies, system
components and the key technologies of WDM
applications and network protection
sub-marine system
mechanisms
Describe the characteristics of optical
Implement the service configuration, alarm and
interfaces in WDM sub-marine system
performance monitoring through iManager
Describe the structure, functions and features
U2000
of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
State the service application and protection
Describe the functions and specifications of mechanism
different boards
Implement the clock, orderwire, protection
configurations and network expansion through
applications and network protection
iManager U2000
mechanisms
Execute the on-site operation, such as board
Perform iManager U2000 operation and
replacement, board or equipment resetting and
maintenance, such as alarms and performance fiber connection
browsing, parameters setting, database
463
Perform iManager U2000 operation and Perform iManager U2000 operation and
maintenance, such as alarms and performance maintenance, such as alarms and performance
browsing, parameters setting, etc browsing, parameters setting, etc
Illustrate the application of common Implement the equipment hardware
troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back, configuration
testing, alarm and performance events Implement data configuration through
analysis, replacement, etc iManager U2000
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience Illustrate the application of common
from troubleshooting practice troubleshooting methods
Describe the structure, functions and features Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
of OptiX SLM/RPT equipment from troubleshooting practice
Describe the functions and specifications of Duration
different boards
6 working days
applications and network protection Class Size
mechanisms
Min 6, Max 12
464
7.10.19 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Training Path
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and

Maintenance
OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)

Target Audience
OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Objectives

Explain the functions, characteristics of optical components and the key technologies of WDM sub-marine
system
Describe the characteristics of optical interfaces in WDM sub-marine system
Describe the structure, functions and features of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
Describe the functions and specifications of different boards
Describe the network topologies, system applications and network protection mechanisms
Perform iManager U2000 operation and maintenance, such as alarms and performance browsing, parameters
setting, database restoration/back-up, security/user management, etc
Implement the equipment hardware configuration
Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS 1600S system
Implement data configuration, optical power adjustment, protection configuration and network expansion
through iManager U2000
List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment and perform the WDM products testing
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as optical power testing, alarm and
performance events analysis, replacement, etc
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from troubleshooting practice
Describe the structure, functions and features of OptiX NPE equipment
Explain the functions and specifications of different boards
Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE equipment
Describe the network topologies, system applications and network protection mechanisms
465
Implement the service configuration, alarm and performance monitoring through iManager U2000
State the service application and protection mechanism
Implement the clock, orderwire, protection configurations and network expansion through iManager U2000
Execute the on-site operation, such as board replacement, board or equipment resetting and fiber connection
Perform iManager U2000 operation and maintenance, such as alarms and performance browsing, parameters
setting, etc
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back, testing, alarm and
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
466
7.10.20 OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training
Training Path
OptiX MDS 6630(Optical Power

Commissioning)
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM commissioning engineer

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the main functions of MDS 6630
Outline the optical commissioning procedure by MDS 6630
Perform the basic operations of MDS 6630
Describe the Attention Matters for Commissioning
Master the common methods for troubleshooting
Analyze and handle the common commissioning faults
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
467
Training Path and QinQ

OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet) Hardware, Describe the basic concepts of MPLS
Networking & Application Introduction
OTC176 Lecture 1d Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Describe the OptiX OSN 9800 hardware
OptiX OSN 9800 Packet Service List the OptiX OSN 9800 packet boards
Configuration
OTC177 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d
9800 (Packet)
Illustrate the service and protection type of
OptiX OSN 9800 Packet Features OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)

Implement the data configuration through
iManager U2000 for OSN 9800 packet service
and protection
Describe the function and features of QoS in
OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet) Routine
OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)
Maintenance
OTC179 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d Implement the QoS configuration through
iManager U2000
OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet) System OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)
Troubleshooting
iManager U2000
Implement the NMS side routine maintenance
Target Audience for OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)
OptiX OSN 9800 packet network operation
network fault locating
and maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
Having working experience in WDM APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc
transmission network Illustrate the application of common
Upon completion of OptiX OSN 9800(OTN) troubleshooting methods for packet network
2nd Line Maintenance Training or having Analyze common faulty of the OptiX OSN 9800
equivalent knowledge (Packet) network
Be familiar with Windows operating system Duration
Objectives
7 working days
Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN
Min 6, Max 12
468
7.10.22 OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and

Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and maintenance Engineer

Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Hardware Description Application and OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN) Products Configuration courses or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

Understand the development and origin of T-SDN
Describe the T-SDN structure
Understand the application scenarios of T-SDN
Master the T-SDN commissioning
Master the T-SDN service configuration
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
469
7.10.23 OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (EoO/EoW) Special Topic Training
OptiX NG WDM MSTP Special Topic Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP
technology
operation and maintenance
Objectives
OptiX NG WDM LAG Special Topic
Describe the application of MC-LAG
OptiX NG WDM MC-LAG Special Topic Outline the working principles of the MC- LAG
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of
the MC-LAG
Describe the two aggregation types of the LAG
Outline the working principles of the LAG
OptiX NG WDM ERPS Special Topic
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of
OTC163 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d the LAG
Describe the ERPS working principle
Understand the functions of R-APS Messages
OptiX NG WDM LPT Special Topic Describe the four timers of application
OTC164 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d Describe the LPT working principle
Understand the application of LPT
Master the configuration of LPT
OptiX NG WDM STP and RSTP Special Describe the STP/RSTP working principle
Topic
Understand the functions of STP/RSTP
Describe the alarm of STP/RSTP
OptiX NG WDM operation and 3 working days

maintenance engineer Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
470
7.10.24 OptiX NG WDM Synchronization Special Topic Training

Describe the Physical Clocks (OTN) working
OptiX NG WDM Physical Clocks (OTN) principle
Special Topic
OTC168 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d Understand the functions of Physical Clocks
(OTN)
Describe the alarm of Physical Clocks (OTN)
OptiX NG WDM IEEE 1588v2OTN Describe the IEEE 1588v2OTN working

Special Topic principle
Understand the functions of IEEE 1588v2
OTN
Describe the alarm of IEEE 1588v2OTN
OptiX NG WDM Physical Clocks (OCS)
Special Topic Describe the Physical Clocks (OCS)
OTC170 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d working principle
Understand the functions of Physical Clocks
(OCS)
OptiX NG WDM Physical Clocks (Packet) Describe the alarm of Physical Clocks (OCS)
Special Topic
OTC171 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d Describe the Physical Clocks (Packet) working
principle
Target Audience Understand the functions of Physical Clocks
(Packet)
OptiX NG WDM operation and
Describe the alarm of Physical Clocks
(Packet)
Prerequisites
Duration
4 working days
technology
Class Size
operation and maintenance Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
471
7.10.25 OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (Packet) Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM PW APS Special Topic
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP technology

Having experience of IP, WDM network operation and maintenance
Objectives

Describe the PW APS working principle
Outline the PW APS switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the PW APS
Describe the Tunnel APS working principle
Outline the Tunnel APS switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the Tunnel APS
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
472
7.10.26 OptiX NG WDM DCN Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Inband DCN Special Topic
OptiX NG WDM Outband DCN Special

Topic
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the Inband DCN working principle
Understand the functions of Inband DCN
Describe the alarm of Inband DCN
Describe the Outband DCN working principle
Understand the functions of Outband DCN
Describe the alarm of Outband DCN
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
473
7.10.27 OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System Special Topic
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System

Special Topic
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the Optical Doctor System working principle
Understand the functions of Optical Doctor System
Describe the alarm of Optical Doctor System
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
474
7.10.28 OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack Management Special Topic
Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack

Management Special Topic
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the Master-Slave Subrack Management working principle
Understand the functions of Master-Slave Subrack Management
Describe the alarm of Master-Slave Subrack Management
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
475
7.11 RTN 900 Products Training Programs
7.11.1 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 System Description
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX RTN 900 Network Application
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX RTN 900 Installation
OTF18 Lecture 1d
OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning
OTF38 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid

Domain)
OTF46 Lab, E-lab 2d
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration

(Packet Domain)
OTF29 Lab, E-lab 2d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 series installation and commissioning engineer

Prerequisites
Having basic experience of telecommunications equipment installation criterion

Having working experience in the optical transport network and microwave products
Having equivalent knowledge of digital microwave communication basics
476
Objectives

Describe the relation among the different parts of OpitX RTN 900
Illustrate the installation procedures and steps of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
Implement the outdoor and indoor components installation of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the installation criterions for each part of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the system structure, functions and application of every unit
Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet microwave
Describe the networking application under PDH/SDH, hybrid and packet microwave modes
List out the protection technologies in OptiX RTN 900 network
Describe the features and applications of the protection technologies
Finish proper preparations before the commissioning
Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN 900
Perform system commissioning of the OptiX RTN 900
Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN 900
Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
Outline the steps of RTN 900 service configuration in packet plane
Implement Ethernet service / CES service / ATM / IMA services configuration in packet plane via NMS
Describe the parameters' meaning in service configuration of packet plane
Duration
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
477
7.11.2 OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX RTN 900 Field Operations &

Maintenance
OptiX RTN 900 NE Database Topic
OTF34 Lab, E-lab 0.5d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 series field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Be familiar with Windows operating system.

Having the general knowledge of Microwave basics
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and QinQ
Objectives

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN 900
Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet microwave
Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX RTN 900
List the routine maintenance items of OptiX RTN 900
Implement the maintenance operations of OptiX RTN 900
Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
Describe the functions of CF card
Routing maintenance of NE database
Backup NE database
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
478
7.11.3 OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Digital Microwave Communication Basics microwave communication
OTF01 0.5d Describe the theory and function of every part

Lecture
List the networking application for digital
OptiX RTN 900 System Description microwave system
List the fadings in microwave propagation
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d
List the common technologies of antifading
Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
configuration in packet plane
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d Implement Ethernet service / CES service /

ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
plane via NMS
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid Describe the parameters' meaning in service
Domain) configuration of packet plane
OTF46 Lab, E-lab 2d
Describe the main characteristics of OptiX
RTN 900
Describe the system structure, functions and
(Packet Domain) application of every unit
OTF29 Lab, E-lab 2d Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
microwave
Describe the networking application under
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting PDH/SDH, hybrid and packet microwave
modes
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d
List out the protection technologies in OptiX
RTN 900 network
Target Audience
Describe the features and applications of the
OptiX RTN series operation and protection technologies
maintenance engineer Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites
Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
Having working experience in the locating
maintenance of Microwave products Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
Be familiar with Windows operating system RTN 900
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
and QinQ Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN
Objectives 900

479
Duration
7 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
480
7.11.4 OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path testing

List the common indices of Ethernet service
Hybrid Services Testing performance testing
OTF23 1.5d Explain the concept of common testing indices

Lecture, Lab, E-lab
Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
performance testing
OptiX RTN 900 QoS & OAM Technology Outline the basic concept of QoS and ETH-
OAM
OTF36 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d
Describe the working principles of QoS
Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
service boards on the OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Clocks & DCN Topic
List the planning principles of QoS
OTF31 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d Describe the configuration flow of QoS
Describe the usage of ETH-OAM
Configure clock tracing
OptiX RTN 900 System Control Unit and Configure clock protection
IF Feature Topic
1d Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
OTF30 Lecture
Check clock status in RTN 900 network
Manage and configure ECC link
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting Configure extended ECC
Enable/disable ECC link
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d
Configure IP over DCC, inband DCC
Configure DCC transparent transmission
Target Audience Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OptiX RTN 900
OptiX RTN series senior operation and
maintenance engineer Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
locating
Prerequisites
Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line RTN 900
Maintenance or NMC Operation Training Describe system architecture and functions of
Objectives the SCC unit
Outline the new features supported by OptiX
RTN 900
Describe the function and application of the
new features
Know the technical background of the Ethernet
Duration
and its basic concepts
Draw the Ethernet frame structure 7 working days
Describe the function of VLAN and L2 Class Size
switching
Min 6, Max 12
State the purpose of Ethernet performance
481
7.11.5 OptiX RTN 900V1R8 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Digital Microwave Communication Basics microwave communication
Describe the theory and function of every part
OTF01 Lecture 0.5d
List the networking application for digital
microwave system
List the fadings in microwave propagation
OTF47 Lecture 0.5d List the common technologies of antifading
Describe the basic concepts of IP MPLS
Outline the steps of RTN 900 service
OTF32 Lecture 0.5d Describe the main characteristics of OptiX

RTN 900
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration application of every unit
(Packet Domain)
Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
OTF29 Lab, E-lab 2d
microwave
Describe the networking application under
PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid
Domain) List out the protection technologies in OptiX
OTF46 Lab, E-lab 2d RTN 900 network
protection technologies
OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting
Describe the SDN feature application
OTF35 Lecture 1.5d Implement Ethernet service / CES service /

plane via NMS
Target Audience
Describe the parameters' meaning in service
OptiX RTN series operation and configuration of packet plane
maintenance engineer Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
Prerequisites Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
900
Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN
maintenance of Microwave products
900
Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS
OptiX RTN 900
and QinQ
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet
locating
Objectives Perform the common troubleshooting for
On completion of this program, the OptiX RTN 900
482
Duration Class Size
483
7.11.6 OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features Training
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line

IP Routing Basic
OTF95 Lecture 0.5d Objectives

ISIS Protocol Introduction participants will be able to:
Describe basic structure of IP network
OTF96 Lecture 0.5d
Describe basic knowledge of IP address
Understand what is router and route
Describe the classification of routing
BGP Protocol Introduction
protocols
OTF97 Lecture 0.5d Understand the origin of the IS-IS protocol
Describe the principles of the IS-IS protocol
Describe the principles of the BGP protocol
OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features
Implement BGP Route Selection
OTF98 Lecture 0.5d Understand the model of BGP MPLS VPN

Understand the basic concepts referred to
BGP MPLS VPN
OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Configuration Understand the mechanisms of the route and
label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
OTF99 Lab, E-lab 2d
Understand the process of data forwarding in
BGP MPLS VPN
Understand the protection schemes of MPLS
OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Troubleshooting
BGP VPN service
OTF100 Lecture 1d
Implement L3 VPN configuration on RTN 900
Implement L3 VPN troubleshooting on RTN
900
OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN network 5 working days

maintenance engineer Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
484
7.11.7 OptiX RTN 980L IP Long Haul Microwave Features Training
Training Path Describe the product positioning of the RTN

980L
OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Features List the components and boards of the RTN
Description
980L
OTF90 Lecture 0.5d
Describe the function and feature of the RTN
980L
Describe the microwave features in OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Hardware
Description 980L long haul network
OTF91 Lecture 0.5d Describe the protection features in OptiX RTN
980L long haul network
Illustrate the installation procedures and steps
OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Configuration of antenna, RFU, branch, IDU
Lab, E-lab 1.5d Implement the outdoor and indoor components

OTF93
installation of OptiX RTN 980L
Describe the installation criterions for each part
OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Troubleshooting of OptiX RTN 980L
Implement radio configuration of OptiX RTN
OTF94 Lecture 0.5d
980L
Implement service configuration of OptiX RTN
Target Audience 980L
Describe general troubleshooting flow of OptiX
OptiX RTN 980L operation and maintenance
RTN 980L
engineer
Prerequisites
locating
Having working experience in the maintenance Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
of RTN 900 products RTN 980L
Be familiar with Windows operating system Duration
Having the general knowledge of IP and MPLS
3 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
485
7.11.8 OptiX RTN 980L Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path parts of OpitX RTN 980L

Illustrate the installation procedures and
OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Hardware steps of antenna, RFU/branch and IDU
Description
Implement the outdoor and indoor
OTF91 Lecture 0.5d
components installation of OptiX RTN 980L
Describe the installation criterions for each
OptiX RTN 980L Commissioning part of OptiX RTN 980L
Describe the basic concepts of IP MPLS
Outline the steps of RTN 980L service
Implement Ethernet service / CES service /
OptiX RTN 980L Installation
OTF150 Lecture 1d plane via NMS
Describe the parameters' meaning in service
configuration of packet plane
OptiX RTN 980L Data Configuration Describe the main characteristics of OptiX
(Packet Domain)
RTN 980L
OTF151 Lab, E-lab 2d
application of every unit
OptiX RTN 980L Data Configuration Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet
(Hybrid Domain) microwave
OTF152 Lab, E-lab 2d Describe the networking application under
PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes
Target Audience List out the protection technologies in OptiX
RTN 980L network
OptiX RTN 980L installation and
commissioning engineer
protection technologies
Prerequisites
Finish proper preparations before the
Having basic experience of commissioning
telecommunications equipment installation Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN

criterion 980L
Having working experience in the optical Perform system commissioning of the OptiX
transport network and microwave products RTN 980L
Be familiar with Windows operating system Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 980L
Having equivalent knowledge of digital Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN
microwave communication basics 980L
Objectives Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN

980L
Duration
Describe the relation among the different 7 working days
486
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
487
7.12 RTN 900 Products Advanced Training
7.12.1 OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic
OTF129 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having knowledge of Ethernet technology and ELAN service

Objectives

Describe the ERPS working principal
Understand the functions of R-APS Messages
Describe the four timers of application
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
488
7.12.2 OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic
OTF130 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

Describe the PLA/EPLA working principal
Outline the differences between PLA, EPLA, and LAG
Describe the Relevant Alarms and Events of the PLA/EPLA
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
489
7.12.3 OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic
OTF131 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the PW APS working principal
Outline the PW APS switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the PW APS
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
490
7.12.4 OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic
OTF132 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the Tunnel APS working principal
Outline the Tunnel APS switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the Tunnel APS
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
491
7.12.5 OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic
OTF133 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the two aggregation types of the LAG
Outline the working principles of the LAG
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the LAG
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
492
7.12.6 OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic
OTF134 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the AM working principal
Outline the AM switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the AM
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
493
7.12.7 OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and Operation Training
Training Path

Operation
OTF135 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the procedure for Using the Preconfiguration Tool
Outline GUI function
Understand the Relevant operation of the Error Handling
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
494
7.12.8 OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic
OTF137 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the 1588V2 application
Outline the Basic Concepts of the 1588V2
Describe the 1588V2 working principal
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the 1588V2
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
495
7.12.9 iManager U2000 RTN Network Monitoring Training
Training Path
Microwave product and common alarm

overview
OTF142 Lecture 0.5d
iManager U2000 monitoring of the OptiX

RTN 900
Target Audience

Prerequisites
Having working experience in the U2000 operating and maintenance

Having the general knowledge of Microwave
Objectives

Describe the typical products of Microwave equipments
Describe the common alarm of the Microwave Link and service
Describe the common performance of the Microwave Link and service
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
496
7.12.10 KPI Analysis of Ethernet Service Training
Training Path
KPI Analysis of Ethernet Service
OTF142 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 900 maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having working experience in the U2000 operating and maintenance

Having working experience in the optical transport network and microwave products
Objectives

Explain the RMON functions of different boards
Implement the Ethernet service performance monitoring through iManager U2000
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
497
7.13 RTN 300 Products Training Programs
7.13.1 OptiX RTN 310360380 Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe the system structure, functions and

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 System Describe the relation among the different parts
Description
of OpitX RTN 310/360/380
OTF80 Lecture 0.5d
Describe the features and application of OptiX
RTN 310/360/380
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Feature
Description of antenna, RTN 310/360/380 and PI
OTF81 Lecture 0.5d Implement the installation of OptiX RTN
310/360/380
Describe the installation criterions for each part
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Installation of OptiX RTN 310/360/380
Lecture 0.5d Finish proper preparations before the

OTF82
commissioning
Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Commissioning 310/360/380
Perform system commissioning of the OptiX
RTN 310/360/380
Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN
310/360/380
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Data Configuration
Configure services of the OptiX RTN
OTF84 Lab, E-lab 1.5d 310/360/380
Duration
Target Audience
4 working days
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 installation and Class Size
commissioning engineer
Min 6, Max 12
Prerequisites
Having basic experience of telecommunications

equipment installation criterion
Having equivalent knowledge of digital
microwave communication basics
Be familiar with windows operating system
Objectives

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
310/360/380
498
7.13.2 OptiX RTN 310360380 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 System

Description
OTF80 Lecture 0.5d
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Field Operations

Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of microwave basics

Objectives

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN 310/360/380
Describe the relation among the different parts of OpitX RTN 310/360/380
List the routine maintenance items of OptiX RTN 310/360/380
Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX RTN 310/360/380
Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 310/360/380
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
499
7.13.3 OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path of antenna, RTN 310/360/380 and PI

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 System 310/360/380
Description
Configure services of the OptiX RTN
OTF80 Lecture 0.5d
310/360/380
Implement the routine maintenance via NMS
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Feature Describe the general troubleshooting flow of

Description OptiX RTN 310/360/380
OTF81 Lecture 0.5d Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
locating
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Data
RTN 310/360/380
Configuration
OTF84 Lab, E-lab 1.5d Duration
3 working days
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Maintenance and Class Size

Troubleshooting
Lecture 0.5d Min 6, Max 12
OTF86
Target Audience
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 operation and

Prerequisites
Having working experience in the maintenance

of Microwave products
Objectives

310/360/380
Describe the relation among the different parts
of OpitX RTN 300
RTN 310/360/380
500
7.13.4 OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool Operation
Training Path
OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool

Operation
OTF136 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the procedure for Using the Preconfiguration Tool
Outline GUI function
Understand the Relevant operation of the Error Handling
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
501
7.13.5 OptiX RTN 320 Operation and Maintenance Training

OTF138 Lecture 0.5d Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
320
OptiX RTN 320 Feature Description application of every unit
OTF139 Lecture 0.5d
of OptiX RTN 320
OptiX RTN 320 Data Configuration RTN 320
Configure services of the OptiX RTN 320
OptiX RTN 320 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting OptiX RTN 320
OTF141 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
locating
Target Audience Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX

RTN 320
OptiX RTN 320 operation and maintenance
Duration
engineer
Class Size
Microwave Communication Min 6, Max 12
502
Training Path Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

OptiX RTN 310 System Description OptiX RTN 310
OTF117 Lecture 0.5d
locating
RTN 310
OptiX RTN 310 Feature Description
Duration
OTF118 Lecture 0.5d
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Troubleshooting
Target Audience

engineer
Prerequisites

Objectives

310
of OptiX RTN 310
RTN 310
503
Training Path Configure services of the OptiX RTN 380

OptiX RTN 380 System Description Describe the general troubleshooting flow of
OptiX RTN 380
OTF121 Lecture 0.5d
locating
OptiX RTN 380 Feature Description Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX
RTN 380
OTF122 Lecture 0.5d Duration
4 working days
OptiX RTN 380 Data Configuration Class Size
OTF123 Lab, E-lab 1.5d Min 6, Max 12

Troubleshooting
Target Audience

engineer
Prerequisites

Objectives

380
of OptiX RTN 380
RTN 380
504

OTF125 Lecture 0.5d Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN
360
OptiX RTN 360 Feature Description application of every unit
OTF126 Lecture 0.5d
of OptiX RTN 360
OptiX RTN 360 Data Configuration RTN 360
Troubleshooting OptiX RTN 360
OTF128 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d Outline the methods of faults analyzing and
locating
Target Audience Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX

RTN 360
Duration
engineer
Class Size
Microwave Communication Min 6, Max 12
505
7.14 MSTP Products Training Programs
7.14.1 OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training
Training Path
OptiX NG SDH OCS Product Overview
OTA27 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
Non-technical manager
OptiX NG SDH OCS products novice
Prerequisites
NA
Objectives

List the function of transmission network
Describe the network application of the OptiX NG SDH OCS system
Describe the structure of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
List the main cards of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Understand the features of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Duration
0.5 working day

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
506
7.14.2 OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training
Training Path
OptiX NG SDH OCS Installation
OTA26 Lecture, WBT 2d
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH OCS installation engineer

Prerequisites
NA
Objectives

Describe the features of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Outline the main boards of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
List the equipment installation procedure
Describe the preparation for installation
State the required equipment room environment and grounding condition checks
Verify the cabinet, cables and component installations
Duration
2 days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
507
7.14.3 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training
Training Path the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Outline the system protection modes of the
OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Description TDM
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
Describe the common SDH network topologies
SDH Networking and Protection and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of linear
OTA02 Lecture 1d MSP
U2000 System Introduction Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d ring/mesh topology
OptiX NG SDH OCS Commissioning Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
OTA32 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d
Target Audience
Describe the preparation for the
OptiX NG SDH OCS commissioning commissioning
engineer List the items for single station commissioning
Prerequisites for OptiX NG SDH OCS system

Outline the procedures of network
Having working experience in transport commissioning for OptiX NG SDH OCS
network system
Be familiar with Windows operating system Summarize the equipment/network condition
Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics after commissioning
course or having equivalent knowledge Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH OCS
Objectives system commissioning
Duration
Describe the network applications of the OptiX
Class Size
NG SDH OCS equipment
Explain the system structure and features of Min 6, Max 12
508
7.14.4 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG SDH OCS System

Description
OTA28 Lecture 1d
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and

Maintenance
OTA30 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of SDH basics
Objectives

Illustrate the networking applications of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Describe the system structure and features of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Outline the system protection schemes of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Outline the operation environment of OptiX SDH series equipment
List the status description of OptiX SDH series equipment indicators
List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations of OptiX SDH series equipment
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX SDH series equipment
Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX iManager T2000 LCT
Create topology including create NE/Link/NM
Perform the NE configuration, board configuration, service dispatching and protection configuration for
equipment via OptiX iManager T2000 LCT
Perform the routine maintenance via T2000 LCT
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
509
7.14.5 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training
SDH Networking and Protection Be familiar with Windows operating system

Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics
OTA02 Lecture 1d
course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware On completion of this program, the

Description TDM participants will be able to:
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
OptiX NG SDH OCS Products
Configuration the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
OTA31 Lab, E-lab 2d
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation
ONU10 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe the common SDH network topologies

and their features
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and MSP
Maintenance
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
ring/mesh topology
ASON Basics
OTA07 Lecture 1d protection switch takes place
U2000
ASON Operation and Maintenance
OTA12 Lecture, Lab 2d Describe the main functions of U2000

Accomplish the network protection and SDH
service configuration through NMS
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side Outline the classification of Ethernet service
Maintenance
Explain the function and applications of
OTA40 Lecture 0.5d
different types Ethernet service
Target Audience List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG
SDH OCS equipment
OptiX NG SDH OCS network operation
Describe the functions and application of the
center engineer
Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH OCS
equipment
Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
510
Accomplish the Ethernet service Describe the networking characters of ASON
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS Explain the service characters of ASON
State the purpose of Ethernet performance Implement the creation of ASON network
testing Create SLA services and test the protection
List the common indices of Ethernet service and restoration of them
performance testing Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON
Explain the concepts of common testing network
indices Explain the operation precaution of ASON
Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service Explain the fault reported by the ASON
performance testing network
Implement the Ethernet performance testing Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
and analyze the result Solve the typical ASON trouble
Know the operation environment of NMS
Duration
List the maintenance tasks
Perform the basic maintenance operations 12 working days
Complete the maintenance records Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
511
7.14.6 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
SDH Networking and Protection OTA12 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d
OTA02 Lecture 1d
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side

Maintenance
OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware OTA40 Lecture 0.5d
Description TDM
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
Target Audience
OptiX NG SDH OCS operation and

OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation maintenance engineer
1d Prerequisites
ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab
maintenance of SDH products
OptiX NG SDH OCS Products Be familiar with Windows operating system
Configuration
OTA31 Lab, E-lab 2d Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics
course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance On completion of this program, the
OTA10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 3d participants will be able to:
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting Explain the system structure and features of
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and State the main functions of the cards in the
Maintenance OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Describe the common SDH network topologies
and their features
OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance
MSP
OTA35 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d Explain the protection mechanism of MS
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
ASON Basics ring/mesh topology
OTA07 Lecture 1d
Accomplish the network protection and SDH
512
service configuration through NMS Explain the fault reported by the ASON
Describe the architecture and main features of network
U2000 Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
Describe the directory structure of U2000 Solve the typical ASON trouble
Describe the main functions of U2000 Outline the operation environment of OptiX
Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX SDH series equipment
iManager T2000 LCT List the status description of OptiX SDH series
Create topology including create NE/Link/NM equipment indicators
Perform the NE configuration, board List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH
configuration, service dispatching and series equipment
protection configuration for equipment via Perform the basic maintenance operations of
OptiX iManager T2000 LCT OptiX SDH series equipment
Perform the routine maintenance via T2000 Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
LCT SDH series equipment
Outline the classification of Ethernet service Know the operation environment of NMS
Explain the function and applications of List the maintenance tasks
different types Ethernet service Perform the basic maintenance operations
List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG Complete the maintenance records
SDH OCS equipment List the common analysis methods of fault
Describe the functions and application of the locating
Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH OCS Outline the fault handling flow
equipment Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
Describe the features of the Ethernet boards error bit, etc
Accomplish the Ethernet service Illustrate the application of common
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
State the purpose of Ethernet performance testing, alarm and performance events
testing analysis, replacement, etc
List the common indices of Ethernet service Analyze common faulty of the network consist
performance testing of OptiX NG SDH OCS series
Explain the concepts of common testing Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
indices from troubleshooting practice
Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service Outline the standards of ASON
performance testing Illustrate the structure of ASON
Implement the Ethernet performance testing Describe the networking characters of ASON
and analyze the result Explain the service characters of ASON
Implement the creation of ASON network
Duration
Create SLA services and test the protection
and restoration of them 15 working days
Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
Explain the operation precaution of ASON
513
7.14.7 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path State the main functions of the cards in the

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware Describe the principle and process of TPS on
Description TDM
1.5d OptiX NG SDH equipment
OTA29 Lecture
List the main characteristics of TPS on OptiX
NG SDH equipment
OptiX NG SDH OCS Features and Implement the configuration of TPS on OptiX
Application NG SDH equipment
Describe the feature of power source system
in OptiX NG SDH OCS system
Grasp the protection principle and function of
OptiX SDH Special Topics
all types of power sources in OptiX NG SDH
OTA36 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d OCS equipments
Grasp the principle of cross-connection
clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
OptiX SDH System Advanced SDH OCS system
Troubleshooting
Grasp the mechanism of cross-connection
OTA37 Lecture, Lab, 2.5d
clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
Discussion
SDH OCS system
Describe the principle of SCC active/standby
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation
Maintenance switching in OptiX NG SDH OCS system
OTA42 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 4d List the methods of SCC switching in OptiX NG
SDH OCS system
Target Audience
Describe the traffic flow and service
OptiX NG SDH OCS senior operation configuration about the complicated networks
and maintenance engineer Analyze the protection capability about the
Prerequisites complicated networks
Accomplish the service configuration of the
Completion of OptiX NG SDH OCS
complicated network and verify the protection
Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance
Describe the working mechanism of the L2
Training or OptiX NG SDH OCS
switching
Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training
Interpret the basic of QoS
Objectives
Outline the key technology in QoS
On completion of this program, the Describe the typical QoS application
participants will be able to: Describe the frame structure of MPLS
Describe the network applications of the OptiX Interpret the basic of QinQ
NG SDH OCS equipment List the application of MPLS and QinQ
Explain the system structure and features of Describe the working mechanism of virtual
the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment concatenation
Outline the system protection modes of the Describe the function of LCAS
OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the
514
Ethernet signal Grasp the working principle of ECC
Describe the troubleshooting idea and Describe the network application of ECC and
methods how to separate huge ECC network into
Analyze the common faults locating smaller networks
Outline the procedures of Ethernet Illustrate the extended applications of ECC
troubleshooting Accomplish the configuration of ECC, verify
Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service extended ECC and DCC transparent
Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service transmission
Compare the function of Ethernet port and Outline common ECC command lines
service OAM Get further understand of the feature of OptiX
Outline the typical application scenario of NG SDH OCS system
Ethernet service OAM Analyze common cases in the real network
Accomplish the OAM testing and figure out the problem
Locate the fault position when error reports Locate the faulty of the failed network and
Explain the meaning of clock protection related summarize the key point of troubleshooting
synchronization parameters Duration

Explain the basic principles of implementing
13 working days
clock protection networking
Class Size
Accomplish the clock protection configuration
and verify it while the network fails Min 6, Max 12
515
7.14.8 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training
Training Path OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
Hybrid MSTP Network Application 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA46 1d Outline the system protection schemes of the

Lecture
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description networking
Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
OTA48 Lecture 1d
MSTP product
Classify the service types of Ethernet
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation
Check the equipment condition such as power
ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d connections, fiber connections, mounted
boards, etc
Outline and perform the commissioning
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning process for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
Perform the commissioning process of the
network
Target Audience Describe methods of operation including circuit
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer
fault finding
Prerequisites
Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
Having working experience in transport Perform commissioning tests on the network

network Describe the architecture and main features of
Be familiar with Windows operating system U2000
Objectives Describe the directory structure of U2000

Duration
Describe the networking applications of the 5 working days
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II Class Size
Describe the system structure of the OptiX
Min 6, Max 12
516
7.14.9 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN

1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description Outline the system protection schemes of the
1d OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OTA48 Lecture
SDH series equipment
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and List the status description of OptiX SDH series
Maintenance equipment indicators
List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH
series equipment
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance
OptiX SDH series equipment
OTA53 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
Target Audience Outline the function of basic menus of
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance iManager U2000 LCT
engineer Create topology including create NE/Link
Prerequisites Perform the NE configuration, board

configuration, and service dispatching and
Be familiar with Windows operating system protection configuration for equipment via
Having a general knowledge of SDH basics iManager U2000 LCT
Objectives Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
LCT
Duration
Describe the networking applications of the 2 working days
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II Class Size
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II Min 6, Max 12
517
7.14.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training
Training Path Introduction courses or having equivalent

knowledge
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction Objectives
OTA45 Lecture 1d
OTA46 Lecture 1d Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Outline the QinQ application scenarios of
OptiX Hybrid MSTP
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
OTA48 1d Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format

Lecture
for Ethernet
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation for TDM E1
Describe the networking applications of the
ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products
Configuration Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
OTA49 Lab, E-lab 3d 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Operation and Maintenance Configure the protection of TDM plane
packet transport plane for the network and
equipment
Target Audience
Configure the common services for the TDM
Hybrid MSTP network operation center plane
engineer Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service
Prerequisites in the packet transport plane
Outline the QoS model
Having working experience in transport
Describe QoS basic concepts
network
Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid
Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics
MSTP network
and OTA45 Hybrid MSTP Technology
518
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system equipment
according to the service demand Perform the basic maintenance operations for
Compare the function of Ethernet port and Hybrid MSTP equipment
service OAM Complete the maintenance records
Outline the typical application scenario of Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Ethernet service OAM networking
Describe the working mechanism and Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
application scene of MPLS OAM MSTP product
Describe the working mechanism and Classify the service types of Ethernet
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Describe the working mechanism and Duration
application scene of PW OAM
Accomplish the OAM testing 10 working days
Locate the fault position when error reports Class Size
Describe the operation environment of NMS
Min 6, Max 12
List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP
519
7.14.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance

engineer
OTA45 Lecture 1d
Prerequisites

Hybrid MSTP Network Application network
OTA46 Lecture 1d
Objectives

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description
OTA48 Lecture 1d Describe the classification of IP addresses
OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation Outline the QinQ application scenarios of
OptiX Hybrid MSTP
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products for Ethernet

Configuration Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
OTA49 Lab, E-lab 3d
for TDM E1
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application
OTA50 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System Outline the system protection schemes of the
Troubleshooting
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
U2000
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side
Operation and Maintenance Describe the main functions of U2000
OTA51 Lecture, Lab 1d Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Configure the protection of TDM plane
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance equipment
OTA53 Lecture, Lab 0.5d
plane
Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service
520
in the packet transport plane Create topology including create NE/Link
Outline the QoS model Perform the NE configuration, board
Describe QoS basic concepts configuration, and service dispatching and
Outline the key technology in QoS protection configuration for equipment via
Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid iManager U2000 LCT
MSTP network Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system LCT
according to the service demand List the common analysis methods of packet
Compare the function of Ethernet port and network fault locating
service OAM Outline the fault handling flow
Outline the typical application scenario of Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,
Ethernet service OAM APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc
Describe the working mechanism and Illustrate the application of common

application scene of MPLS OAM troubleshooting methods for packet network
Describe the working mechanism and Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM network
Describe the working mechanism and Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
application scene of PW OAM networking
Accomplish the OAM testing Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid
Locate the fault position when error reports MSTP product
Describe the operation environment of NMS Classify the service types of Ethernet
List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
equipment Duration
Perform the basic maintenance operations for
12 working days
Hybrid MSTP equipment
Class Size
Complete the maintenance records
Outline the function of basic menus of Min 6, Max 12
iManager U2000 LCT
521
7.14.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training
Training Path Describe the system structure of the OptiX

OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN
Description TDM
1.5d 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OTA29 Lecture
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
OptiX NG SDH OCS Commissioning Check the equipment condition such as power
connections, fiber connections, mounted
boards, etc
Outline and perform the commissioning
process for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment
Perform the commissioning process of the
OTA46 Lecture 1d network
Describe methods of operation including circuit
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description fault finding
Perform commissioning tests on the equipment
OTA48 Lecture 1d
Perform commissioning tests on the network
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning NG SDH OCS equipment

OTA52 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 2d the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer State the main functions of the cards in the
Prerequisites OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Describe the preparation for the
commissioning
network
List the items for single station commissioning
for OptiX NG SDH OCS system
Objectives Outline the procedures of network
On completion of this program, the commissioning for OptiX NG SDH OCS
participants will be able to: system
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product Summarize the equipment/network condition
networking after commissioning

Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH OCS
MSTP product system commissioning
Classify the service types of Ethernet Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II Describe the main functions of U2000
522
Duration Class Size
523
7.14.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX NG SDH OCS System OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Description
OTA28 1d Outline the operation environment of OptiX
Lecture
List the status description of OptiX SDH series
OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and equipment indicators
Maintenance List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH
series equipment
OptiX SDH series equipment
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description
OTA48 Lecture 1d SDH series equipment
Outline the function of basic menus of
iManager U2000 LCT
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance Create topology including create NE/Link
Perform the NE configuration, board
configuration, and service dispatching and
Target Audience protection configuration for equipment via
iManager U2000 LCT
Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance
Perform the routine maintenance via U2000
engineer
LCT
Prerequisites
Illustrate the networking applications of the
Be familiar with Windows operating system OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Having a general knowledge of SDH basics Describe the system structure and features of
Objectives
On completion of this program, the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II 3 working days
Describe the system structure of the OptiX Class Size
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Min 6, Max 12
524
7.14.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction OTA10Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d
OTA45 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP network operation center

engineer
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d Prerequisites

network
Configuration
OTA49 Hands-on exercise 3d Objectives

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application Describe the classification of IP addresses
OTA50 Lecture, Hands-on exercise2d Describe the basic concepts of MPLS

Outline the QinQ application scenarios of
OptiX Hybrid MSTP
Operation and Maintenance Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
OTA51 Lecture, Hands-on 1d
exercise for Ethernet
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware for TDM E1
Description TDM
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
U2000
Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
OTA46 Lecture 1d Configure the protection of TDM plane &
equipment
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products Configure the common services for the TDM
Configuration plane
OTA31 Hands-on exercise 2d
Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service
in the packet transport plane
525
Outline the key technology in QoS MSTP product
Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid Classify the service types of Ethernet
MSTP network Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system Accomplish the network protection and SDH
according to the service demand service configuration through NMS
Compare the function of Ethernet port and Outline the classification of Ethernet service
service OAM Explain the function and applications of
Outline the typical application scenario of different types Ethernet service
Ethernet service OAM List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG
Describe the working mechanism and SDH & OCS equipment
application scene of MPLS OAM Describe the functions and application of the
Describe the working mechanism and Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS
application scene of PW OAM equipment
Accomplish the OAM testing Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
Locate the fault position when error reports Accomplish the Ethernet service
Describe the operation environment of NMS EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS
List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP State the purpose of Ethernet performance
equipment testing
Perform the basic maintenance operations for List the common indices of Ethernet service
Hybrid MSTP equipment performance testing
Complete the maintenance records Explain the concepts of common testing
Describe the network applications of the OptiX indices
NG SDH & OCS equipment Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
Explain the system structure and features of performance testing
the OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment Implement the Ethernet performance testing
Outline the system protection modes of the and analyze the result
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment Duration
15 working days
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Class Size
networking Min 6, Max 12

526
7.14.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and OTA51 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d
Maintenance
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware
Description TDM engineer
OTA29 Lecture 1.5d
Prerequisites

OptiX NG SDH OCS Products network
Configuration Be familiar with Windows operating system
OTA31 Lab, E-lab 2d
Objectives

OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting participants will be able to:
OTA14 2d Describe the classification of IP addresses
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction Outline the QinQ application scenarios of
OptiX Hybrid MSTP
OTA45 Lecture 1d
for Ethernet
OTA46 Lecture 1d for TDM E1
Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Configure the protection of TDM plane
Configuration
OTA49 Lab, E-lab 3d equipment
plane
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service
in the packet transport plane
OptiX Hybrid MSTP System Outline the key technology in QoS

Troubleshooting Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid
MSTP network
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system
according to the service demand
527
Compare the function of Ethernet port and Accomplish the network protection and SDH
service OAM service configuration through NMS
Outline the typical application scenario of Outline the classification of Ethernet service
Ethernet service OAM Explain the function and applications of
Describe the working mechanism and different types Ethernet service
application scene of MPLS OAM List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG
Describe the working mechanism and SDH OCS equipment
application scene of MPLS-TP OAM Describe the functions and application of the
Describe the working mechanism and Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH OCS
application scene of PW OAM equipment
Accomplish the OAM testing Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
Locate the fault position when error reports Accomplish the Ethernet service
Describe the operation environment of NMS EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS
List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP State the purpose of Ethernet performance
equipment testing
Perform the basic maintenance operations for List the common indices of Ethernet service
Hybrid MSTP equipment performance testing
Complete the maintenance records Explain the concepts of common testing
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product indices
networking Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service
Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid performance testing
MSTP product Implement the Ethernet performance testing
Classify the service types of Ethernet and analyze the result
Outline the types and applications of Ethernet List the common analysis methods of fault
List the common analysis methods of packet locating
network fault locating Outline the fault handling flow
Outline the fault handling flow Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,
Analyze the typical faults: service interruption, error bit, etc
APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc Illustrate the application of common
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,
troubleshooting methods for packet network testing, alarm and performance events
analysis, replacement, etc
Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP
network Analyze common faulty of the network consist
of OptiX NG SDH OCS series
NG SDH OCS equipment Locate and eliminate faults, get experience
from troubleshooting practice
the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment Duration
18 working days
Class Size
OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment Min 6, Max 12
528
7.14.16 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Hardware OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
Networking
OTA60 1.5d Describe the system structure and features of
Lecture
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Service used on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
Configuration Outline the system protection schemes of the
OSN 500/550/580 series equipment
Troubleshooting List the status description of OptiX OSN
OTA63 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d 500/550/580 equipment indicators
500/550/580 equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Routine Perform the basic maintenance operations of
Maintenance OptiX OSN 500/550/580 equipment
OSN 500/550/580 equipment
Target Audience Configure protection attributes in OSN
500/550/580 network, such as SNCP, LMP,
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 operation and
RMP etc
Configure services of OSN 500/550
Prerequisites
/580
Having experience in the operation and Duration
maintenance of optical network equipment
4 working days
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
529
7.14.17 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) On completion of this program, the

Hardware Networking participants will be able to:
OTA64 Lecture 1.5d
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Service
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)
Configuration
OTA66 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1d Describe the main functions of the boards
used on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Special OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
Topic
OSN 500/550/580 series Equipment
List the status description of OptiX OSN
500/550/580 Equipment indicators
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)
Troubleshooting List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN
OTA68 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d 500/550/580 Equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 Equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Routine Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
Maintenance
OSN 500/550/580 Equipment
Configure MPLS APS/MRPS protection
attributes in OSN 500/550/580 network
Target Audience Configure packet services on OSN
500/550/580
maintenance engineer Duration
Having experience in the operation and Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
530
7.14.18 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Hardware
Networking Having experience in the operation and
OTA60 Lecture 1.5d
Objectives
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)
Hardware Networking
1.5d On completion of this program, the
OTA64 Lecture
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Special OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)

Topic Describe the system structure and features of
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM+Packet)
used on the OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM+Packet)
500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
Service Configuration
OTA69 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 1.5d Outline the system protection schemes of the
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
OSN 500/550/580 series equipment
Troubleshooting List the status description of OptiX OSN
500/550/580 equipment indicators
500/550/580 equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Routine
Maintenance
OTA61 Lecture, Lab, E-lab 0.5d OptiX OSN 500/550/580 equipment
OSN 500/550/580 equipment
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Configure MPLS APS/MRPS protection,SNCP,
Troubleshooting
LMP, RMP etc attributes in OSN 500/550/580
network
Configure services of OSN
500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Routine
8 working days
Class Size
Target Audience
Min 6, Max 12
531
7.14.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation

Maintenance
Target Audience
Ethernet over SDH equipment senior operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Be familiar with NMS

Be familiar with OptiX SDH service configuration and maintenance
Be familiar with the Ethernet service configuration and maintenance
Upon completion of OTA03 Ethernet Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

Describe the working mechanism of the L2 switching
Interpret the basic of QoS
Describe the typical QoS application
Describe the frame structure of MPLS
Interpret the basic of QinQ
List the application of MPLS and QinQ
Describe the working mechanism of virtual concatenation
Describe the function of LCAS
Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the Ethernet signal
Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
Analyze the common faults locating
Outline the procedures of Ethernet troubleshooting
Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
Compare the function of Ethernet port and service OAM
Outline the typical application scenario of Ethernet service OAM
Accomplish the OAM testing
Locate the fault position when error reports
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
532
7.14.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
ASON Basics
OTA07 Lecture 1d
Target Audience
ASON operation and maintenance engineer

Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of SDH basics

Be familiar with NMS
Be familiar with SDH service configuration and maintenance
Objectives

Implement the creation of ASON network
Create SLA services and test the protection and restoration of them
Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON network
Explain the operation precaution of ASON
Explain the fault reported by the ASON network
Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
Solve the typical ASON trouble
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
533
7.14.21 TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid MSTP)
Training Path
TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance
Target Audience
Hybrid MSTP Maintenance Engineer

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge for Hybrid MSTP equipment or completed OptiX NG SDH Equipment
(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Objectives

Describe the application scenarios of TP-Assist features
Outline the application functions of TP-Assist features
Complete TP-Assist configuration and test
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
534
7.15 Transmission Network OSS Training Programs
7.15.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only)
Training Path
ONU01 Lecture 0.5d
U2000 Alarm and Performance

Management
ONU02 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
U2000 operator and maintainer

Prerequisites
Having the basic knowledge of network management

Having the basic principle and equipment knowledge of Transmission network
Objectives

Describe the architecture and main features of U2000
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and performance management of U2000
Perform the browse and setting operation for alarm
Perform the basic response operation for common alarm events
Perform the browse and setting operation for performance events
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
535
7.15.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training
Training Path
iManager U2000 LCT Operation
ONU12 Lecture, Lab 1d
Target Audience
U2000 LCT user

Prerequisites
Having the basic knowledge of Windows OS

Objectives

List the main menus of iManager U2000 LCT
Perform the NE configuration, service configuration for NG SDH equipment via U2000 LCT
Perform the routine maintenance via U2000 LCT

Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
536
7.15.3 iManager N2510 OLS Operation and Maintenance Training (Transmission)
Training Path
iManager N2510 OLS System Overview

(Transmission)
ONU16 Lecture 0.5d
iManager N2510 OLS System Operation

and Maintenance (Transmission)
ONU17 Lab, E-lab 0.5d
Target Audience
N2510 Maintenance Engineer

Prerequisites
Having the basic knowledge of NMS

Objectives

Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking and application
Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution of fiber optic transmission monitoring
Describe iManager N2510 OLS hardware and feature
Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and maintenance for transmission networks
Perform iManager N2510 OLS test and analysis for transmission networks
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
537
7.15.4 iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC FO
(Transmission)
Training Path
iManager U2000 Operation and

Maintenance for NOC FO
Target Audience
NOC FO and U2000 Maintenance Engineer

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the basic concepts in alarm and performance management of U2000
Perform the browse and setting operation for alarm
Perform the basic response operation for common alarm events
Outline the function of Huawei network equipment
List the board type
Describe the characteristic of the common boards
List the common alarms of the equipment
List the common operation for FO
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
538
7.15.5 iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC BO
(Transmission)
Training Path
iManager U2000 Operation and

Maintenance for NOC BO
Target Audience
NOC BO and U2000 Maintenance Engineer

Prerequisites
Complete iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC FO (Transmission) or
Having equivalent knowledge of NMS
Objectives

Explain the concept of security management
Complete the operation of U2000 security management
Explain the concept of data management
Complete the operation of U2000 data management
List U2000 routine maintenance items
Perform operations of routine maintenance
Complete routine maintenance for U2000
List the common analysis methods of fault localization
Locate U2000 faults
Complete NG SDH/ NG WDM common services configuration and management
Complete inventory and report management
Perform Msuite tool common operations
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
539
7.15.6 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
U2100 System Operation and

Maintenance
OTD08 Lecture, Lab 5d
Target Audience
U2100 administrator and operator

Prerequisites
Be familiar with Windows operating system and SQL Server

Having the knowledge of Solaris and Sybase basics
Objectives

List the features and basics of Solaris and Sybase
Describe the basic command of Solaris and Sybase
Describe the system structure, management capacity and menus of iManager U2100
Browse the SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail and their alarm through iManager U2100
Create and delete SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail through iManager U2100
Check the running status of U2100 and perform the routine maintenance
Perform the U2100 troubleshooting, deal the NMS and network problems with U2000
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
540
7.15.7 iManager uTraffic Network Performance Monitoring Training (Transmission
Network Only)
Training Path
iManager uTraffic System Introduction
ONU20 Lecture 0.5d
iManager uTraffic Configuration and

Performance Management
iManager uTraffic Troubleshooting
ONU22 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience
U2000 Maintenance Engineer and Administrator

Prerequisites

Objectives

Describe the basic concepts in performance management of iManager uTraffic
Describe the IP/Transmission/Access scenario in iManager uTraffic
Understand the basic parameters in performance management of iManager uTraffic
Describe the iManager uTraffic troubleshooting
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
541
7.16 Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs
7.16.1 Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device

Training
Training Path
Transmission Technologies and Device
OTH01 Lecture, Lab 15d
Target Audience
Personnel who are going to take HCNA HTTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission
Technologies and Device) exam
Personnel who expect to learn about basic optical transmission principles and Huawei SDH
equipment operation
Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of telecommunications

Objectives

Describe SDH working principle
Describe WDM working principle
Describe OTN working principle
Describe Ethernet working principle
Describe the basic concept of MPLS
Describe the basic concept of PWE3
Describe the common SDH network topologies and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of MSP/SNCP
Explain the system structure and features of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
State the main functions of the boards in the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
Accomplish the SDH network configuration and monitoring through NMS
Accomplish the PDH service configuration through NMS
Accomplish the Ethernet service (EPL/EVPL/EPLAN) configuration through NMS
List the common analysis methods of fault locating
Duration
15 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
542
7.16.2 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network Training
Training Path
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission

Network
Target Audience
Personnel who are going to take HCNP HTMN (MSTP) (Huawei Certified Network Professional-
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission Network) exam
Personnel who expect to learn SDH network commissioning, maintenance and troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Pass HCNA HTTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

Describe the procedure of the SDH equipment commissioning
Describe the complex Networking of SDH
Replacing the SDH Board
Analyze the discrete services on the NMS
Tests for common Ethernet services indicators
Describe the principle of the clock protection
Describes the notes to do the SDH equipment interconnection
Complete the ECC maintenance
Describes the methods for handling typical faults and alarms to troubleshoot networks in practice
Describes the mechanism of pointer justification
Describes the functions of ASON
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
543
7.16.3 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network Training
Training Path
Building Carrier OTN Transmission

Network
Target Audience
Personnel who are going to take HCNP HTON (OTN) (Huawei Certified Network Professional-
Building Carrier OTN Transmission Network) exam
Personnel who expect to learn WDM network configuration, commissioning, maintenance and
troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Pass HCNA HTTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

Describe the function and features of WDM cabinet, sub-rack and boards
Describe the network topologies and signal flow
Implement the data configuration through iManager U2000
Implement the single station and system commissioning step by step through iManager U2000
List the common indices of WDM product and perform the testing
Describe the WDM protection principle
Describe the notice of traffic interconnection
Describe the principle of ALC/IPA/APE
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back, testing, alarm and
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
544
8 Access Network Training Solution
8.1 Training Path
8.1.1 Principle
IP Basis Training GPON Fundamental Training
ILT 1D ILT 0.5D
Broadband PPPoE/DHCP/
Radius)Basis Training VDSL2 Fundamental Training
ILT 1D
Prerequisites
ILT 0.5D
VoIP H.248/SIP Basis PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN

Training Product Interconnection Training
ILT 1D ILT 1D
IPTV IGMP Proxy/

Snooping Basis Training
ILT 1D
8.1.2 Evolution and Trends
FTTx Network Overview Training FTTO Solution Overview
ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D

Technical Manager
FTTM Solution Overview
ILT 0.5D
10G/40G PON Network FTTx PON+EoC Solution

MSO CMTS Solution Training
Overview Training Training
ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D

Technical Manager
ODN Overview Training iODN Solution Overview
ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D
545
Technical Manager
xDSL Access Network Overview
Vectoring Overview Training G.fast Overview Training
Training
ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D ILT 0.5D
8.1.3 Planning
Planning
Design
FTTx Planning Training
ILT 3D
Planning
Design
ODN Planning Training iDON Planning Training
ILT 3D ILT 3D
Planning
Design
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Series Planning Training
ILT 3D
Planning
Design
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) MSAN UA5000 Planning

Series Planning Training Training
ILT 2D ILT 3D
8.1.4 MA5600T Products
MA5600T Hardware Installation MA5600T Commissioning

Installation and
Commissioning
Training Training
ILT 1D ILT 3D
546
8.1.5 FTTx PON Products

Installation and
Commissioning
Training Training MA5800 System Overview
ILT 1D ILT 3D ILT 0.5D

Installation and
Commissioning
ODN Installation and

ILT 2D
547
GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd
Line Maintenance Training
U2000 FTTx Service Provision
ILT 10D Training
ILT 4D
GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd GPON 3rd Line Maintenance
Line Maintenance Training (Feature Implementation)
Training
ILT 7D ILT 5D
U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training
GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd ILT 2D

Line Maintenance Training

GPON 3rd Line Maintenance
ILT 7D (Advanced Troubleshooting)
Training
U2000 FTTx Maintenance and ILT 5D
GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Troubleshooting Training
ILT 3D
ILT 3D
GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line

ILT 3D
MA5600T Uplink Protection Broadband Access Network
Solution and Configuration Security Solution and
Training Configuration Training
FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance ILT 3D ILT 3D
Training
ILT 3D
FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation MSO CMTS Operation and FTTx PON+EoC Operation and
and Maintenance Training Maintenance Training Maintenance Training

ODN Operation and iODN Operation and iODN NMS Administrator

Maintenance Training Maintenance Training Training
548
8.1.6 DSLAM Products

Installation and
Commissioning
Training Training
ILT 1D ILT 3D
Installation and
Commissioning
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100

Series Commissioning Training Series Commissioning Training Series Commissioning Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T iManager U2000 DSALM DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Series 2nd Line Maintenance MA5600T Series Operation and Series 3rd Line Maintenance
Training Maintenance Training Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600

Series 2nd Line Maintenance Series 3nd Line Maintenance

Training Training
ILT 7D ILT 10D
DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU
DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T
VDSL Vectoring Operation and
Vectoring Maintenance Training
ILT 3D ILT 5D
DSLAM SmartAX MA5300

DSLAM MA5616 Operation and
Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT 3D ILT 5D
549
8.1.7 MSAN Products
MA5600T Hardware Installation MA5600T Commissioning MA5600T 1st Line Maintenance

Installation and
Commissioning
MSAN UA5000 Hardware MSAN UA5000 Commissioning MSAN UA5000 1st Line
Installation and
Commissioning
Installation Training Training Maintenance Training
MSAN SmartAX
MA5600TVoIP Series
ILT 2D
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) iManager U2000 MSAN

Series 2nd Line Maintenance MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and
ILT 3D ILT 2D
HONET V6 MD5500 and

UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT 8D
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000

MSAN UA5000 2nd Line MSAN UA5000 3rd Line
Training
550
8.1.8 BITS
SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line
8.1.9 OSS
iManager N2510 Copper

iManager N2510 OLS Operation

Software Test Operation
Training
Training
ILT 3D ILT 3D
iManager N2510 Copper iManager N2510 Administration

Hardware Test Operation Training
Training
ILT 3D ILT 3D

Access Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs.
List of Training Program(s) for Access Network Project
Program Duration Training Class

Training Program
Level (workdays) Location Size
Principle
IP Basis Training 1 6 ~ 12
Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training 1 6 ~ 12
IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training 1 6 ~ 12
VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training 1 6 ~ 12
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection

1 6 ~ 12
Training
VDSL2 Fundamental Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
GPON Fundamental Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
Evolution and Trends
551
FTTx Network Overview Training 1 6 ~ 12
FTTO Solution Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
FTTM Solution Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
xDSL Access Network Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
ODN Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
10G/40G PON Network Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
Vectoring Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
G.fast Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
iODN Solution Overview Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
MSO CMTS Solution Training 0.5 6 ~ 12
Planning
FTTx Planning Training 3 6 ~ 12
ODN Planning Training 3 6 ~ 12
iODN Planning Training 3 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training 3 6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning

2 6 ~ 12
Training
MSAN UA5000 Planning Training 3 6 ~ 12
MA5600T Products
MA5600T Hardware Installation Training 2 6 ~ 12
MA5600T Commissioning Training 5 6 ~ 12
FTTx PON Products
MA5800 System Overview 0.5 6 ~ 12
GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance

10 6 ~ 12
Training
GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training 7 6 ~ 12
GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance

7 6 ~ 12
Training
552
GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training 4 6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation and Maintenance

7 6 ~ 12
Training
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation)

5 6 ~ 12
Training
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced

5 6 ~ 12
Troubleshooting) Training
MA5600T Uplink Protection Solution and Configuration

3 6 ~ 12
Training
Broadband Access Network Security Solution and

3 6 ~ 12
U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training 4 6 ~ 12
U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training 2 6 ~ 12
U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training 3 6 ~ 12
ODN Installation and Commissioning Training 2 6 ~ 12
ODN Operation and Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
iODN Operation and Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
iODN NMS Administrator Training 2 6 ~ 12
MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training 5 6 ~ 12
FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training 5 6 ~ 12
DSLAM Products
DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T Vectoring Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line

7 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line

10 6 ~ 12
DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring

3 6 ~ 12
DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
553
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation
3 6 ~ 12
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning

4 6 ~ 12
Training

4 6 ~ 12
Training

5 6 ~ 12
Training
DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance

5 6 ~ 12
Training

5 6 ~ 12
Training

7 6 ~ 12
Training

10 6 ~ 12
Training
MSAN Products
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line

3 6 ~ 12
MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning

2 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and

2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training 2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training 6 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training 10 6 ~ 12
MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training 10 6 ~ 12
HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance

8 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and

3 6 ~ 12
BITS
554
SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training 2 6 ~ 12
SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training 3 6 ~ 12
OSS
iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and

5 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM) 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN) 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Copper Software Test Operation

3 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager N2510 Copper Hardware Test Operation

3 6 ~ 12
Training
iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training 3 6 ~ 12
iManager N2510 Administration Training 3 6 ~ 12

Level Description:: Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert Course
555
8.4 Principle Training Programs
8.4.1 IP Basis Training
IP Network Technologies Fundamental On completion of this program, the

OBA00 Lecture 0.5d
Describe the functions of TCP/IP
Describe routing process
Describe the function and process of ARP
MPLS/PWE3 Fundamental
Describe VLAN forwarding process
OBA03 Lecture 0.5d Describe MPLS service implementation
process
Target Audience Describe PWE3 service implementation

process
Technical Support Engineers Duration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers
1 working day
Prerequisites
Class Size
A basic understanding of telecommunication
556
8.4.2 Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training

Describe function and message of PPP and
Broadband Service Protocols PPPoE protocol
OBA02 1d Describe function and message of RADIUS

Lecture
protocol
Target Audience Describe function and message of DHCP
protocol
Technical Support Engineers
Duration
Class Size
Objectives
557
8.4.3 IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training

Describe multicast definition and application
IP Multicast Technologies Describe multicast network structure
OBA04 Lecture 1d Describe multicast service implementation

process
Target Audience Describe function and message of IGMP
protocol
Duration
Class Size
Objectives
558
8.4.4 VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training

Describe SIP function and position in network
Voice Service Protocols Describe SIP typical call flow
OBA05 Lecture 1d Describe H.248 function and position in

network
Target Audience Describe H.248 message structure and typical
call flow
Duration
Class Size
Objectives
559
8.4.5 PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training
Training Path Calculation of the optical fiber optical power

attenuation
PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Calculation of the sub-optical power
Interconnection
1d attenuation
OBA01 Lecture
Describe a variety of fiber optic connectors and
Target Audience passive optical devices
Description of the fiber optic cable related
knowledge
Description of SDH features and functions
Prerequisites
List SDH network protection
A basic understanding of telecommunication Describe WDM principle and OTN frame
network structure
Objectives Duration
On completion of this program, the 1 working day

Describe the structure of optical fiber
Min 6, Max 12
560
8.4.6 VDSL2 Fundamental Training
VDSL2 Fundamental On completion of this program, the

OBA21 Lecture 0.5d
Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking
Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
Target Audience
Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles
Technical Support Engineers Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
A basic understanding of telecommunication 0.5 working day

network
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
561
8.4.7 GPON Fundamental Training
Training Path GPON components

Describe the upstream and downstream
GPON Fundamental technology
OBA22 0.5d Describe the key performance parameters on

Lecture
distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,
Target Audience received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
Describe important concepts about GEM port
and T-CONT
Describe service encapsulation and
Prerequisites multiplexing measures
A basic understanding of telecommunication Describe the QoS and security solution in

network GPON
Objectives Describe ONT management measures

Duration
participants will be able to: 0.5 working day
Describe GPON typical application scenarios Class Size
Describe the functions and specifications of
Min 6, Max 12
562
8.5 Evolution and Trends Training Programs
8.5.1 FTTx Network Overview Training

Describe FTTx features and orientation
FTTx Network Overview Describe FTTx network solution for
OBA10 1d FTTH/B/C/O/M scenarios

Lecture
Describe FTTx service solution, such as high
speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,
Target Audience
enterprise private line services, mobile back
Technical Manager haul services, etc.

Describe FTTx OAM solution
Prerequisites
Duration
network 1 working day
563
8.5.2 FTTO Solution Overview Training

FTTO Solution Overview Describe FTTx network solution for FTTO
OBA07 0.5d scenario

Lecture
Describe FTTO service solution, such as high
Target Audience speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,
enterprise private line services, etc.
Technical Manager
Describe FTTO OAM solution
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
564
8.5.3 FTTM Solution Overview Training

FTTM Solution Overview Describe FTTx network solution for FTTM
OBA08 0.5d scenario

Lecture
Describe FTTM service solution, such as
Target Audience enterprise private line services, mobile back
haul services, etc.
Technical Manager
Describe FTTM OAM solution
Prerequisites
Duration
0.5 working day
network
Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
565
8.5.4 xDSL Access Network Overview Training

Describe xDSL network solution
xDSL Network Overview Describe xDSL service solution
OBA13 Lecture 0.5d Describe function of components in xDSL

network
Target Audience Describe xDSL modulation mode
Describe xDSL band plans and profiles
Technical Manager
Describe xDSL service encapsulation process
Prerequisites
Duration
network
0.5 working day
566
8.5.5 ODN Overview Training
ODN Overview On completion of this program, the

OBA11 Lecture 0.5d
Describe ODN network solution
Describe ODN typical equipment
Target Audience
Describe ODN maintenance instrument
Technical Manager Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
A basic understanding of telecommunication Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
567
8.5.6 10G/40G PON Network Overview Training
NGPON Overview On completion of this program, the

OBA12 Lecture 0.5d
Describe NGPON features
Describe NGPON implementation principle
Target Audience
Describe NGPON network solution
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
568
8.5.7 Vectoring Overview Training
Vectoring Overview On completion of this program, the

OBA13 Lecture 0.5d
Describe vectoring technology features
Describe vectoring key technology
Target Audience
Describe vectoring network solution
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
569
8.5.8 G.fast Overview Training
G.fast Overview On completion of this program, the

OBA14 Lecture 0.5d
Describe G.fast technology features
Describe G.fast key technology
Target Audience
Describe G.fast network solution
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
570
8.5.9 iODN Solution Overview Training

Describe ODN Network Composing
iODN Solution Overview Describe ODN Network Maintenance
OBG37 0.5d Challenge

Lecture, Lab
Describe iODN Network Structure
Target Audience Describe iODN Solution Module
Outline iODN advantage
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network and GPON Class Size

571
8.5.10 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training

Describe traditional cable network Introduction
FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
OBA14 0.5d network

Lecture
Describe PON+EOC solution overview
Target Audience Outline the difference between CMTS and
xPON
Technical Manager
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network Class Size
572
8.5.11 MSO CMTS Solution Training
MSO CMTS Solution Overview On completion of this program, the

OBA14 Lecture 0.5d
Describe CMTS introduction
Target Audience
Describe MSO CMTS solution
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
network
Min 6, Max 12
573
8.6 Planning Training Programs
8.6.1 FTTx Planning Training
Training Path Outline OLT/ONU product functions and

specification
GPON Planning Outline OLT/ONU hardware architecture and
specification
OBG10 Lecture 3d
Design GPON network for multiple services
Design hardware system
Target Audience
Plan bandwidth for internet service
Planning Engineers Plan bandwidth for leased line service
Prerequisites Plan bandwidth for VoIP service

Plan bandwidth for IPTV service
Be familiar with basic knowledge about
Plan VLAN, IP and site name
telecommunications and data communications
Plan QoS
Be familiar with GPON technology
Design security and protection solution
At least 1 years experience in
Design OAM solution
telecommunication network planning
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Describe GPON network architecture Min 6, Max 12

Describe GPON network design background
574
8.6.2 ODN Planning Training
Training Path Describe Closure function and application

Describe Splitter function and application
ODN Overview and Components Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application
OBG39 Lecture, Lab 0.5d Describe ODN project lifecycle

Outline ODN planning process
Outline ODN planning considerations
ODN Planning Outline ODN topology design
Describe ODN splitting strategy
OBG40 Lecture, Lab 2.5d
Describe ODN protection design
Target Audience Describe ODN design scenario models
Describe ODN Cable Plan Considerations
Planning Engineers
Perform ODN Cable Route Design
Prerequisites
Perform ODN Cable Core Design
Be familiar with basic knowledge about Perform ODN Cable Type Selection
telecommunications and data communications Describe ODN civil work methodology
Be familiar with GPON Network Outline ODN duct type
At least 1 years experience in Outline ODN manhole and handhole
telecommunication network planning Describe ISP typical scenarios and solutions
Objectives Outline ISP modules and workflow
Describe ODN Case
Describe ODN architecture 3 working days

Describe ODF function and application Class Size
Describe FDT function and application
Describe FAT function and application
Min 6, Max 12
575
8.6.3 iODN Planning Training
iODN Solution Overview On completion of this program, the

Describe ODN Network Composing
Describe ODN Network Maintenance
Challenge
iODN Components
Describe iODN Network Structure
OBG41 Lecture, Lab 0.5d Describe iODN Solution Module
Outline iODN advantage
Describe ODN architecture
iODN Planning Describe iODF function and application
OBG42 Lecture, Lab 2.5d Describe iFDT function and application

Describe iField component
Target Audience Describe iODN planning process
Outline iODN topology design
Planning Engineers
Describe iODN splitting strategy
Prerequisites
Describe iODN protection design
Be familiar with basic knowledge about Describe iODN design scenario models
Duration
Be familiar with GPON Network
At least 1 years experience in 3 working days
telecommunication network planning Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
576
8.6.4 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training
SmartAX MA5600T (DSLAM) Planning On completion of this program, the

OBL10 Lecture 3d
Design DSLAM MA5600T network to carry
multiple service
Target Audience
Plan DSLAM MA5600T hardware system
Planning Engineers Plan DSLAM MA5600T service bandwidth
Prerequisites Plan VLAN, IP and site name
Plan DSLAM MA5600T QoS and security
Plan OAM solution for DSLAM MA5600T
Be familiar with DSLAM technology Duration

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
577
8.6.5 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training

Design MA5600T(VoIP) network to carry VoIP
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning service
OBM10 2d Plan MA5600T(VoIP) hardware system

Lecture
Plan MA5600T(VoIP) service bandwidth
Target Audience Plan VLAN, IP and site name
Plan VoIP interface parameters
Planning Engineers
Plan MA5600T(VoIP) QoS and security
Prerequisites
Plan OAM solution for MA5600T(VoIP)
Be familiar with basic knowledge about Duration
Be familiar with VoIP technology
2 working days
At least 1 years experience in Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
578
8.6.6 MSAN UA5000 Planning Training
MSAN UA5000 Planning On completion of this program, the

OBU10 Lecture 3d
Describe system structure
Describe service implementation and solution
Target Audience
Plan hardware system
Planning Engineers Plan bandwidth for internet service, VoIP
Prerequisites service, and multicast service
Plan VLAN, PVC,IP and site name
Plan V5 or MG Interface
Be familiar with MSAN technology Duration

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
579
8.7 MA5600T Products Training Programs
8.7.1 MA5600T Hardware Installation Training

Introduce FTTx network
GPON FTTx System Overview Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
OBG00 0.5d frames, boards and cables

Lecture
Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions
Install MA5600T devices cabinet, frame and
MA5600T Hardware Installation board properly
Perform MA5600T devices cable routing and
OBG20 Lecture 1.5d
termination properly
Identify the cautions and facts which may
Target Audience affect MA5600T system running due to
improperly installation
Installation technician
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
Class Size
equipment installation
580
8.7.2 MA5600T Commissioning Training
Training Path GPON components

GPON Fundamental technology
Describe the key performance parameters on
OBA22 Lecture 0.5d
received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
GPON FTTx System Overview
and T-CONT
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d Describe service encapsulation and multiplexing
measures
Describe the QoS and security solution in GPON
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and Describe ONT management measures
Maintenance
OBG30 Lecture, Lab 1d Introduce FTTx network
Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
frames, boards and cables
MA5600T Stand-alone Commisioning Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions
Establish the connection and login to the system
OBG33 Lecture, Lab 1d
Perform the common basic operation, such as
Target Audience query status of hardware and software, backup
and restore data, system name change and
System and service Commissioning alarm query etc.
Technicians Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-
Prerequisites alone commissioning,
Perform the commissioning verification
A basic understanding of telecommunication and
data communication Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-
alone commissioning,
At least 1 year operation and maintenance
experience of the telecommunication equipment Perform the commissioning verification
Objectives Duration

Describe GPON typical application scenarios
Min 6, Max 12
581
8.8 FTTx PON Products Training Programs
8.8.1 MA5800 System Overview
Training Path equipment

Objectives
MA5800 System Overview
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d
Target Audience Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
frames, boards and cables of MA5800
System and service Commissioning
Describe MA5800 application solutions
Technicians
Duration
Prerequisites
0.5 working day
and data communication
Class Size
At least 1 year operation and maintenance Min 6, Max 12

experience of the telecommunication
582
8.8.2 GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

IP Network Technologies Fundamental Describe routing process
OBA00 Lecture 0.5d Describe the function and process of ARP

GPON Fundamental Describe the functions and specifications of
GPON components
OBA22 Lecture 0.5d
technology
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
and T-CONT
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and Describe service encapsulation and
Maintenance
OBG30 1d multiplexing measures
Lecture, Lab
Describe the QoS and security solution in
GPON
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation Describe ONT management measures
and Maintenance Introduce FTTx network
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service
Operation and Maintenance Establish the connection and login to the
OBG51 Lecture, Lab 3d system
query status of hardware and software, backup
GPON FTTx Troubleshooting and restore data, system name change and
1.5d alarm query etc.

OBG60 Lecture, Lab
Describe GPON FTTH service implementation
Target Audience process
Perform GPON FTTH HSI service
configuration, maintenance and verification.
Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service
Prerequisites configuration, maintenance and verification
A basic understanding of telecommunication Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service
and IP Technology configuration, maintenance and verification

Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
Objectives
Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service
On completion of this program, the configuration, maintenance and verification
583
Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service Troubleshooting multicast service
configuration, maintenance and verification Troubleshooting voice service
Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service Duration
configuration, maintenance and verification
10 working days
Troubleshooting hardware and software
system Class Size
Troubleshooting ONU
Min 6, Max 12
Troubleshooting internet access service
584
8.8.3 GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe VLAN forwarding process

IP Network Technologies Fundamental Describe the functions and specifications of
OBA00 0.5d GPON components

Lecture
technology
GPON Fundamental Describe the key performance parameters on
OBA22 Lecture 0.5d
and T-CONT
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d multiplexing measures
GPON
Maintenance
GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

and Maintenance Establish the connection and login to the
system
GPON FTTx Troubleshooting
OBG60 Lecture, Lab 1.5d alarm query etc.
Describe GPON FTTH service implementation
Target Audience process
Perform GPON FTTH HSI service
configuration, maintenance and verification.
Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service
and IP Technology configuration, maintenance and verification
Objectives Troubleshooting hardware and software
system
Troubleshooting ONU
Troubleshooting multicast service
Troubleshooting voice service
585
Duration Class Size
586
8.8.4 GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

IP Network Technologies Fundamental Describe the functions and specifications of
OBA00 0.5d GPON components

Lecture
technology
GPON Fundamental Describe the key performance parameters on
OBA22 Lecture 0.5d
and T-CONT
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d multiplexing measures
GPON
Maintenance
GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

Operation and Maintenance Establish the connection and login to the
system
GPON FTTx Troubleshooting
OBG60 Lecture, Lab 1.5d alarm query etc.
Describe GPON FTTB/C networking
Target Audience Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service
Prerequisites
Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service
A basic understanding of telecommunication configuration, maintenance and verification
and IP Technology Troubleshooting hardware and software
Objectives system
Troubleshooting ONU
587
Duration Class Size
588
8.8.5 GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path technology

GPON Fundamental distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,
0.5d received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.

OBA22 Lecture
and T-CONT
GPON FTTx System Overview Describe service encapsulation and

multiplexing measures
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d
GPON
Describe ONT management measures
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and
Maintenance Introduce FTTx network
OBG30 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
GPON FTTO Data/Voice Service Establish the connection and login to the
system
Target Audience query status of hardware and software, backup
alarm query etc.
Describe GPON FTTO networking
Prerequisites Perform GPON FTTO data service
and IP Technology Perform GPON FTTO VoIP service
Objectives
Troubleshooting GPON FTTO data/voice
On completion of this program, the service
3 working days
GPON components Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
589
8.8.6 GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe the QoS and security solution in

GPON
GPON Fundamental Describe ONT management measures
OBA22 0.5d Introduce FTTx network

Lecture
GPON FTTx System Overview Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions
Establish the connection and login to the
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d
system
Maintenance and restore data, system name change and
OBG30 Lecture, Lab 1d alarm query etc.
Describe GPON FTTM networking
Perform GPON FTTM base station access
GPON FTTM Base station access Service service configuration, maintenance and
verification
Troubleshooting GPON FTTM base station
Target Audience service
Duration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers 3 working days
A basic understanding of telecommunication Min 6, Max 12

and IP Technology
Objectives

GPON components
technology
and T-CONT
multiplexing measures
590
8.8.7 FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training

GPON FTTx System Overview Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
OBG00 0.5d frames, boards and cables

Lecture
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and system
Maintenance Perform the common basic operation, such as
alarm query etc.
FTTx P2P Service Operation and
Maintenance Describe FTTx P2P networking
OBG51 Lecture, Lab 1.5d Perform FTTx P2P Triple-play service
Perform GPON service pre-deployment via
U2000 P2P Service Provisioning U2000
Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via
OBH50 Lecture, Lab 1d
U2000
Target Audience Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
U2000
Duration
Class Size
and IP Technology Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
591
8.8.8 FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation and Maintenance Training
GPON Fundamental A basic understanding of telecommunication

OBA22 Lecture 0.5d
Objectives

GPON FTTx System Overview participants will be able to:
Describe GPON typical application
OBG00 Lecture 0.5d
scenarios
Describe the functions and
specifications of GPON components
Maintenance Describe the upstream and downstream
OBG30 Lecture, Lab 1d technology
Describe the key performance
parameters on distance, bandwidth, optical
FTTX GPON ONU basic operation launched power, received sensitive power,
attenuation, etc.
OBF60 Lecture, Lab 1d
Describe important concepts about
GEM port and T-CONT
FTTB/C VDSL2 service principle and Describe service encapsulation and

configuration multiplexing measures
OBF61 Lecture, Lab 1.5d Describe the QoS and security solution
in GPON
Describe ONT management measures
FTTB/C Vectoring service system principle
and configuration Introduce FTTx network
OBF62 Lecture, Lab 1.5d Describe the function and structure of

cabinet, frames, boards and cables
Vectoring service planning and reforming Establish the connection and login to
the system
OBL70 Lecture 0.5d
Perform the common basic operation,
such as query status of hardware and
software, backup and restore data, system
Vectoring service troubleshooting
name change and alarm query etc.
OBL71 Lecture, Lab 0.5d Describe MXU features
Describe MXU basic configuration
Target Audience Describe VDSL2 technology features
Describe VDSL2 key technology
Describe VDSL2 network solution
Describe VDSL2 configuration of
FTTB/C
592
Describe vectoring technology features Describe vectoring troubleshooting
Describe vectoring key technology method
Describe vectoring network solution Duration
Describe vectoring configuration of
7 working day
FTTB/C
Class Size
Describe vectoring planning method
Describe vectoring planning cases Min 6, Max 12
593
8.8.9 GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training
GPON Advanced Operation and On completion of this program, the

Maintenance participants will be able to:
Describe Layer2 features
Outline QoS features
Target Audience
Explain multicast features
Technical Support Engineers Describe network protection features
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Describe security features
Completion of GPON 2nd Line Maintenance 5 working days

Training or having equivalent knowledge
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
594
8.8.10 GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting) Training

Troubleshooting OLT hardware and software
GPON Advanced Troubleshooting System
OBG90 5d Troubleshooting ONU

Lecture, Lab
Target Audience Troubleshooting multicast service
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Duration
Completion of GPON 3nd Line Maintenance Class Size

Training or having equivalent knowledge Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
595
8.8.11 MA5600T Uplink Protection Solution and Configuration Training
Training Path Describe Smart Link and Monitor Link feature

Describe Ethernet link aggregation feature
Ethernet Protection Fundamental Describe BFD feature
Overview
OBA20 Lecture 1d Perform MSTP Configuration on MA5600T
Perform Smart Link and Monitor Link
Configuration on MA5600T
MA5600T Network Protection Perform Ethernet link aggregation
Perform BFD Configuration on MA5600T
Perform MSTP Configuration on S93 to
interconnect with MA5600T
S93 Series Switches Ethernet Protection
Perform Smart Link and Monitor Link
OBG90 Lecture, Lab 1d Configuration on S93 to interconnect with
MA5600T
Target Audience
Perform Ethernet link aggregation
Technical Support Engineers Configurationon on S93 to interconnect with
Operation and Maintenance Engineers MA5600T
Perform BFD Configuration on S93 to
Prerequisites
interconnect with MA5600T
A basic understanding of telecommunication Duration
and IP Technology
Class Size
Describe MSTP feature
596
8.8.12 Broadband Access Network Security Solution and Configuration Training
Training Path Describe 802.1x Configuration on MA5600T

Describe Anti-MAC Spoofing and anti-IP
MA5600T Security Solution Spoofing Configuration on MA5600T
OBG90 1d Describe User isolation and line security

Lecture
Describe PITP Configuration on BRAS
BRAS Security Solution Describe 802.1x Configuration with BRAS
Describe Anti-MAC Spoofing and anti-IP
OBG90 Lecture 0.5d
Spoofing Configuration on BRAS
Describe User isolation and line security
Configuration on BRAS
Integrated Security Solution Practice with
MA5600T and BRAS Perform PITP Configuration with BRAS and
OBG90 Lab 1.5d MA5600T
Perform 802.1x Configuration with BRAS and
Target Audience
MA5600T
Technical Support Engineers Perform Anti-MAC Spoofing and anti-IP

Operation and Maintenance Engineers Spoofing Configuration with BRAS and
MA5600T
Prerequisites
Perform User isolation and line security
A basic understanding of telecommunication Configuration with BRAS and MA5600T
and IP Technology Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Describe PITP Configuration on MA5600T Min 6, Max 12
597
8.8.13 U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training
U2000 System Introduction On completion of this program, the

ONU01 Lecture 0.5d
U2000
U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance
(Access) Login to U2000 server via client
OBH30 Lecture 0.5d Add a map and device
Deal with the alarm
Backup and auto save the configuration
U2000 GPON Service Provisioning Add a management user
OBH50 Lecture, Lab 3d Perform GPON service pre-deployment via

U2000
Target Audience Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via
U2000
Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
U2000
Prerequisites
Duration
General understanding of telecommunication
4 working days
network and GPON
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
598
8.8.14 U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training

U2000 System Introduction U2000
ONU01 0.5d List the main functions of U2000

Lecture
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and
performance management of U2000
U2000 Alarm and Performance Perform the browse and setting operation for
Management alarm
ONU02 Lecture, Lab 0.5d
Perform the basic response operation for
common alarm events
Perform the browse and setting operation for
Access Network Device Introduction
performance events
ONU08 Lecture 1d Locate the alarm in the network
Explain the networking and application of
Target Audience
Huawei Access network equipment
Technical Support Engineers Describe the functions of Huawei network

Operation and Maintenance Engineers products
Describe the capacity and features of Huawei
Prerequisites
network products
Having the basic knowledge of network Duration
management
Having the basic principle and equipment 2 working days
knowledge of Access network Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
599
8.8.15 U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training
Training Path Describe replacing ONTs

Outline configuring a Service Level for an ONT
U2000 FTTx Troubleshooting Describe Remote MDU Acceptance
OBG43 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe Replacing an Ethernet-Upstream

Device Quickly
Describe Replacing a PON MDU Quickly
U2000 GPON Maintenance Describe FTTx Alarm types
Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Analysis
OBH60 Lecture 2d
Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Management
Target Audience perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance
Monitoring
Perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Management
Prerequisites Analysis FTTx common faults troubleshooting
on U2000
Having the basic knowledge of network
management Describe FTTx faults diagnose through U2000
Having the basic principle and equipment Describe FTTx faults information collection
knowledge of Access network through U2000

Describe FTTx case study on U2000
Objectives
Duration
Describe FTTx fast operation and maintenance Class Size
Describe upgrading ONTs Automatically
Min 6, Max 12
600
8.8.16 ODN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path Having the basic knowledge of Access network

Objectives
ODN Overview
OBA11 Lecture 0.5d
Describe ODF function and application
ODN Overview and Components
OBG39 Lecture, Lab 0.5d Describe FAT function and application
Describe Closure function and application
ODN Installation and Commissioning
Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application
OBG44 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe ODN deployment method
Describe ODN test method
Target Audience
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Prerequisites
Min 6, Max 12
management
601
8.8.17 ODN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe ODF function and application

ODN Overview Describe FAT function and application
OBA11 Lecture 0.5d Describe Closure function and application

Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application
ODN Overview and Components Describe ODN common operation
Describe preventive maintenance purpose
List the maintenance tools
List of preventive Maintenance items
ODN Operation and Maintenance List of planed maintenance items

Complete maintenance tasks
Outline troubleshooting flow
Target Audience Analysis the ODN common fault

Locate the ODN common fault
Technical Support Engineers Complete corrective maintenance tasks
Describe common fault category
Prerequisites Outline typical fault troubleshooting method
Having the basic knowledge of network Complete fault troubleshooting
management Duration
Having the basic knowledge of Access network
3 working days
Objectives
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
602
8.8.18 iODN Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Outline the benefits of iODN solution

Describe U2000 ODN NMS position and
iODN Operation and Maintenance function
OBG35 1.5d Describe U2000 ODN NMS basic operation in

Lecture, Lab
web client
Add resource through U2000 ODN NMS web
iODN System Introduction client
Configure iODN and services through U2000
ODN NMS web client
Implement troubleshooting in U2000 ODN
Target Audience
NMS web client
Technical Support Engineers Describe iFiled basic operation in onsite
Operation and Maintenance Engineers construction
Prerequisites Describe the fiber jump process in and among
the cabinet
Having the basic knowledge of ODN
Outline remove fiber operation steps
Having the basic principle and equipment
Outline cancel order operation steps
knowledge of ODN
Duration
Objectives
2 working days
Class Size
Describe iODN networking and hardware Min 6, Max 12
Describe iODN solution
603
8.8.19 iODN NMS Administrator Training
Training Path Describe U2000 ODN NMS ex-interface

Perform U2000 ODN NMS server and client
iODN System Introduction configuration
OBG36 0.5d Describe iField function and applications

Lecture, Lab
Describe alarms and events in U2000 ODN
NMS
iODN NMS Administrator Operation and Describe monitoring network alarms
Maintenance Describe setting and handling alarms
Outline analyzing alarm correlation
Target Audience Describe U2000 ODN NMS security

management
Technical Support Engineers Describe U2000 ODN NMS log management
Operation and Maintenance Engineers operation
Prerequisites Outline U2000 ODN NMS time localization
management operation
Adjusting the U2000 ODN NMS
management
Managing License
Having the basic knowledge of Access network
Managing U2000 ODN NMS database, files
Objectives
and disks
On completion of this program, the Describe method of checking resource usage
participants will be able to: of the server
Describe ODN Network Composing Describe how to check running status of
Describe ODN Network Maintenance processes and services
Challenge Describe method of backing up U2000 ODN
Describe iODN Network Structure NMS data
Describe iODN Solution Module Outline normal troubleshooting process and
Outline iODN advantage typical cases
Describe iODF function and application Duration
Describe iFDT function and application
2 working days
Describe iField component
Class Size
Describe U2000 ODN NMS characteristics and
software structure Min 6, Max 12
604
8.8.20 MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training
IP Network Technologies Fundamental A basic understanding of telecommunication

OBA00 Lecture 0.5d
Objectives

MSO CMTS Solution Overview participants will be able to:
OBA14 Lecture 0.5d
D-CMTS Principle Describe VLAN forwarding process

Describe EOC concepts
OBG57 Lecture 0.5d
Describe EOC technologies
Describe CMTS introduction
iManager U2000 Service Provision (D-
CMTS) Describe MSO CMTS solution
OBG60 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe FTTx D-CMTS Triple-play service
configuration procedure
Perform FTTx D-CMTS Triple-play service
FTTx D-CMTS Troubleshooting configuration correctly based on data planning
OBG62 0.5d Perform the FTTx D-CMTS service

Lecture
provisioning on U2000
Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx D-CMTS
FTTx D-CMTS Operation and common faults and deal with emergencies in
Maintenance services and functions
Duration
Target Audience 5 working days
Technical Support Engineers Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
605
8.8.21 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training
IP Network Technologies Fundamental A basic understanding of telecommunication

OBA00 Lecture 0.5d
Objectives

FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview participants will be able to:
OBA14 Lecture 0.5d
GPON FTTx Basic Operation and Describe VLAN forwarding process

Maintenance Describe EOC concepts
Describe EOC technologies
Describe FTTx basic concepts and
applications
PON+EOC Principle
Describe FTTx EOC product architecture
OBG56 Lecture 1d Describe FTTx EOC MA563x features
Describe how to integrate EOC product in
CATV network
FTTx EOC System Overview Describe traditional cable network
Introduction
OBG58 Lecture 0.5d
Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS
network
iManager U2000 Service Provision (EOC) Describe PON+EOC solution overview

Outline the difference between CMTS and
xPON
system
FTTx EOC Troubleshooting
Perform the common basic operation, such
OBG61 Lecture 0.5d as query status of hardware and software,
backup and restore data, system name
change and alarm query etc.
FTTx EOC Operation and Maintenance Perform the ONU adding and check the ONU
status
Describe FTTx EOC HSI service
Target Audience configuration procedure
Perform FTTx EOC HSI service configuration
Technical Support Engineers correctly based on data planning
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform the FTTx EOC service provisioning
on U2000
Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx EOC
606
common faults and deal with emergencies in Class Size
services and functions
Min 6, Max 12
Duration
7 working day
607
8.9 DSLAM Products Training Programs
8.9.1 DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T Vectoring Maintenance Training
Training Path and data communication

Objectives
VDSL2 Fundamental
OBA21 Lecture 0.5d participants will be able to:
Describe VDSL2 orientation and
networking
DSLAM MA5683T basic operation
Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
OBL72 Lecture, Lab 0.5d Describe VDSL2 band plans and
profiles
Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
DSLAM MA5683T VDSL2 service Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
configuration
Describe DSLAM MA5603T features
OBL73 Lecture, Lab 2d
Describe DSLAM MA5603T basic
configuration
Vectoring service planning and reforming Describe VDSL2 technology features
Describe VDSL2 key technology
OBL70 Lecture 1d
Describe VDSL2 network solution
Describe VDSL2 configuration on
MA5603T
Vectoring service troubleshooting
Describe vectoring planning method
OBL71 Lecture, Lab 1d Describe vectoring planning cases
Describe vectoring troubleshooting
Target Audience method
Duration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers 5 working day
A basic understanding of telecommunication Min 6, Max 12
608
8.9.2 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Describe xDSL network solution
IP Network Technologies Fundamental Describe xDSL service solution
OBA00 Lecture 0.5d Describe xDSL service process

Describe MA5600T product positioning and
networking
xDSL Technology Fundamental Outline MA5600T product functions
Describe MA5600T system features
OBA20 Lecture 1d
List device management method
Describe MA5600T cabinet
MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview Outline MA5600T shelf

Describe MA5600T functions of boards
OBL00 Lecture 0.5d
Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection
system
MA5600T (DSLAM) Basic Operation and
OBL30 Lecture, Lab 1d query status of hardware and software, backup
and restore data, system name change, alarm
query, etc.
MA5600T (DSLAM) Service Configuration Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
implementation in MA5600T
Describe multicast service implementation
MA5600T
Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile
MA5600T (DSLAM) Troubleshooting
Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
OBL60 Lecture 1d configuration
Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and
Target Audience
maintenance
Technical Support Engineers Complete multicast service configuration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform multicast service operation and
Prerequisites maintenance
system
Objectives

7 working days
Class Size
Describe the function and process of ARP Min 6, Max 12
609
8.9.3 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe function and message of PPP and

PPPoE protocol
Broadband Service Protocols Describe function and message of RADIUS
1d protocol
OBA02 Lecture
Describe function and message of DHCP
protocol
xDSL Technology In-depth Describe xDSL modulation mode

OBA80 Lecture 0.5d
Deal with noise of xDSL line
Describe xDSL packet transfer mode
Describe triple-play solution introduction
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced Operation
and Maintenance Complete triple-play service configuration
OBL70 Lecture, Lab 7d Describe and provision xDSL features
Describe and provision layer2 features
Describe and provision QoS features
MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced
Troubleshooting Describe and provision network protection
OBL90 Lecture, Lab 1.5d features
Describe and provision user security features
Target Audience Describe and provision multicast features
Technical Support Engineers Troubleshoot complex faults in hardware and

software system
Troubleshoot complex faults in the Internet
Prerequisites
access service
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Troubleshoot complex faults in the multicast
Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training or service
having equivalent knowledge Duration
Objectives
10 working days
Min 6, Max 12
610
8.9.4 DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and Maintenance
Training

Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking
VDSL2 Fundamental Describe VDSL2 modulation mode
OBA21 Lecture 0.5d Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles

Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
Vectoring Overview Describe vectoring technology features
Describe vectoring key technology
OBA13 Lecture 0.5d
Describe vectoring network solution
Describe VDSL2 service implementation
DSLAM VDSL Vectoring Service Describe multicast service implementation

Configuration Complete VDSL2 service configuration
OBL50 Lecture, Lab 1.5d
Perform VDSL2 service operation and
maintenance
Complete multicast service configuration
DSLAM VDSL Vectoring Troubleshooting
Perform multicast service operation and
OBL60 Lecture 0.5d maintenance
Troubleshooting vectoring hardware and
Target Audience
software system
Technical Support Engineers Troubleshooting internet/multicast service
Operation and Maintenance Engineers based on vectoring technology
A basic understanding of telecommunication 3 working days

and data communication Class Size
611
8.9.5 DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Outline MA5616 product functions

Describe MA5616 system features
MA5616 (DSLAM) Overview Describe MA5616 functions of boards
OBL00 Lecture 0.5d Outline MA5616 cables and interconnection

Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
implementation in MA5616
MA5616 (DSLAM) Service Configuration Describe multicast service implementation in
MA5616
configuration
MA5616 (DSLAM) Troubleshooting
Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and
OBL60 Lecture 0.5d maintenance
Target Audience
Technical Support Engineers maintenance
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Troubleshooting hardware and software
Prerequisites system
Duration
Objectives
3 working days
Class Size
Describe MA5616 product positioning and Min 6, Max 12
networking
612
8.9.6 iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance
Training
U2000 System Introduction On completion of this program, the

ONU01 0
Lecture Describe the architecture and main features of
.
U2000
iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T
Series Operation and Maintenance Login to U2000 server via client
OBH51 Lab 2 Add a map and device
d
Deal with the alarm
U2000 Basic Operation and Add a management user
Maintenance (Access)
OBH30 Lecture 0 Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via
.
U2000
Target Audience Perform VDSL2 service configuration via
U2000
Duration
Class Size
and DSLAM Min 6, Max 12
613
8.9.7 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training

OBA00 Lecture 0.5d
SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning
OBC22 Lecture, Lab 3.5d Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-
alone commissioning, network commissioning,
Target Audience service commissioning and the commissioning
System Commissioning Technicians verification
Service Commissioning Technicians Duration

Min 6, Max 12
614

OBA00 Lecture 0.5d
OBJ22 Lecture, Lab 3.5d Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-

Min 6, Max 12
615

OBA00 Lecture 0.5d
OBK22 Lecture, Lab 4.5d Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-

Min 6, Max 12
616
8.9.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Describe System Overview
SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and Describe Hardware Architecture
Maintenance
Describe Functional Features
OBC20 Lecture, Lab 3.5d
Describe Networking Applications
Introduce CLI
SmartAX MA5100 Series Troubleshooting Perform System Maintenance

Perform ATM-DSLAM Service Configuration
OBC21 Lecture, Lab 1d
Perform IP-DSLAM Service Configuration
Target Audience Troubleshooting ADSL service

Troubleshooting LAN service
Duration
Class Size
and data communication Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
617


Describe product positioning and networking
SmartAX MA5300 Series Operation and Describe hardware architecture
Maintenance
Describe functional features
OBJ20 Lecture, Lab 3.5d
Describe networking applications
Perform service configuration and
SmartAX MA5300 Series Troubleshooting maintenance

Perform system maintenance
OBJ21 Lecture, Lab 1d
system
Target Audience
Troubleshooting ADSL service
Technical Support Engineers Troubleshooting LAN service
Prerequisites
5 working days
618


Describe system networking and positioning
SmartAX MA5600 Series Operation and Describe hardware architecture
Maintenance
Describe functional features
OBK20 Lecture, Lab 5.5d
Describe networking applications
Perform system daily maintenance
SmartAX MA5600 Series Troubleshooting Perform service configuration and

maintenance
OBK21 Lecture, Lab 1d
Troubleshooting ADSL service
Target Audience
Troubleshooting LAN service
Technical Support Engineers Troubleshooting Multicast service
Duration
Prerequisites
7 working days
Class Size
619
Training Path PPPoE protocol

Describe function and message of RADIUS
Broadband Service Protocols protocol
OBA02 1d Describe function and message of DHCP

Lecture
protocol
Describe xDSL modulation mode
xDSL Technology In-depth Describe xDSL band plans and profiles
OBA80 Lecture 0.5d
Describe xDSL packet transfer mode
Describe and provision QinQ VLAN features
Describe and provision VLAN Stacking
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced
Operation and Maintenance features
OBK70 Lecture, Lab 7.5d Describe and provision PITP features
Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced
Troubleshooting Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE
OBK61 Lecture, Lab 1d features
Describe and provision Triple-play service
Target Audience Troubleshooting complex faults in MA5600
Technical Support Engineers system

Troubleshooting complex faults in ADSL
service
Prerequisites
Troubleshooting complex faults in internet
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 access service
Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training or Troubleshooting complex faults in multicast
having equivalent knowledge service
Objectives Duration

Min 6, Max 12
620
8.10 MSAN Products Training Programs
8.10.1 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training

H.248 or SIP Protocol Describe SIP message and message flow
OBA06 Lecture 0.5d Describe H.248 function and position in

network
Describe H.248 message structure and call
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System flow
Overview
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,
OBM00 Lecture 0.5d
function and networking application
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Basic
Operation and Maintenance cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
OBM30 Lecture, Lab 1d Establish the connection and login to the
system
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Service query status of hardware and software, backup
Configuration
OBM50 Lecture 0.5d
query, etc.
Describe VoIP service implementation process
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Complete VoIP service configuration

Troubleshooting Perform VoIP service operation and
OBM60 Lecture 0.5d
maintenance
Troubleshooting hardware
Target Audience Troubleshooting software
Troubleshooting VoIP service
Duration
Class Size
and data communication Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
621
8.10.2 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System On completion of this program, the

OBM00 Lecture 0.5d
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,
function and networking application
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Service
Commissioning Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including
OBM33 Lecture, Lab 1.5d cabinet, shelves, boards and cables
Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-
Target Audience alone commissioning, network commissioning,
Technical Support Engineers service commissioning and the commissioning

verification
Duration
Prerequisites
2 working days
and data communication Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
622
8.10.3 iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training


Lecture
Login to U2000 server via client
Add a map and device
iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T (VoIP) Deal with the alarm
OBH53 Lab 1d
Add a management user
Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
via U2000
(Access) Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via
OBH30 Lecture 0.5d U2000
Perform MSAN multicast service configuration
Target Audience
via U2000
2 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
A basic understanding of U2000 and MSAN
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
623
8.10.4 MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training
Training Path Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning

Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
MSAN UA5000 System Overview Describe MSAN UA5000 system features
OBU00 Lecture 0.5d Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking

Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and
ports
MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Install UA5000 cabinet, frame and board
properly
OBU20 Lecture, Lab 1.5d
Perform UA5000 cable routing and termination
Target Audience properly

Identify the cautions and facts which may
Installation technician affect UA5000 system running due to
Prerequisites improperly installation
Duration
and data communication 2 working days

624
8.10.5 MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training

Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning
IP Network Technologies Fundamental Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
OBA00 Lecture 0.5d Describe MSAN UA5000 system features

Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
MSAN UA5000 System Overview ports
OBU00 Lecture 0.5d
system
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and
Maintenance and restore data, system name change, alarm
OBU30 Lecture, Lab 1d query, etc.
Check the equipment running conditions, such
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service mounted boards, etc.
Commissioning
Perform the broadband system
OBU31 Lecture, Lab 2d
commissioning, network commissioning, xDSL
service commissioning
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service Eliminate the fault during the commissioning
Commissioning process
OBU32 Lecture, Lab 2.5d Perform the narrowband system
commissioning, stand-alone commissioning,
Target Audience
network commissioning, voice service
System Commissioning Technicians commissioning
Service Commissioning Technicians Eliminate the fault during the commissioning
Prerequisites process
Duration
and data communication 6 working days
625
8.10.6 MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions

Describe MSAN UA5000 system features
MSAN UA5000 System Overview Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
OBU00 Lecture 0.5d Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and

ports
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and system
query, etc.
MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance
Describe the general methods of field
OBU33 Lecture, Lab 0.5d maintenance
Perform the alarm query and running status
Target Audience query by indications of the LED
Field Technicians Perform simple diagnose according to field

situation and daily maintenance
Prerequisites
Perform component replacement
A basic understanding of telecommunication Duration
Class Size
626
8.10.7 MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training

IP Network Technologies Fundamental Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions
OBA00 Lecture 0.5d Describe MSAN UA5000 system features

Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking
MSAN UA5000 System Overview ports
OBU00 Lecture 0.5d
system
MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and
Maintenance and restore data, system name change, alarm
OBU30 Lecture, Lab 1d query, etc.
Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
implementation process
MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service Describe multicast service implementation
Configuration
process
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service configuration
Configuration Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and
OBU51 Lecture, Lab 3
d maintenance
MSAN UA5000 Broadband
Troubleshooting maintenance
OBU60 Lecture 2d Describe Voice service implementation
process
Complete Voice service configuration
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Perform Voice service operation and
Troubleshooting
0.5d maintenance
OBU61 Lecture
Troubleshooting IPM System
Target Audience Troubleshooting internet access service
Troubleshooting Ethernet port
Troubleshooting PVM System
Prerequisites
Troubleshooting Voice service
A basic understanding of telecommunication Troubleshooting E1 port
and data communication Duration
Objectives
10 working days
627
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
628
8.10.8 MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path protocol

Describe function and message of DHCP
Broadband Service Protocols protocol
OBA02 1d Describe xDSL modulation mode

Lecture
Voice Service Protocols Describe xDSL packet transfer mode
OBA05 Lecture 1d
Describe SIP typical call flow
Describe H.248 function and position in
network
xDSL Technology In-depth
Describe H.248 message structure and typical
OBA80 Lecture 0.5d call flow
Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation
features
OBU70 Lecture, Lab 5d Describe and provision VLAN features

Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
Describe and provision DHCP multicast
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Troubleshooting features
Describe triple play service solution
Complete Triple-play service configuration
Target Audience Describe and provision hairpin connection and
self-switching
Describe line test networking and device
requirement
Prerequisites Troubleshooting system
Completion of MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Troubleshooting Internet Access Service
Maintenance Training or having equivalent Troubleshooting Multicast Service

knowledge Troubleshooting VoIP service
Objectives Duration

Min 6, Max 12
PPPoE protocol
Describe function and message of RADIUS
629
8.10.9 HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Describe routing process

IP Network Technologies Fundamental Describe VLAN forwarding process
OBA00 Lecture 0.5d Describe SIP function and position in network

Describe SIP typical call flow
Describe H.248 function and position in
Voice Service Protocols network
Describe H.248 message structure and typical
OBA05 Lecture 1d
call flow
Describe provision xDSL service
Describe provision IMA service
HONET V6 Operation and Maintenance
Describe provision Ethernet service
Describe provision CES service
Perform V5 interface configuration
Target Audience
Perform PV8/RSP frame configuration
Technical Support Engineers Perform user configuration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform POTS service configuration
Prerequisites Perform ISDN service configuration
Perform daily operation and maintenance
network Duration

630
8.10.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training


Lecture
Login to U2000 server via client
iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Deal with the alarm
OBH52 Lab 2d
Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
via U2000
(Access) Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via
OBH30 Lecture 0.5d U2000
Perform MSAN multicast service configuration
Target Audience
via U2000
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
A basic understanding of U2000 and MSAN
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
631
8.11 BITS Training Programs
8.11.1 SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path network

Describe system structure and features of
SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance SYNLOCK V3
OSU01 3d Outline main functions of boards

Lecture, Lab
Configure different levels of clock source
Configure SYNLOCK V3 hardware
Target Audience
Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V3 network
Technical Support Engineers management system
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform SYNLOCK V3 network management
Prerequisites system maintenance

A basic understanding of telecommunication SYNLOCK V3
network
Complete the maintenance records of
Objectives SYNLOCK V3
Describe the common analysis methods of
fault locating
Analyze the typical faults
Understand basic concepts of synchronization
network Duration
Describe the composition of synchronization
3 working days
network
Class Size
Describe the applications of synchronization
632
8.11.2 SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path network

Describe system structure and features of
SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance SYNLOCK V5
OSU02 2d Outline main functions of boards

Lecture, Lab
Configure different levels of clock source
Target Audience Configure SYNLOCK V5hardware
Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V5 network
management system
Perform SYNLOCK V5 network management
Prerequisites
system maintenance
A basic understanding of telecommunication Perform the basic maintenance operations of
network SYNLOCK V5
Objectives Complete the maintenance records of
SYNLOCK V5
Describe the common analysis methods of
fault locating
Understand basic concepts of synchronization
Analyze the typical faults
network
Duration
Describe the composition of synchronization
network 2 working days
Describe the applications of synchronization Class Size
network
Min 6, Max 12
633
8.11.3 SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path Query the device status and alarm via

SYNLOCK V3
SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and Describe the network structure and function of
Maintenance
3d SYNLOCK V3
OSU03 Lecture, Lab
Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system
Target Audience configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
Query the device status and alarm via
SYNLOCK V3
Explain the meaning of network
Prerequisites synchronization
A basic understanding of telecommunication Differentiate between clock synchronization

network and time synchronization
Objectives List common technologies for network

synchronization
On completion of this program, the Describe common synchronization modes for
participants will be able to: SDH networks
Outline product positioning of SYNLOCK Describe clock levels and quality requirements
T6020 of clock at different levels
Describe hardware structure of SYNLOCK Explain the functions of IEEE 1588v2 clock
T6020 and its advantages/disadvantages
State the functions of boards and interfaces Duration
List the typical system configuration of
SYNLOCK T6020 3 working days
Describe the network structure and function of Class Size
SYNLOCK V3
Min 6, Max 12
Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system
configuration data via SYNLOCK V3
634
8.12 OSS Training Programs
8.12.1 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training
Training Path the iManager N2000 BMS

Perform server configuration, server startup
iManager N2000 BMS Administration and shutdown
OBN56 3d Perform system user management, N2000

Lecture, Lab
user management, NE user Management and
so on
Target Audience
Perform service and process management,
Technical Support Engineers Database management and NTP configuration
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform database backup and restoration,

routine management, emergency
Prerequisites
management, as well as know how to use
Having the basic knowledge of NMS management tool
Objectives Duration

Describe system structure, orientation
features, network application and functions of
Min 6, Max 12
635
8.12.2 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path Northbound TL1 interface

Background of TL1 interface
iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Features Describe hardware and software architecture
OBN80 4d of iManager N2000 BMS

Lecture
Describe the functions of each application
components
iManager N2000 BMS Installation Describe typical management solution which
may cooperate with OSS and third-party
OBN20 Lecture, Lab 1d
application and cases
Describe fault, provisioning, performance,
Target Audience
management and security solution
Technical Support Engineers Describe the solution and implementation of
Operation and Maintenance Engineers NBI (North Bound Interface)
Prerequisites Perform NBI operation and maintenance
Describe the solution and implementation of
dual system
Objectives
Describe the installation procedure
On completion of this program, the Install iManager N2000 system properly
Describe HA solution
5 working days
Describe Watchman principles
Class Size
Perform Watchman maintenance
Describe NMS northbound interface Min 6, Max 12
Northbound SNMP/CORBA interface
636
8.12.3 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)

Describe network management architecture
iManager N2000 BMS Introduction Describe the hardware and software
OBN00 0.5d architecture of iManager N2000 BMS

Lecture
Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation Login to N2000 Server via Client
and Maintenance
OBN30 Lab 1d
Deal with the alarm
iManager N2000 BMS Operation and Add a management user

Maintenance (GPON) Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via
OBN50 Lecture, Lab 1.5d
iManager N2000 BMS
Perform GPON FTTB/FTTC service
Target Audience
configuration via iManager N2000 BMS
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
network and GPON
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
637
8.12.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)

Describe network management architecture
iManager N2000 BMS Operation (DSLAM) Describe the hardware and software
OBN51 1.5d architecture of iManager N2000 BMS

Lab
Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS
iManager N2000 BMS Introduction Login to N2000 Server via Client
OBN00 Lecture 0.5d
Deal with the alarm
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation Add a management user

and Maintenance Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via
OBN30 Lab 1d
iManager N2000 BMS
Perform VDSL2 service configuration via
Target Audience
iManager N2000 BMS
3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
network and DSLAM
Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
638
8.12.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)
Training Path Describe network management architecture

Describe the hardware and software
iManager N2000 BMS Operation (MSAN) architecture of iManager N2000 BMS
OBN52 1.5d Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS

Lab
Login to N2000 Server via Client
iManager N2000 BMS Introduction Add a map and device
Deal with the alarm
OBN00 Lecture 0.5d
iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
and Maintenance via N2000 BMS
OBN30 Lab 1d
Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via
N2000 BMS
Target Audience
Perform MSAN V5 service configuration via
Technical Support Engineers N2000 BMS
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform MSAN multicast service configuration
Prerequisites via N2000 BMS
Duration
network and MSAN 3 working days

639
8.12.6 iManager N2510 Copper Software Test Operation Training

Describe the function of each functional unit of
iManager N2510 Software Test System iManager N2510 AOS test system
Overview
OBS01 0.5d Analyze test item such as SELT, DELT
Lecture
Understand the limits of measurements
Perform the N2510 system login
iManager N2510 Software Test System Perform the System Configuration
Carry out the line Testing operation
OBS32 Lecture, Lab 2.5d
Carry out the line analysis operation
Target Audience Carry out the line Optimization operation
Carry out the line Evaluation operation
Duration
Class Size
General understanding of access network and
xDSL technology Min 6, Max 12
Objectives
640
8.12.7 iManager N2510 Copper Hardware Test Operation Training
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System On completion of this program, the

OBS02 Lecture 1d
Describe LTS system typical networking
Outline LTS system function features
List part of testing measurement
iManager N2510 Hardware Test System
Operation and Maintenance Describe LTS system typical networking
OBS33 Lecture, Lab 2d Complete line resource configuration
Perform DMM, LB, FR and DMT via iManager
Target Audience
N2510
Technical Support Engineers Complete some of the testing demonstration
Prerequisites
3 working days
General understanding of access network and Class Size
xDSL technology
Min 6, Max 12
641
8.12.8 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training
iManager N2510 OLS System Overview On completion of this program, the

OBS03 Lecture 1d
Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking
Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution
functions
iManager N2510 OLS System Operation
and Maintenance List part of ODN common fault
OBS34 Lecture, Lab 2d Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and
Target Audience maintenance

3 working days
Prerequisites
Class Size
General understanding of PON technology and
Min 6, Max 12
related parameters
642
8.12.9 iManager N2510 Administration Training

Outline the system architecture, the network
iManager N2510 Test System Overview position, the networking solution and the
0.5d functional structure of iManager N2510

OBS04 Lecture
Describe the workstation platform solution of
iManager N2510 software test system, such as
iManager N2510 Test System PC solution and ATAE solution

Administration Describe the interfaces and its function of
OBS40 Lecture, Lab 2.5d
iManager N2510 software test system
Describe iManager N2510 installation
Target Audience
procedure
Technical Support Engineers Describe iManager N2510 administration item
Operation and Maintenance Engineers Perform iManager N2510 administration
General understanding of access network and 3 working days

OS Class Size
Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
643

Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge

Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department

2.1.14 PTN Product Training Path .................................................................................. 43

2.11.1 NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 91

2.20.4 WLAN Planning & Optimization Training ........................................................... 133

2.29.1 USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 170

4.1.6 Massive Storage Training Path ................................................................................. 243

Management Training ............................................................................................................ 279

5.1.6 eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training Path ...................................................... 310

5.10.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Trunking) .................................. 349

7.7.4 OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training .............................................................. 429

8.4 Principle Training Programs ............................................................................................. 556

8.12.1 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training .................................................. 635

1 Huawei Training & Certification Service Overview

1.1 Introduce Huawei Training & Certification Service

1.1.1 ICT Convergence Training & Certification Solution

1.1.2 Huawei Training Service

1.1.4 Learning Path

For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

XXX Product Essential Operation

XXX Product Advanced Operation

eSight- XXX Management

Technology Technical Fundamental

1.1.5 Huawei's Career Certification

Huawei Certified Network Associate (HCNA)

1.1.6 Training Instructors

1.1.7 Training Methods

1.2.1 China Global Training Center (CGTC)

1.2.2 Malaysia Global Training Center (MGTC)

1.3 General Terms and Conditions

Validity of Proposal and Pricing

1.3.2 Training Application

1.3.3 Training Cancellation Terms

1.3.4 Training location

1.3.5 Training Service Language

1.3.6 Training Quality Assurance

Course pre-requisite and Target Audience

1.3.7 Other Services for Trainee

1.3.8 Intellectual Property Right

1.4.1 How to register for a website account?

First, visit to http://learning.huawei.com/en.

1.4.2 How to get online learning resource?

How to find the http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-02

For more functions, please visit Website Help:

2.1 Training Path

2.1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path

HCNP-R&S-IERN HCNP-R&S-IESN HCNP-R&S-IENP

HCNP-Security-CISN HCNP-Security-CTSS HCNP-Security-CSSN

IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training

Huawei VRP System

Enterprise LAN Enterprise WAN

Advanced Technology Training

Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN Enterprise MPLS VPN

Enterprise IP Multicast Enterprise IP VPN

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Enterprise Network Design NE40E-X Router Installation Advanced Technology

Enterprise Campus Network NE40E-X Router Essential

Data Center Network Design NE40E-X Router Advanced

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design NE20E-S Router Installation and

NE20E-S Router Operation and

NE05E&08E Router Installation